Gi275 Install Manual 190-02246-14 - 14

GI 275
STC EIS & MFD

Installation Manual
190-02246-14 June 2023 Revision 14

© 2023
Garmin International, Inc., or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications. Ryan®, TCAD®, and
Avidyne® are registered trademarks of Avidyne Corporation. AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of
Penton Business Media Inc. Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.
© 2023 SiriusXM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM
Radio Inc. All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. Connext™, GDU™, GTN™, SVT™, and Telligence™ are trademarks of Garmin
International or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of
Garmin.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
©2023 SD® is a registered trademark of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
All other product or company names mentioned in this manual are trade names, trademarks, or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
For aviation product support, visit flyGarmin.com.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Gamin's website.
190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Rev. 14 Page i
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information that is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) issued by the United
States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign
nationals inside or outside of the United States without first obtaining an export license.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. For updates and supplemental information regarding the
operation of Garmin products, visit flyGarmin.com.
Software License Notification

AES Encryption
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 DR. Brian Gladman, subject to the following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes) provided:
• Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
• Distribution in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other associated materials.
• The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written permission.
Alternatively, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License (GPL) in which case the provisions of the GPL apply instead of those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties, including,
but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.

Rev. 14 Page ii
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
The software embedded in your Garmin product (the “Licensed Software”) is owned by Garmin International, Inc. (“Garmin” or
“us”). The Licensed Software is protected under copyright laws and international copyright treaties. The Licensed Software is
provided under this Software License Agreement (hereinafter the “Agreement”) and is subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by End User (“Licensee”, “you” or “your”), on the one hand, and Garmin and its licensors and
affiliated companies of Garmin and its licensors, on the other hand. The Licensed Software is licensed, not sold, to you. Garmin
and Licensee may be referred to individually as a “Party” or jointly as the “Parties.”
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING,
COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THIS PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE
READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT USE THIS PRODUCT.
1. Definitions. The following capitalized terms shall have the meanings set forth below:
a. “Device” means any Garmin device that is delivered by or on behalf of Garmin to Licensee onto which the Licensed
Software is installed.
b. “Documentation” means Gamin's then-current instructional, technical or functional documentation relating to the
Devices or Licensed Software which is delivered or made available by Garmin in connection with this Agreement.
c. “Licensed Software” means the software in binary executable form that is embedded in the Devices and/or made
available for use on the Devices via a software loader card.
d. “Permitted Purpose” means operating and using the Device on which the Licensed Software is installed for the
Device's intended use.
2. License.
a. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and Licensee's compliance with the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, Garmin hereby grants to Licensee a limited, royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable and revocable right and license to use and perform the Licensed Software as installed
on the Devices and the Documentation solely for the Permitted Purpose and only during the term of this Agreement,
provided that the Licensed Software may only be used by Licensee on Devices on which the Licensed Software has
been installed or otherwise made available by Garmin.
b. Reservation of Rights. Garmin retains exclusive ownership of all right, title and interest in and to the Licensed
Software and Documentation. All of Gamin's rights in and to the Licensed Software and Documentation not expressly
licensed to Licensee under Section 2.1 are expressly reserved for Garmin. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall
be construed as conferring by implication, acquiescence, or estoppel any license or other right upon Licensee. Without
limiting the foregoing, the Parties acknowledge and agree that this Agreement grants Licensee a license of the
Licensed Software under the terms of Section 2.1, and shall not in any manner be construed as a sale of the Licensed
Software or any rights in the Licensed Software.
3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

a. Prohibited Uses. Licensee shall not, shall not attempt to and shall not permit any third party to:
(a) sublicense, lease, loan, sell, resell, market, transfer, rent, disclose, demonstrate, or distribute the Licensed Software
or Documentation to any third party; (b) uninstall the Licensed Software from the Device on which it was originally
installed; (c) make any use of or perform any acts with respect to the Licensed Software or Documentation other than
as expressly permitted in accordance with the terms of this Agreement; (d) use the Licensed Software or
Documentation in any manner that violates any applicable law; (e) reproduce or copy the Licensed Software; (f)
modify, adapt, alter, translate, port, create derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
Licensed Software or Documentation or otherwise derive the source code or other proprietary information or trade
secrets from the Licensed Software; (g) remove, alter, or obscure any proprietary notices from the Licensed Software
or Documentation; (h) use the Licensed Software or Documentation to provide services to third parties (such as
business process outsourcing, service bureau applications or third party training); (i) use the Licensed Software on any
equipment, hardware or device other than a Device; or (j) export, re-export or otherwise distribute, directly or
indirectly, the Licensed Software or Documentation to a jurisdiction or country to which the export, re-export or
distribution of such Licensed Software or Documentation is prohibited by applicable law.

Rev. 14 Page iii
b. Protection of Software and Documentation. Licensee shall use its best efforts to protect the Licensed Software and
Documentation from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use with at
least the same degree of care as Licensee normally uses in protecting its own software and documentation of a similar
nature from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use. Licensee shall
limit access to the Licensed Software and Documentation to only those employees of Licensee who require access to
the Licensed Software or Documentation for the Permitted Purpose and who have been made aware of the restrictions
set forth in this Agreement. Licensee shall take prompt and appropriate action to prevent unauthorized use or
disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation.
4. Term and Termination.

a. Term. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date, and shall continue in perpetuity thereafter,
unless terminated earlier as provided in this Section 4.
b. Termination by Garmin. Garmin may immediately terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Licensee if
Licensee commits a material breach of this Agreement or breaches a material term of this Agreement.
c. Effect of Termination. Upon any termination of this Agreement for any Party: (a) Licensee shall immediately cease all
use of the Licensed Software and Documentation; (b) all rights and licenses granted to Licensee to the Licensed
Software and Documentation and Gamin's related obligations shall immediately terminate; and (c) Sections 4.3, 5 and
6 shall survive.
5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

a. DISCLAIMER. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION (INCLUDING ANY RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM ANY USE OF
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”
WITH NO WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND NEITHER GARMIN NOR ITS
AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, UNDER LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, OR SIMILAR, UNDER THE LAWS OF
ANY JURISDICTION. GARMIN DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR
DOCUMENTATION WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LICENSEE ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY NUCLEAR, MEDICAL, OR OTHER
INHERENTLY DANGEROUS APPLICATIONS, AND GARMIN DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY
DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED BY SUCH USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE.
b. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE
CONTRARY HEREIN, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES AND REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF ANY CLAIM SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR AN AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF USD $100, OR BE LIABLE IN ANY AMOUNT FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF GOODWILL
OR PROFITS, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES, DATA LOSS, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
ATTORNEYS' FEES, COURT COSTS, INTEREST OR EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF GARMIN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES.
c. Indemnity. Licensee shall indemnify, defend and hold Garmin and its affiliates harmless against any and all losses,
claims, actions, causes of action, liabilities, demands, fines, judgments, damages and expenses suffered or incurred by
Garmin or its affiliated companies in connection with: (a) any use or misuse of the Licensed Software or
Documentation by Licensee or any third party in Licensee's reasonable control; or
(b) Licensee's breach of this Agreement.
6. General.
a. No Devices or Services. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as
requiring Garmin to: (a) provide or supply the Devices or any other devices or hardware to Licensee; (b) grant any

Rev. 14 Page iv
licenses to any software other than the Licensed Software; or (c) provide any services, such as support, maintenance,
installation or professional services for the Licensed Software.
b. Non-Exclusive. Each Party's rights and obligations under this Agreement are non-exclusive. Garmin is not precluded
from marketing, licensing, providing, selling or distributing the Licensed Software or Documentation, or any other
products, software, documentation or services, either directly or through any third party.
c. Assignment. Licensee may not assign this Agreement or any of its rights, interests or obligations hereunder without
the prior written consent of Garmin. Any purported assignment in violation of this Section 6.3 shall be null and void.
Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns and transferees.
d. Feedback and Data. Licensee may from time to time provide feedback, comments, suggestions, questions, ideas, or
other information to Garmin concerning the Licensed Software or Documentation or Gamin's products, services,
technology, techniques, processes or materials (“Feedback”). Garmin may in connection with any of its products or
services freely use, copy, disclose, license, distribute and otherwise exploit such Feedback in any manner without any
obligation, payment, royalty or restriction whether based on intellectual property rights or otherwise.
e. Governing Law. The validity, interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement will be governed by the substantive
laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the state of Kansas. This Agreement shall not be governed by the 1980 UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
f. Legal Compliance. You represent and warrant that (i) you are not located in a country that is subject to a U.S.
Government embargo, or has been designated by the U.S. Government as a “terrorist supporting” country, and (ii) you
are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted parties.
g. Injunctive Relief. The Parties acknowledge and agree that irreparable damage would occur if any provision of this
Agreement was not performed in accordance with its specific terms or was otherwise breached and as such, the Parties
will be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the
performance of the terms and provisions of this Agreement without proof of actual damages, this being in addition to
any other remedy to which any Party is entitled at law or in equity.
h. Amendments and Waivers. This Agreement may be amended and any provision of this Agreement may be waived,
provided that any such amendment or waiver will become and remain binding upon a Party only if such amendment or
waiver is set forth in a writing by such Party. No course of dealing between or among any persons having any interest
in this Agreement will be deemed effective to modify, amend or discharge any part of this Agreement or any rights or
obligations of any Party under or by reason of this Agreement. No delay or failure in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder will affect or operate as a waiver thereof; nor will any single or partial exercise thereof or any
abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right, power or remedy preclude any further exercise
thereof or of any other right, power or remedy. The rights and remedies hereunder are cumulative and not exclusive of
any rights or remedies that any Party would otherwise have.
i. Severability. The provisions of this Agreement will be severable in the event that for any reason whatsoever any of the
provisions hereof are invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable, any such invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable
provisions will be replaced by other provisions which are as similar as possible in terms to such invalid, void or
otherwise unenforceable provisions but are valid and enforceable and the remaining provisions will remain valid and
enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, in each case so as to best preserve the intention of the
Parties with respect to the benefits and obligations of this Agreement.
j. No Third-Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and does not confer on third
parties any remedy, claim, reimbursement, claim of action or other right in addition to those existing without reference
to this Agreement.
k. Entire Agreement. This Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between Garmin and you with respect to the
subject matter hereof and will supersede all prior negotiations, agreements and understandings of Garmin and you of
any nature, whether oral or written, with respect to such subject matter.
l. Interpretation. In this Agreement: (a) headings are for convenience only and do not affect the interpretation of this
Agreement; (b) the singular includes the plural and vice versa; (c) the words 'such as', 'including', 'particularly' and
similar expressions are not used as, nor are intended to be, interpreted as words of limitation; (d) a reference to a
person includes a natural person, partnership, joint venture, government agency, association, corporation or other
body corporate; a thing includes a part of that thing; and a party includes its successors and permitted assigns; and (e)
no rule of construction applies to the disadvantage of a Party because that Party was responsible for the preparation of
this Agreement. Any translation of this Agreement from English is provided as a convenience only. If this Agreement
is translated into a language other than English and there is a conflict of terms between the English version and the
other language version, the English version will control.

Rev. 14 Page v
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Rev Revision Date Description
12 01/12/23 Updated software v2.60. Added GDL 60 interface.
13 03/13/23 Added models to the AML.
14 06/14/23 Added GEA 24B interface.
DESCRIPTION OF REVISION CHANGES

Section Description
All Replaced “GEA 24” with “GEA 24(B)” to include both variants, where applicable.
Added clarification that “GEA 24(B)” refers to both variants, while “GEA 24” and “GEA
1
24B” refer to those variants individually
3.1.1 Added GEA 24B part numbers to Table 3-3 GI 275 LRUs.
Added new approved Ethernet cable to Table 3-5 HSDB Cables.
3.1.2
Clarified that resistive fuel probe resistors are not applicable to GEA 24B.
Added statement about resistors not being required for GEA 24B interface to resistive fuel
3.4.2
quantity sensors.
Added GEA 24B to Table 4-6 GEA 24(B) Weight and Size.
4.6.1
Added GEA 24B part number to Figure 4-31 GEA 24(B) Mounting Hardware.
5.7.6 Added Fuel Calibration EIS diagnostics setting.
5.12 Added Clear Flight Logs diagnostic option.
Corrected Flag Note 5 and added Sheet 5 for optional GEA 24B Fuel Quantity wiring in
Appendix B
Figure B-6 GEA 24(B) Sensor Interconnect.
Appendix C Added GEA 24B to Table C-1 LRU Interface Summary.
C.12 Added 0-620 Ohm sensor configurations for resistive floats for GEA 24B interface.

Rev. 14 Page vi
DEFINITIONS
WARNING
A Warning means injury or death is possible.
CAUTION
A Caution means that damage to the equipment is possible.
NOTE
A Note provides additional information.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. For questions or additional
information, refer to www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
WARNING
Failure to properly configure the EIS gauges per the POH/AFM and other approved data
could result in serious injury, damage to equipment, or death.
WARNING
This product contains a Lithium-ion battery that must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Battery replacement and removal must be performed by a licensed A&P technician.

Rev. 14 Page vii
Acronyms
A
ADS-B Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast
AFCS Automatic Flight Control System
AFMS Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
AFM Aircraft Flight Manual
AGL Above Ground Level
ALT Altitude
AML Approved Model List
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
C
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDT Compressor Discharge Temperature
CFR Code of Federal Regulation
CHT Cylinder Head Temperature
CWS Control Wheel Steering
D
DC Direct Current
E
EAR Export Administration Regulations
ECDI Electronic Course Deviation Indicator
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
EIS Engine Indication System
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
F
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FAR Federal Aviation Regulation
FIS-B Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FLTA Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FOV Field of View
G
GDL Garmin Data Link
GDU Garmin Display Unit
GEA Garmin Engine and Airframe
GMA Garmin Marker/Audio

Rev. 14 Page viii
GNS Garmin Navigation System
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GP General Purpose
GPS Global Positioning System
GPSS Global Positioning System Steering
GPWS Ground Proximity Warning System
GS Glideslope
GSB Garmin Serial Bus
GTN Garmin Touchscreen Navigator
GTOW Gross Takeoff Weight
GTS Garmin Traffic System
GTX Garmin Transponder
GWX Garmin Weather Radar
H
HSDB High Speed Data Bus
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
I
IAT Induction Air Temperature
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IGRF International Geomagnetic Reference Field
ILS Instrument Landing System
ISA International Standard Atmosphere
L
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LOC Localizer
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
M
MFD Multi-Function Display
N
NAV Navigator
O
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
P
PFD Primary Flight Display
P/N Part Number
POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook
R
RAS Remote Aircraft Status

Rev. 14 Page ix
RPM Revolutions Per Minute
S
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation System
STC Supplemental Type Certificate
SXM Sirius XM
T
TA Traffic Advisory
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TC Type Certificate
TCAD Traffic Collision Avoidance Device
TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCDS Type Certificate Data Sheet
TIS-B Traffic Information Service - Broadcast
TIT Turbine Inlet Temperature
TNC Threaded Neill-Concelman
TSO Technical Standard Order
U
UTC Universal Time Coordinated
V
VHF Very High Frequency
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VLOC VOR/Localizer
VOR Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range
W
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System

Rev. 14 Page x
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GI 275 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 STC Applicability .....................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 System Overview ......................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 Equipment ...............................................................................................................................1-14
1.4 System Architecture Example .................................................................................................1-18
2 LIMITATIONS .................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations .............................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Operational Limitations .............................................................................................................2-5
3 PREPARATION ...............................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Materials and Parts ....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements .............................................................................................3-6
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment ................................................................................................3-14
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components ..............................................................................3-16
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis .........................................................................................................3-21
4 INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation ...................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Equipment Bonding ...................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Instrument Panel Installations ...................................................................................................4-7
4.4 Backshell Assembly ................................................................................................................4-25
4.5 Display Sensors .......................................................................................................................4-30
4.6 Engine Indicating System ........................................................................................................4-37
4.7 Remote Aircraft Status Relay Installation ...............................................................................4-52
4.8 Weight and Balance ................................................................................................................4-54
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................5-1
5.1 System Configuration Preparation ............................................................................................5-3
5.2 Software / Configuration ...........................................................................................................5-5
5.3 Unit Type ...................................................................................................................................5-7
5.4 Feature Enable ...........................................................................................................................5-9
5.5 Interfaces .................................................................................................................................5-10
5.6 Setup ........................................................................................................................................5-20
5.7 EIS ...........................................................................................................................................5-34
5.8 Calibration/Checks ..................................................................................................................5-45
5.9 External Systems .....................................................................................................................5-50
5.10 Diagnostics ..............................................................................................................................5-51
5.11 System Info .............................................................................................................................5-53
5.12 Maintenance ............................................................................................................................5-54
5.13 Restart Options ........................................................................................................................5-55
5.14 Wireless Connectivity .............................................................................................................5-56
5.15 Database Loading ....................................................................................................................5-57
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT ....................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Checkout Log ............................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Configuration Ground Checks ..................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks ......................................................................................6-5
6.4 Multifunction Display (MFD) Ground Checks .........................................................................6-6
6.5 Engine Indication System (EIS) Checks .................................................................................6-14
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check ......................................................................................6-18

Rev. 14 Page xi
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check ............................................................................6-19
6.8 Flight Checks ...........................................................................................................................6-21
6.9 Documentation Checks ...........................................................................................................6-22
7 TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts ......................................................................................................7-2
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................7-17
7.3 Interpreting Flight Data Logs ..................................................................................................7-18
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PIN FUNCTION ....................................................................A-1
A.1 GI 275 .......................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 GEA 24/GEA 24B ....................................................................................................................A-4
A.3 GTP 59 .....................................................................................................................................A-8
A.4 GSB 15 .....................................................................................................................................A-8
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS ................................................................................ B-1
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ...............................C-1
C.1 GPS Source .............................................................................................................................. C-3
C.2 VHF Navigation Receiver ........................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 Analog Navigation Receiver .................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 Radar Altimeter ........................................................................................................................ C-8
C.5 EIS ............................................................................................................................................ C-9
C.6 Transponder Control ................................................................................................................ C-9
C.7 Traffic Source ......................................................................................................................... C-10
C.8 Weather Source ...................................................................................................................... C-12
C.9 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source .................................................................................. C-12
C.10 External TAWS ...................................................................................................................... C-13
C.11 Audio Panel ............................................................................................................................ C-14
C.12 EIS Sensors ............................................................................................................................ C-15
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC DATA ........................................................................................D-1
APPENDIX E EIS GAUGE LAYOUT ................................................................................................ E-1
E.1 Main EIS Page .......................................................................................................................... E-2
E.2 AUX EIS Page ......................................................................................................................... E-7
E.3 CHT/EGT Page ........................................................................................................................ E-8
E.4 Fuel Page .................................................................................................................................. E-9
E.5 Summary Page ........................................................................................................................ E-10
E.6 Gauge Markings ..................................................................................................................... E-11
APPENDIX F HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ................................................................ F-1
F.1 Shielded Wire ............................................................................................................................F-2
F.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59 .....................................................................................................F-3
F.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams .....................................................................................F-19

Rev. 14 Page xii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System ............................................................1-5
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems ....................................................................1-5
Table 1-3 Technical References .............................................................................................................1-6
Table 3-1 GI 275 Units ...........................................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 GI 275 Connector Kits ...........................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-3 GI 275 LRUs ..........................................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-4 LRU Installation Kits .............................................................................................................3-3
Table 3-5 HSDB Cables .........................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-6 EIS Annunciators ...................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-7 Recommended Crimp Tools ..................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-8 Power Distribution .................................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-9 Circuit Breaker Labels - Single Essential Bus .......................................................................3-7
Table 3-10 Circuit Breaker Labels - Independent Essential Busses .........................................................3-7
Table 3-11 Required Gauges for EIS .......................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-12 Additional Gauges ..................................................................................................................3-9
Table 3-13 Available EIS Parameters ....................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-14 Garmin LRU HSDB Port Summary .....................................................................................3-12
Table 3-15 External TAWS Setup with GI 275 .....................................................................................3-15
Table 3-16 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist ................................................................................................3-16
Table 3-17 GI 275 System Components ................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-18 EGT and CHT Probe Quantity .............................................................................................3-18
Table 3-19 LRU Current Draw ...............................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-20 Net Electrical Load Change Calculation Example (14 VDC Aircraft) ................................3-21
Table 4-1 Bonding Requirements ...........................................................................................................4-5
Table 4-2 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Weight & Size ...................................................................4-10
Table 4-3 Backup Battery Weight and Size .........................................................................................4-14
Table 4-4 GSB 15 Weight and Size .....................................................................................................4-18
Table 4-5 Backup GPS Antenna Weight and Size ...............................................................................4-30
Table 4-6 GEA 24(B) Weight and Size ................................................................................................4-38
Table 5-1 GPS Interfaces and Configuration Settings .........................................................................5-12
Table 5-2 NAV Interfaces and Configuration Settings ........................................................................5-13
Table 5-3 RAD ALT Interfaces and Configuration Settings ................................................................5-14
Table 5-4 Transponder Configuration Settings ....................................................................................5-14
Table 5-5 EIS/GEA Configuration Settings .........................................................................................5-15
Table 5-6 Engine Annunciator Configuration Settings ........................................................................5-15
Table 5-7 Traffic System Configuration Settings ................................................................................5-16
Table 5-8 GDL 60 Configuration Settings ...........................................................................................5-17
Table 5-9 GDL 69 Configuration Settings ...........................................................................................5-18
Table 5-10 Stormscope Configuration Settings .....................................................................................5-18
Table 5-11 General Purpose Discrete In Settings ...................................................................................5-18
Table 5-12 General Purpose Discrete Out Settings ................................................................................5-18
Table 5-13 General Purpose A429 Output Settings ...............................................................................5-19
Table 5-14 General Purpose Serial Port Setting .....................................................................................5-19
Table 5-15 Example of Enhanced Lighting Mode Curve Configuration ...............................................5-21
Table 5-16 Photocell Configuration Procedure ......................................................................................5-21
Table 5-17 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure ................................................................................5-23
Table 5-18 Photocell Configuration Procedure - Enhanced Lighting ....................................................5-24
Table 5-19 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Display) .............................................5-25

Rev. 14 Page xiii
Table 5-20 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Knob) ................................................5-27
Table 5-21 Terrain/TAWS Setting .........................................................................................................5-31
Table 5-22 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data ....................................................................5-31
Table 5-23 EIS Configuration - Engine ..................................................................................................5-35
Table 5-24 Cruise RPM Setting .............................................................................................................5-35
Table 5-25 Fuel Flow K-Factor ..............................................................................................................5-39
Table 5-26 CHT/EGT Page Advanced Settings .....................................................................................5-40
Table 5-27 Original Gauge Settings .......................................................................................................5-41
Table 5-28 Additional Gauge Settings ...................................................................................................5-41
Table 5-29 Gauge Minimum and Maximum Ranges .............................................................................5-43
Table 5-30 Fuel Page Settings ................................................................................................................5-47
Table 5-31 Fuel Quantity Calibration Settings .......................................................................................5-47
Table 5-32 LRU Status Indicators ..........................................................................................................5-53
Table 5-33 Database Summary ..............................................................................................................5-58
Table 6-1 Checkout Log .........................................................................................................................6-2
Table 6-2 Interfaced Equipment Ground Check Section Reference ......................................................6-5
Table 6-3 Localizer/Glideslope Checks .................................................................................................6-8
Table 7-1 Flight Data Log Descriptions ...............................................................................................7-18
Table A-1 GI 275 Unit Connectors ........................................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 J2751/P2751 Connector ........................................................................................................A-3
Table A-3 GI 275 - GEA 24/GEA 24B ..................................................................................................A-4
Table A-4 J241/P241 Connector ............................................................................................................A-5
Table A-8 3-Conductor Shielded Cable .................................................................................................A-8
Table A-9 J201/P201 & J202/P202 ........................................................................................................A-8
Table C-1 LRU Interface Summary ....................................................................................................... C-2
Table C-2 Compatible GPS Position Source ......................................................................................... C-3
Table C-3 Compatible VHF Navigation Receiver ................................................................................. C-5
Table C-4 Compatible Analog Navigation Receiver ............................................................................. C-7
Table C-5 Compatible Radar Altimeter ................................................................................................. C-8
Table C-6 Compatible Engine Adapters ................................................................................................ C-9
Table C-7 Compatible Transponders ..................................................................................................... C-9
Table C-8 Compatible Traffic Source .................................................................................................. C-10
Table C-9 Compatible Weather Radar Sources ................................................................................... C-12
Table C-10 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ........................................................... C-12
Table C-11 Compatible External TAWS Sources ................................................................................. C-13
Table C-12 Compatible Audio Panels .................................................................................................... C-14
Table C-13 Compatible EIS Sensors ...................................................................................................... C-15
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data ...............................................................................................D-2

Rev. 14 Page xiv
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example) .....................................................1-4
Figure 1-2 GI 275 Multi-Function Display Indicator ............................................................................1-7
Figure 1-3 GI 275 Course Deviation Indicator ......................................................................................1-9
Figure 1-4 GI 275 Single-Engine EIS Interfaces .................................................................................1-11
Figure 1-5 GI 275 Twin-Engine EIS Interfaces ...................................................................................1-12
Figure 1-6 VFR GPS Antenna .............................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-7 GTP 59 OAT Probe ............................................................................................................1-14
Figure 1-8 GEA 24(B) Engine Adapter ...............................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-9 EIS Annunciator (Single) ...................................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-10 EIS Annunciator (Separate) ...............................................................................................1-15
Figure 1-11 Carburetor Temperature Probe ...........................................................................................1-16
Figure 1-12 Oil Temperature Probe .......................................................................................................1-16
Figure 1-13 Fuel Flow Transducer FT-60 (Left) and FT-90 (Right) .....................................................1-16
Figure 1-14 Pressure Sensors .................................................................................................................1-16
Figure 1-15 Backup Battery ...................................................................................................................1-17
Figure 1-16 GSB 15 Variants ................................................................................................................1-17
Figure 1-17 GI 275 MFD and EIS .........................................................................................................1-18
Figure 3-1 HSDB Architecture: Legend ..............................................................................................3-12
Figure 3-2 HSDB Architecture: EIS ....................................................................................................3-13
Figure 3-3 HSDB Architecture: MFD .................................................................................................3-13
Figure 3-4 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurement .................................................................3-23
Figure 3-5 Tabulated Electrical Load Form ........................................................................................3-25
Figure 3-6 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form ..................................................3-27
Figure 4-1 Shield Termination Methods ................................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-2 Example of Pilot Field-of-View Installation ........................................................................4-7
Figure 4-3 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine) ................................4-8
Figure 4-4 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Multi-Engine) .................................4-9
Figure 4-5 Example of GI 275s in Non-“Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine) ........................4-9
Figure 4-6 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Dimensions ......................................................................4-10
Figure 4-7 Installation of GI 275 Display in the Instrument Panel .....................................................4-11
Figure 4-8 GI 275 Cutout .....................................................................................................................4-12
Figure 4-9 Backup Battery Dimensions ...............................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-10 GI 275 Backup Battery Installation ...................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-11 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciator Installation ..........................................................4-16
Figure 4-12 Separate EIS Caution and Warning Annunciators Installation ..........................................4-17
Figure 4-13 GSB 15 Dimensions ...........................................................................................................4-19
Figure 4-14 GSB 15 Cutout Dimensions ...............................................................................................4-20
Figure 4-15 GSB 15 Cutout Installation ................................................................................................4-21
Figure 4-16 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (2.25-Inch Cutout) ..............................................4-22
Figure 4-17 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (3.125-Inch Cutout) ............................................4-23
Figure 4-18 GSB 15 Decorative Cover Installation ...............................................................................4-24
Figure 4-19 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly .............................................................4-26
Figure 4-20 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly ..........................................4-27
Figure 4-21 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly .........................................................................................4-28
Figure 4-22 Backup GPS Antenna Dimensions ....................................................................................4-30
Figure 4-23 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Non-Removable Installation Example) .....................4-31
Figure 4-24 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Removable Installation Example) .............................4-32
Figure 4-25 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions .......................................................................................4-33

Rev. 14 Page xv
Figure 4-26 GTP 59 Installation in Metallic Aircraft ............................................................................4-34
Figure 4-27 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Non-Conductive Access Panel) ...................4-35
Figure 4-28 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Conductive Access Panel) ............................4-36
Figure 4-29 Example Support Structure ................................................................................................4-38
Figure 4-30 GEA 24(B) Dimensions .....................................................................................................4-39
Figure 4-31 GEA 24(B) Mounting Hardware ........................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-32 Carburetor Temperature Sensor Installation Example .......................................................4-41
Figure 4-33 Oil Temperature Sensor Installation Example ...................................................................4-42
Figure 4-34 Brass Sensor Installation ....................................................................................................4-44
Figure 4-35 Mil-Spec Style Sensor Installation .....................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-36 GPT Sensor Installation .....................................................................................................4-46
Figure 4-37 Fuel Flow Installation Configurations ...............................................................................4-47
Figure 4-38 Example Fuel Flow Transducer Installation ......................................................................4-49
Figure 4-39 Fuel Flow Overbraid ..........................................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-40 TCM/Bendix Magneto Vent Hole ......................................................................................4-50
Figure 4-41 Slick Magneto Vent Hole ...................................................................................................4-51
Figure 4-42 10A Relay Bracket Examples ............................................................................................4-52
Figure 4-43 5A Relay Bracket Examples ..............................................................................................4-53
Figure 4-44 Multiple Relay Bracket Examples .....................................................................................4-53
Figure 5-1 System Configuration Flow .................................................................................................5-3
Figure 5-2 Entering the Configuration Menu ........................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Software Update ...................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 Interface and Ports/Config Selections ................................................................................5-10
Figure 5-5 Lighting Page .....................................................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-6 Lighting Curve Slope Configuration ..................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-7 Cutoff Percentage Configuration .......................................................................................5-22
Figure 5-8 Display Lighting (Left) and Knob Lighting (Right) Curves ..............................................5-24
Figure 5-9 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Photocell ...................................................................5-25
Figure 5-10 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Lighting Bus - Display ..............................................5-26
Figure 5-11 Selection Between Lighting Bus and Photocell Backup Curves .......................................5-26
Figure 5-12 Vertex Adjustment Dialog Box ..........................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-13 Page Config Page - MFD (Left) and EIS (Right) ..............................................................5-28
Figure 5-14 GI 275 Normal Mode Pages ...............................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-15 Sensor Menu Example .......................................................................................................5-36
Figure 5-16 TIT Sensor Configuration Example ...................................................................................5-37
Figure 5-17 Gauge Configuration Example ...........................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-18 Gauge Range Marking Example ........................................................................................5-43
Figure 5-19 Side Text Example .............................................................................................................5-44
Figure 5-20 Fuel Quantity Calibration Page ..........................................................................................5-49
Figure 5-21 Fuel Quantity Calculation Procedure .................................................................................5-49
Figure 6-1 EMI Victim/Source Matrix ................................................................................................6-20
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-2
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting ..............................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-8
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting ..................................................................................7-9
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting ................................................................7-10
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting .............................................................................7-11
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting .........................................................7-13
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting ...............................................................................7-14
Figure 7-9 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting .....................................................7-15

Rev. 14 Page xvi
Figure 7-10 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting .................................................................7-16
Figure A-1 GI 275 Connector ................................................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2 GI 275 J2751/P2751 Connector (Looking at Unit) .............................................................A-3
Figure A-3 GEA 24/GEA 24B Connectors ...........................................................................................A-4
Figure A-4 GEA 24/GEA 24B J241/P241 Connector (Looking at Unit) ..............................................A-5
Figure A-8 GSB 15 Connectors .............................................................................................................A-8
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect ................... B-3
Figure B-2 GPS Interconnect ................................................................................................................ B-5
Figure B-3 NAV Interconnect ............................................................................................................... B-6
Figure B-4 Analog CDI Interconnect .................................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-5 GEA 24(B) Power Interconnect .......................................................................................... B-9
Figure B-6 GEA 24(B) Sensor Interconnect ....................................................................................... B-10
Figure B-7 Audio Interconnect ............................................................................................................ B-19
Figure B-8 Annunciators ..................................................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-9 GDL 69 Series Interconnect .............................................................................................. B-21
Figure B-10 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ............................................................................................ B-22
Figure B-11 Stormscope Interconnect ................................................................................................... B-23
Figure B-12 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect .............................................................................. B-24
Figure B-13 GSB 15 Interconnect ......................................................................................................... B-27
Figure B-14 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect ........................................................................... B-28
Figure B-15 GDL 60 Remote Aircraft Status Interconnect ................................................................... B-29
Figure E-1 Example Main EIS Page ..................................................................................................... E-2
Figure E-2 Top Full-Time Gauge Examples ......................................................................................... E-2
Figure E-3 Bottom Full-Time Gauge Examples ................................................................................... E-3
Figure E-4 CHT/EGT Graph Examples ................................................................................................ E-4
Figure E-5 Strip Gauge Examples ......................................................................................................... E-4
Figure E-6 Strip Gauge Priority Examples ........................................................................................... E-5
Figure E-7 Strip Gauge Diagram .......................................................................................................... E-6
Figure E-8 Left Side Aux Gauges Examples ........................................................................................ E-7
Figure E-9 Right Side Aux Gauges Examples ...................................................................................... E-7
Figure E-10 Bottom AUX Gauges Examples ......................................................................................... E-7
Figure E-11 CHT/EGT Page Examples .................................................................................................. E-8
Figure E-12 Fuel Page without GPS Source ........................................................................................... E-9
Figure E-13 Fuel Page with GPS Source ................................................................................................ E-9
Figure E-14 Summary Page – Aircraft Timers ..................................................................................... E-10
Figure E-15 Summary Page – RPM and Temp Data ............................................................................ E-10
Figure E-16 Summary Page – Fuel and Lean Data ............................................................................... E-10
Figure E-17 Caution Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged) ................................................................... E-11
Figure E-18 Warning Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged) .................................................................. E-11
Figure E-19 Caution and Warning Alerts (Flashing and Acknowledged) ............................................ E-11
Figure E-20 New Caution Alert with Ongoing Warning Alert ............................................................. E-12
Figure E-21 Varying Gauge Arc ........................................................................................................... E-12
Figure F-1 Shielded Wire Splice ............................................................................................................F-2
Figure F-2 Lightning Zoning Legend ....................................................................................................F-3
Figure F-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation ........................................F-4
Figure F-4 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation ...............................................F-6
Figure F-5 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear ......................................................................F-7

Rev. 14 Page xvii
Figure F-6 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing) ...........................................................F-8
Figure F-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller .........................F-9
Figure F-8 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage ......................F-10
Figure F-9 Zoning for a Single, Rear-Mounted Prop above Fuselage .................................................F-11
Figure F-10 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ..................................F-12
Figure F-11 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ....................................F-13
Figure F-12 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing) ...........................F-14
Figure F-13 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above Fuselage ...........F-15
Figure F-14 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines ........................................F-16
Figure F-15 Zoning for Low or High Wing Canard with Twin Rear-Facing Props ..............................F-16
Figure F-16 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane ..................................................................................F-17
Figure F-17 Single Jet Engines with Two Inlets Zoning, Low or High Wing .......................................F-17
Figure F-18 Zoning for Empennage .......................................................................................................F-18
Figure F-19 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft .....................................................F-19
Figure F-20 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft .......................................................F-20

Rev. 14 Page xviii
1 GI 275 DESCRIPTION
1.1 STC Applicability .............................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 System Overview ..............................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1 Model Specifics..........................................................................................................................1-6
1.2.2 Functions ....................................................................................................................................1-7
1.3 Equipment.......................................................................................................................................1-14
1.3.1 Display Sensors ........................................................................................................................1-14
1.3.2 Engine Sensors .........................................................................................................................1-15
1.3.3 Other Equipment ......................................................................................................................1-17
1.4 System Architecture Example ........................................................................................................1-18
This installation manual is intended for use by those authorized to perform maintenance and/or avionics
installations on approved aircraft. This manual only approves the installation of the GI 275 Base (including
backup battery and backup GPS antenna), GSB 15, and GEA 24(B) (including EIS annunciator(s) and
engine sensors). Other compatible LRUs listed in Appendix C must use other installation approvals and
may require installation and/or configuration by an authorized Garmin dealer per Garmin’s installation
policy. It includes installation data and checkout procedures for the GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument and
refers to standards described in Title 14 CFR Part 43. Installation personnel must be familiar with the
contents of this manual prior to performing modifications to the aircraft.
This manual can only be used to install the Base variant of the GI 275 as an MFD and/or EIS display(s) in
Class I & II aircraft only. This manual cannot be used to install a GI 275 in aircraft considered to be
Class III or IV.
Installations of a GI 275 ADAHRS unit or ADAHRS+AP unit must use GI 275 Part 23 AML STC
Installation Manual (P/N 190-02246-10) for installation guidance.
Terms frequently used in this manual include:
• GI 275: Unless otherwise specified, refers equally to all variants of the GI 275.
• Metal aircraft: Aircraft with an aluminum (metallic) airframe, including exterior skin.
• References made to HSDB and Ethernet are used interchangeably.
• Non-metal aircraft: Aircraft with an airframe constructed from wood or composite, including
exterior skin, or aircraft with metal tubular truss airframe and fabric or composite exterior skin.
• Primary EGT: Exhaust gas temperature that is displayed independently from the exhaust gas
temperature associated with each cylinder. This is typically a probe installed downstream in the
exhaust to detect temperature from multiple cylinders. Used for EGT limitations in some aircraft.
• X: An “X” denotes variations of LRUs. Examples include:
◦ “GTN 6XX” refers to the GTN 625/635/650.
• ( ): Parenthesis denote an undetermined value. Examples include:
◦ “GI ( )” refers to GI 1, GI 2, etc. depending on the context.
• Throughout this manual references will be made to aircraft class. With regards to usage in this
manual, the classes are defined as follows:
◦ Class I: Single reciprocating engine airplane with GTOW of 6,000 lbs or less.
◦ Class II: Multi reciprocating or turbine engine airplane with GTOW of 6,000 lbs or less.
Refer to AC 23.1309-1E for more information on airplane classes.
• “GEA 24(B)” refers to both GEA 24 and GEA 24B. Specific references exclude the other variant.

Rev. 14 Page 1-1
1.1 STC Applicability
This manual defines aircraft modifications required to install the GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument under
the GI 275 Part 23 AML STC. It is only applicable to aircraft models listed on the Approved Model List.
Aircraft modifications per this STC involve the installation of components and LRUs specified in the STC
Equipment List, which include sensors common for engine parameters. Installation of components and
LRUs not included in the STC Equipment List require a separate airworthiness approval.
The GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument installed as an EIS display or MFD is approved for installation in
Class I & II aircraft, with certain limitations; refer to Section 2.
Applicability of this STC for a particular aircraft must be verified before the modification based on the data
contained in this manual. Some aircraft may have been modified or equipped with systems in which the
GI 275 interface is not defined nor approved. The installer must make the final determination if this STC is
applicable to a given aircraft.
The installation of the GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument in accordance with this STC is a major alteration
to the aircraft. Following a major alteration, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable
to the cognizant aviation authority. An example would be compliance with 14 CFR 43.9, 14 CFR 91.417,
and submission of an FAA Form 337 “Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or
Appliance” completed in accordance with AC43.9-1F Instructions for Completion of FAA Form 337.
Consistent with FAA Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.

Rev. 14 Page 1-2
1.2 System Overview
The GI 275 is a multi-function electronic instrument display capable of operating as a standalone display.
It features a bright, sunlight readable, 3⅛-inch diameter color display that is sized to fit in a standard
instrument cutout.
The GI 275 Multi-Function Instrument can be configured as the following indicator types:
• Multi-Function Display Indicator (MFD) functions shown in Section 1.2.2.1.
• Engine Instrument System Indicator (EIS) functions shown in Section 1.2.2.2.
The following dedicated pages are available on a GI 275 MFD:
• CDI (MFD only)
• HSI
• Stormscope
• Terrain
• Moving Map
• Radar Altimeter
• Traffic
• Weather
• Transponder
The GI 275 EIS uses the GEA 24(B) and sensors to replace various engine instruments and provide
indication of engine parameters. For a single engine, a single GI 275 with multiple pages can be used;
however, all primary alerting gauges must fit on the primary gauge page.
For twin-engine EIS, each engine must have a dedicated GEA 24(B) and each engine must have separate
GI 275 indicators. Only one indicator is permitted per engine. If multiple indicators are needed to display
all primary alerting gauges, then certain existing gauges must be retained instead.
EIS units may not share a GEA 24(B) interface with a G3X system. If using a GI 275 for EIS, then the EIS
interface may only be connected and displayed on the GI 275 system, and may not be connected or
displayed on a G3X system.

Rev. 14 Page 1-3
A typical modification to an aircraft instrument panel to install the GI 275 system is shown in Figure 1-1,
which illustrates an MFD and EIS installation.
Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example)

Rev. 14 Page 1-4
Additional information on the GI 275 system can be found in the Garmin documents listed in Table 1-1.
Additional information on Garmin equipment that can be interfaced to the GI 275 system can be found in
the Garmin documents listed in Table 1-2. Technical information applicable to the GI 275 system
installation can be found in the public documents listed in Table 1-3.
Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System

Document Title Garmin P/N
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02246-10
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual/ICA 190-02246-11
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Airplane Flight Manual Supplement 190-02246-12
GI 275 TSO Installation Manual 190-02246-00
GI 275 Pilot’s Guide 190-02246-01
GSB 15 TSO Installation Manual 190-00303-A3
GEA 24 Installation Manual 190-00303-55
Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems

Document Title Garmin P/N
G500/G600 TXi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01717-B3
G500/G600 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00601-06
G3X Touch EFIS Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02472-01
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-A3
GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01007-C0
400W Series Installation Manual 190-00356-02
500W Series Installation Manual 190-00357-02
GNS 480 Installation Guide 190-00504-00
GTX 3XX Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00734-10
GTS 8X5 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01279-00
GTS 8X0 / GPA 65 Installation Manual 190-00587-00
GDL 60 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02525-10
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GPS 175 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A1
GNX 375 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A4
GNC 355 Part 23 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02207-A5
GTR 225/GNC 255 TSO Installation Manual 190-01182-02
Garmin Pilot for iOS User’s Guide 190-01501-00
Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide 190-01532-00

Rev. 14 Page 1-5
Table 1-3 Technical References
Document Title Document Number
FAA Advisory Circular, Powerplant Guide for Certification of Part 23 Airplanes
FAA AC 23-16A
and Airships
FAA Advisory Circular, Installation of Electronic Display in Part 23 Airplanes FAA AC 23.1311-1C
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices - Aircraft
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Alterations
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis ASTM F2490-05
1.2.1 Model Specifics

The GI 275 Base unit has one 78-pin D-sub connector and is capable of functioning as an MFD or EIS unit.
A backup battery can optionally be installed internally in a GI 275 Base configured as an MFD.

Rev. 14 Page 1-6
1.2.2 Functions
1.2.2.1 Multifunction Flight Display (MFD)
The GI 275 can function as a MFD with configurable pages to show information from other interfaced
LRUs.
Required and
installed per STC
Optional and
installed per STC
Not installed per
STC GI 275
Backup GPS Coaxial Multi‐Function Display

Antenna
(MFD)
USB
GSB 15
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1]....Each GI 275 only supports one RS‐232 ARINC 429

Stormscope Radar Altimeter
analog Nav interface.
HSDB
HSDB or
Traffic or
GPS #1‐2
RS‐232 &
ARINC 429 ARINC 429
Weather HSDB HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2

RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [1]
Figure 1-2 GI 275 Multi-Function Display Indicator

Rev. 14 Page 1-7
The following features are available on a GI 275 configured as an MFD:
• Configurable Multi-function Display (MFD).
• Electronic Course Deviation Display, ECDI with map underlay.
• MFD Data Display.
• Traffic (ADS-B, TCAS with control).
• Weather (FIS-B, SXM).
• Moving map with direct-to navigation, terrain traffic, and weather overlay.
• Query map items (limited to waypoint information).
• Nearest airport information.
• Terrain display.
• Direct-to nearest airport with internal GPS.
• Connext and LRU status.
• Radar altitude.
• Secondary EIS display.
• Transponder control (GTX 345 only).
The configurable MFD pages that show the above information can be independently enabled or disabled to
show applicable data from connected LRUs, which include:
• CDI (requires GPS or NAV source).
• Traffic display (requires traffic source).
• Moving map with weather, terrain, and traffic overlays.
• MFD data page with waypoint information (requires GPS or NAV).
• Supplemental EIS display (only the Fuel page for installations with multiple primary EIS
displays).
• Radar Altitude digital gauge display (requires radar altimeter).
• Transponder Control page (requires GTX 345 series transponder).

Rev. 14 Page 1-8
1.2.2.1.1 Standalone Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
The Electronic Course Deviation Indicator provides a display for lateral and vertical deviations and is
displayed on a GI 275 configured as an MFD.
NOTE
When the GI 275 is configured as a standalone CDI, the HSI and Enhanced HSI pages
must be configured Off.
Required and
installed per STC
Optional and
installed per STC
Not installed per
STC GI 275
Backup GPS Coaxial CDI

Antenna [2]
GSB 15 USB
Backup Battery
(Optional)
[1]….Each GI 275 only supports one HSDB
analog NAV. GPS #1‐2 HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2
or RS‐232 or ARINC 429 [1]
[2]….Supported on MFD RS‐232 & ARINC 429
configuration.
Figure 1-3 GI 275 Course Deviation Indicator
The following features are available on the CDI page on a GI 275 configured on as an MFD:
• Electronic Course Deviation Indicator.
• Direct-to nearest airport with internal GPS.
• Connext and LRU status.

Rev. 14 Page 1-9
1.2.2.2 Engine Indication System (EIS)
The GI 275 provides EIS display for four- and six-cylinder reciprocating engines. EIS does not include
turbine engines. An EIS installation consists of one GEA 24(B) per engine and one GI 275 per engine.
The EIS display can drive caution and warning lights that may be required for installation when the
indicator is not installed in the primary field-of-view.
The EIS display collects powerplant data and utilizes an automatic monitoring system that interprets and
reports the data to the pilot in the form of an alert. The crew can acknowledge the alert, which prompts the
indicator to display page one, which contains the data parameter in question. This reduces the amount of
information displayed at a given time to the crew, allowing the EIS indicator to work for the pilot by
monitoring engine data and notifying the crew with an alert.
The EIS has the capability to configure up to five pages. Each configured parameter with alerting markings
on page one is tied to an alert that will be displayed across the bottom of the screen when an exceedance
occurs. Additionally, critical performance data is displayed on every page: fuel quantity, RPM, and if
applicable, manifold pressure.
GI 275 with EIS offers three aircraft timers: Flight Hours, Hobbs Timer, and Tach Timer. Flight Hours
accrue in-air, as the status is derived from weight-on-wheels, GPS speed, or engine RPM. The Hobbs
Timer is activated by engine oil pressure (was Engine Time in software v2.11 or earlier). Tach Time
(software v2.20 or later) accrues relative to engine cruise RPM.
In addition to this section, the following sections provide information that must be considered for EIS
installations:
• Section 2.1.3 - EIS limitations.
• Section 3.2.2 - Minimum EIS requirements and available EIS gauges.
• Section 3.4.2 - Sensor selection criteria.
• Section 5.7.4.2 - Gauge markings and configuration requirements.
• Appendix Section C.12 - Approved sensor interface or installation, includes configuration.
• Appendix D - Model-Specific Info to determine if a Fuel Pressure Test is required.
• Appendix E - EIS gauge layouts.

Rev. 14 Page 1-10
Engine RPM Voltmeter
Required and
installed per STC
Oil Temperature Ammeter
Optional and
installed per STC
Oil Pressure Turbine Inlet Temp
(TIT)
Not installed per
STC Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air
[1] Temp
Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge

(CHT) Probes Temp (CDT)
[5]
Exhaust Gas Temp

(EGT) Fuel Pressure
[2] [5]
Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity

[2] Sensor(s)
Various Analog/Digital
Outside Air Temp
(GTP 59)
Backup GPS
Antenna
Coaxial HSDB GI 275
[ADI/HSI/MFD]
[4]
RS‐232
GSB 15
USB GEA 24(B)
[3]
GI 275
Base Unit
HSDB
EIS #1 GDL 60
Single Engine
[1]….If equipped.
[2]….Required sensor for Lean Assist.
[3]….Refer to Section 2 for limitations.
[4]….Used for fuel distance estimations.
GPS HSDB
[5]….Required interface for GI 275
[4] or
RS‐232 software v2.40 or later.
Figure 1-4 GI 275 Single-Engine EIS Interfaces

Rev. 14 Page 1-11
Engine #1 Engine #2
Engine RPM Voltmeter Engine RPM Voltmeter

Required and
installed per STC
Oil Temperature Ammeter Oil Temperature Ammeter
Optional and
Oil Pressure Turbine Inlet Temp installed per STC Turbine Inlet Temp
Oil Pressure
(TIT) (TIT)
Not installed per

Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air Manifold Pressure Carb/Engine Inlet Air
[1] Temp STC [1] Temp
Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge
(CHT) Probes Temp (CDT) [1]….If equipped. (CHT) Probes Temp (CDT)
[6] [6]
[2]….Required sensor for Lean Assist.
Exhaust Gas Temp [3]….Refer to section 2 for limitations. Exhaust Gas Temp
(EGT) Fuel Pressure (EGT) Fuel Pressure
[2] [6] [4]….Used for fuel distance estimations. [2] [6]
[5]….Connect the GTP 59 to either EIS #1
Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity
[2] Sensor(s) [7] or EIS #2, but not both. [2] Sensor(s) [7]
[6]….Required interface for GI 275
Outside Air Temp software v2.40 or later.
(GTP 59) [5]
/Digital
[7]….Wiring FQ sensors to either both
Analog
GEAs or to a single GEA is allowed.
/Digital
Display the FQ only on one of the
Analog
GI 275 EIS displays.
RS‐232 GEA 24(B)
GEA 24(B) RS‐232 HSDB GI 275 [3]
[3] ADI/HSI/MFD
Backup GPS Coaxial
Antenna [4]
USB
GSB 15
GI 275 GI 275
Base Unit Base Unit
GPS HSDB or HSDB HSDB

[4] RS‐232 EIS EIS GDL 60
#1 Engine #2 Engine
Figure 1-5 GI 275 Twin-Engine EIS Interfaces

Rev. 14 Page 1-12
1.2.2.3 Wireless Connectivity
With the Garmin Pilot application (iOS and Android) installed on a personal electronic device, users can
update databases (refer to Section 5.14 for procedures), sync flight plans from an installed GPS 175,
GNX 375, or GNC 355, log flight data, and review traffic, weather, and location data from externally
connected LRUs. When paired to the GI 275, the Garmin D2 Delta Pilot watch can display key flight
information, such as position, airspeed, and altitude.
NOTE
Updating databases is disabled in flight. Databases must be updated while the aircraft is
on the ground.
NOTE
Visit flyGarmin.com to purchase flight databases. The GI 275 System ID is required when
purchasing databases from Garmin. Refer to Section 5.3.2 for instructions on obtaining
the System ID.

Rev. 14 Page 1-13
1.3 Equipment
Equipment installed by this STC is grouped into three categories:
1. Display Sensors
2. Engine Sensors
3. Other Equipment
1.3.1 Display Sensors

1.3.1.1 VFR GPS
The GI 275 contains a VFR GPS that can be used as a backup GPS or as a restricted primary GPS source.
NOTE
Credit is not taken for the GI 275 internal GPS for GPS navigation (NAV) in IFR flight;
the equipment and operational requirements for IFR must be met by other navigation
source(s) in the aircraft.
The VFR GPS will be capable of displaying moving map functions depicting ownship position, velocity,
ground speed, ground track, traffic overlay, weather, Stormscope, and direct-to only functions in certain
instances.
The internal VFR GPS interfaces to a glareshield-mounted GPS antenna, which can be used in the event of
a failure of the primary GPS source or to provide VFR only situational information. Only one VFR GPS
antenna is needed for all GI 275s. The GPS data will be used by the interfacing GI 275 and it will forward
the data to any GI 275 configured to receive the data.
Figure 1-6 VFR GPS Antenna
1.3.1.2 GTP 59
The GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe is a remote-mounted sensor that interfaces to a GEA
for OAT display. OAT is used to produce supplemental percent power for the powerplant on EIS units.
When interfaced to a GEA, only Total Air Temperature (TAT) is displayed as “OAT (EIS)”.
Figure 1-7 GTP 59 OAT Probe

Rev. 14 Page 1-14
1.3.2 Engine Sensors
Each engine requires a single GEA 24(B) adapter that is mounted remotely. Refer to Section 4.6.1 for
installation instructions.
1.3.2.1 GEA 24(B) Engine Adapter

The GEA 24(B) is an engine interface and monitoring module that collects signals from the engine sensors
and communicates the engine parameters to the GI 275 via RS-232. The GEA 24(B) is approved for single
and multi-engine aircraft with a gross takeoff weight of 6000 lbs or less (i.e., Class I & II aircraft).
Figure 1-8 GEA 24(B) Engine Adapter

(GEA 24 Shown; GEA 24B Similar)
1.3.2.2 EIS Annunciator

EIS annunciation can be provided by a single warning (red)/caution (amber) indicator (Figure 1-9) or
separate warning and caution lamps (Figure 1-10), which is required for EIS installations when the EIS
display is located outside the pilot’s primary field-of-view. Refer to Section 4.3 for field-of-view
requirements.
Figure 1-9 EIS Annunciator (Single)
Figure 1-10 EIS Annunciator (Separate)

Rev. 14 Page 1-15
1.3.2.3 Miscellaneous Engine Sensors
The carburetor temperature probe is a K-Type thermocouple.
Figure 1-11 Carburetor Temperature Probe
The oil temperature probe is a K-Type thermocouple.
Figure 1-12 Oil Temperature Probe
There are two options for fuel flow transducers; refer to Section 3.4.2 for descriptions and restrictions.
The fuel flow transducers are installed in-line with the engine fuel delivery system. The display of fuel
flow under the GI 275 STC supports the following engines:
1. Fuel injected engines with and without the fuel servo return line (systems with return line will
require two fuel flow transducers).
2. Carbureted engines with a fuel pump, without the carburetor return line, and with the carburetor
return line (will require two fuel flow transducers).
3. Carbureted engines with gravity-fed fuel delivery system.
Figure 1-13 Fuel Flow Transducer FT-60 (Left) and FT-90 (Right)
The Garmin GPT and brass pressure sensors have NPT pressure ports and Packard style electrical
connectors. They are interchangeable, however the sensor configuration must be updated if they are
swapped. The mil-spec style sensors are a durable all-metal design featuring a 37 degree flared fitting and
round electrical connector.
Refer to Section 3.2.2 and Section 3.4.2 for more information.
Figure 1-14 Pressure Sensors

Rev. 14 Page 1-16
1.3.3 Other Equipment
1.3.3.1 Backup Battery
The backup battery is a lithium-iron battery that is optional for MFD installations. The battery will power
the essential display sensors for a minimum of 60 minutes. The battery is charged by the aircraft electrical
system when not in use.
Figure 1-15 Backup Battery
1.3.3.2 GSB 15
The GSB 15 is an optional LRU that mounts into the instrument panel and provides two USB connections
to a GI 275 unit. Variants include dual USB Type-A ports, dual USB Type-C ports, and single USB
Type-A/single USB Type-C ports. Each variant also has the option to have the connector on the rear or side
of the unit.
The USB ports can be used in place of a USB dongle to update the software on the GI 275 system and to
charge devices while in-flight. A decorative cover can optionally be installed.
Figure 1-16 GSB 15 Variants

(Left: Dual Type-A, Center: Single Type-A/Single Type-C, Right: Dual Type-C)

Rev. 14 Page 1-17
1.4 System Architecture Example
Engine #1 Engine #2
Inputs Inputs
Digital
Digital
Analog
Analog
Backup GPS RS‐232 (GEA 24) RS‐232 (GEA 24)
USB Coaxial GEA 24(B) GEA 24(B)
GSB 15
Antenna
HSDB
GDL 60
GI 275 GI 275 GI 275
Base Unit Base Unit Base Unit
HSDB HSDB
Multi‐Function Display EIS EIS
MFD #1 Engine #2 Engine
Backup Battery
(Optional)
HSDB [1]
Required and installed per STC
RS‐232 ARINC 429
Stormscope Radar Altimeter
Optional and installed per STC
HSDB or
HSDB RS‐232 & Not installed per STC
Traffic or
GPS #1‐2
ARINC 429
ARINC 429
[1]….If HSDB ports are available, this
HSDB
Weather HSDB or Analog or
NAV #1‐2 connection is optional as an HSDB
RS‐232 or ARINC 429 failure redundancy.
Figure 1-17 GI 275 MFD and EIS

Rev. 14 Page 1-18
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Installation Limitations .....................................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 System ........................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.2 General Installation ....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 EIS ..............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.4 VFR GPS....................................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.5 USB Connection.........................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.6 Part 121/135 Operations.............................................................................................................2-4
2.1.7 VHF HSI ....................................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.8 Transponder Control ..................................................................................................................2-4
2.2 Operational Limitations ....................................................................................................................2-5

Rev. 14 Page 2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations
2.1.1 System
Only the equipment or aircraft systems with interface(s) approved by this STC can be connected to the
GI 275. Installation of equipment that is not on the STC Equipment List but is interfaced to a GI 275
requires separate airworthiness approval.
Configuration and number of GI 275 displays installed under this STC is limited to a maximum of:
• Six displays total.
• Two EIS displays.
CAUTION
The total weight of new equipment installed in the instrument panel must not exceed the total
weight of equipment removed from the panel, unless the total weight of all the equipment installed
in the instrument panel is within the weight limits established by the aircraft manufacturer.
2.1.2 General Installation

The GI 275 is designed to replace existing 3⅛-inch gauges. Therefore, minimum modification of the panel
will be necessary.
For GI 275 system components that are mounted outside the pressure vessel of pressurized aircraft, wires
that penetrate the pressure vessel must use aircraft type design provisions such as spare pins in existing
bulkhead connectors or existing cutouts in the aircraft pressure bulkheads. Substantiation for additional
holes or cutouts in the aircraft pressure vessel are beyond the scope of the GI 275 AML STC and require
separate airworthiness approval.
2.1.3 EIS
The existing engine gauges can be replaced by an EIS display only if the functionality, markings, and
operational limits of the original gauges are capable of being replicated on the EIS display. The original
gauge must not be removed if any operating parameter, marking, or annunciation required by aircraft type
design, engine type design, or aircraft POH/AFM (or similar) cannot be replicated on the display or an
appropriate placard cannot be installed.
GI 275 EIS is limited to one EIS display for single-engine aircraft and one EIS display per engine for
twin-engine aircraft. In twin-engine aircraft with two GI 275 EIS displays and a GI 275 MFD, the Fuel
page is the only EIS page approved to be displayed on the MFD. All other EIS pages must be disabled on
the MFD.
EIS is only approved for air-cooled 4- and 6-cylinder reciprocating engine equipped aircraft. Select aircraft
models on the AML have EIS limitations. Refer to notes in Table D-1.
All gauges with red and/or yellow markings, if intended to be replaced by a GI 275 EIS display, must be
identically configured on the Main EIS page. In some cases, one GI 275 will not have enough available
spaces for gauges on the Main EIS page. Any of the following cases will require the retention of the
original gauge(s):
• Three or more of the following gauges have red or yellow marks: Fuel Flow, Fuel Pressure, CDT,
IAT, Carb Temp, and CDT/IAT Diff.
• Two of the following gauges have red or yellow marks: Fuel Flow, Fuel Pressure, CDT, IAT, Carb
Temp, and CDT/IAT Diff, and one of the following is true:

Rev. 14 Page 2-2
◦ Dual Aux Fuel Tanks are configured and one or more electrical gauges have a red or yellow
marking.
◦ A Single Aux Fuel Tank is configured and two or more electrical gauges have a red or
yellow marking.
• Three or more electrical gauges have a red or yellow marking.
The Main EIS page can display up to four strip gauges along with a CHT/EGT/TIT graph and two digital
readout gauges. Refer to Section 5.7.4 and Appendix E for more information on gauge layout
requirements.
If an oil temperature, oil pressure, or fuel pressure sensor is being replaced, the GI 275 sensor must use the
same port(s) as the original sensor, unless otherwise specified.
The GI 275 EIS does not currently support aircraft with:
• Turbine engines.
• Radial engines.
• Engines with FADEC or electronic ignition systems.
• CDT, IAT, DIFF engine indications for more than one inter-cooler per engine.
• Indications for more than two ammeters per engine (alternator amps, battery charge/discharge).
• Indications for more than two voltmeters per engine (bus volts, battery volts).
• Engine turbochargers that have an oil system separate from the engine oil system and have
turbocharger oil pressure or temperature gauge(s).
The Prop Sync Wheel is limited to conventional twin-engine aircraft and prohibited in centerline thrust
aircraft (e.g., Cessna Skymaster).
Percent Power display is prohibited from replacing the Cirrus SR22 horsepower display in all models
where the existing horsepower gauge is used to control the engine per the POH.
2.1.3.1 Engine Adapter

Only one engine adapter per engine may be installed.
GEA 24(B) installations are limited to single and twin reciprocating engine aircraft with a gross takeoff
weight of 6,000 lbs or less and a service ceiling of 32,000 feet or less (Class I & II). The GEA 24(B) must
be mounted remotely and cannot be installed within the engine compartment or areas with water or fluids.
The GEA 24(B) cannot be interfaced to resistive fuel quantity floats in twin-engine aircraft (i.e., Class II)
in some installations. Refer to the aircraft model notes in Table D-1.
EIS units may not share a GEA 24(B) interface with a G3X system. If using a GI 275 for EIS, then the EIS
interface may only be connected and displayed on the GI 275 system, and may not be connected or
displayed on a G3X system.
2.1.3.2 Pressure Sensors

Brass body pressure sensors are not approved for installation in aircraft that have an operational ceiling
greater than 32,000 feet. Refer to Table C-13 for part numbers.

Rev. 14 Page 2-3
2.1.4 VFR GPS
The VFR GPS can be used with an installed glare shield antenna as a backup GPS source or in an aircraft
without a primary GPS source. If the aircraft is IFR rated, the aircraft must maintain its equipment for IFR
requirements (i.e., NAV sources). The display of primary VFR GPS is for situational awareness only and is
not approved for IFR navigation credit.
2.1.5 USB Connection

Each installed GI 275 unit must have a dedicated USB connection. This can be accomplished with either
the USB pigtail (P/N 325-00238-02) that is included in each GI 275 connector kit or with the optional
GSB 15.
The USB pigtail is for maintenance purposes only and is prohibited from being used while in-flight. The
USB pigtail must be capped and stowed prior to returning the aircraft to service. The GSB 15 is capable of
powering PEDs using its USB ports while in-flight.
2.1.6 Part 121/135 Operations

Single-engine aircraft operated under 14 CFR Part 135 must have two independent electrical sources or a
standby battery or generator/alternator capable of supplying 150% of the electrical loads of all required
instruments and equipment necessary for safe emergency operations of the aircraft for 60 minutes in
accordance with 135.163(f).
For multi-engine aircraft operated under 14 CFR Part 135, the electrical load of all required instruments
and equipment necessary for emergency operations must not be greater than one-half of the total generated
power in accordance with 14 CFR 135.163(g).
2.1.7 VHF HSI

Unless the aircraft is placarded VFR Only, the GI 275 MFD must be configured to hide the HSI page when
the GI 275 is connected to a VHF NAV source. The CDI page may be used for VHF NAV.
2.1.8 Transponder Control

The Transponder Control function is only provided when the GI 275 is interfaced to a GTX 345 series
transponder. If configured, the Transponder Control page must be set as the final page on an MFD unit.
The GI 275 must be the only control source for the GTX 345 if used for the transponder control function;
control using another source, such as a GTN 6XX or GTN Xi, is outside the scope of this STC.

Rev. 14 Page 2-4
2.2 Operational Limitations
All functions of the GI 275 system meet the appropriate design assurance qualifications for all aircraft
listed on the AML. References listed in Table 1-1 provide a comprehensive list of TSO authorizations by
function. The instructions in this manual must be followed in order to ensure an airworthy installation for
aircraft operating under Title 14 CFR Parts 91, 121, and 135 with the limitations of those installations
listed here.

Rev. 14 Page 2-5
3 PREPARATION
3.1 Materials and Parts............................................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Garmin........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Commercial ................................................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Special Tools Required ..............................................................................................................3-5
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements .....................................................................................................3-6
3.2.1 Power Distribution .....................................................................................................................3-6
3.2.2 Engine Indication System (EIS).................................................................................................3-8
3.2.3 GPS Requirements ...................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.4 Display Lighting Control .........................................................................................................3-11
3.2.5 HSDB Architecture ..................................................................................................................3-12
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment........................................................................................................3-14
3.3.1 GPS Source ..............................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 Navigation Receiver.................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.3 Radar Altimeter ........................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.4 Traffic.......................................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.5 Data Link..................................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope® .............................................................................................................3-15
3.3.7 Audio Panel ..............................................................................................................................3-15
3.3.8 Transponder Control ................................................................................................................3-15
3.3.9 External TAWS ........................................................................................................................3-15
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components ......................................................................................3-16
3.4.1 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist....................................................................................................3-16
3.4.2 EIS Equipment .........................................................................................................................3-18
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis.................................................................................................................3-21
3.5.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads.............................................................................................3-22
3.5.2 Battery Capacity Analysis........................................................................................................3-29

Rev. 14 Page 3-1
3.1 Materials and Parts
Equipment must be sourced from both Garmin and commercial vendors for installation of the GI 275. This
section provides a description of the equipment and the installation kits available from Garmin and also
commercially available parts and their requirements.
3.1.1 Garmin
GI 275 components and applicable installation kits are supplied by Garmin. Refer to the Aviation Price
Catalog on flyGarmin.com for details once the selection for a particular aircraft installation is determined.
Refer to the latest revision of GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Equipment List (P/N 005-01208-42) for the
approved Mod Status of equipment. Engine sensors with Garmin part numbers listed in Table C-13 are
available from Garmin.
Table 3-1 GI 275 Units

Part Number
Unit
Unit Catalog
GI 275 Base 011-04489-00 010-01912-00
GI 275 Base NVIS 011-04489-60 010-01912-60
Table 3-2 GI 275 Connector Kits

Connector Kit Part Number
GI 275 connector kit (GI 275 Base units) 011-04809-00
Configuration Module 011-04038-00 [1]
Notes:
[1] Included with connector kit. Listed for reference only.
Table 3-3 GI 275 LRUs

Part Number
Unit
Unit Catalog
GEA 24 011-02848-01 010-01042-01
GEA 24B 011-05991-01 010-02770-01
Backup Battery 011-04528-00 010-02304-00
GSB 15, Dual Type-A, Rear 011-04937-00 010-02201-00
GSB 15, Type-A & Type-C, Rear 011-04937-20 010-02201-20
GSB 15, Dual Type-C, Rear 011-04937-40 010-02201-40
GSB 15, Dual Type-A, Side 011-04937-01 010-02201-01
GSB 15, Type-A & Type-C, Side 011-04937-30 010-02201-30
GSB 15, Dual Type-C, Side 011-04937-50 010-02201-50
GTP 59 011-00978-00 011-00978-00
Backup GPS Antenna 011-04036-10 010-12444-10

Rev. 14 Page 3-2
Table 3-4 LRU Installation Kits
Remote LRU Connector Kit Part Number
GEA 24 connector kit 011-02886-01
GSB 15, 2.25-inch mounting kit 011-05043-00
GSB 15, 3.125-inch mounting kit 011-05043-01
GSB 15 decorative cover kit, unfinished [1] 011-05291-00
GSB 15 decorative cover kit, black powder coat [1] 011-05291-01
GSB 15 connector kit 011-05044-00
Notes:
[1] The GSB 15 decorative cover is optional and is for aesthetic purposes only.
3.1.2 Commercial
The GI 275 equipment is designed to be installed using standard commercially available parts and
accessories. The following may be required for the installations:
1. MS26574 or MS22073 push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers or other trip-free, push-pull
circuit breaker type as specified in the aircraft manufacturer’s parts catalog.
2. MIL-W-22759/16 or MIL-W-22759/18 electrical wire.
NOTE
MIL-W-22759/18 wire is recommended due to the insulation diameter being more
compatible with high-density connectors.
3. MIL-C-27500 shielded cable with M22759/16 wire (TE) or M22759/18 wire (TG) and ETFE
jacket (14).
4. MS25036 or MS20659 ring terminals.
5. M83519/2-X shield terminators.
6. A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) silicone fusion tape.
7. Wire bundle routing, securing, and management supplies, as required.
8. 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5, or 6061-T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or
AMS-QQ-A-250/11, varying thickness.
9. TSO-C53a Type C or D hose (e.g., Aeroquip 303 hose with AE102 sleeve and 900591B clamps or
Aeroquip AE466) for installation of fuel flow transducers and pressure sensors.
10. 22 or 24 AWG stranded thermocouple extension wire to match K-Type or J-Type probe, with a
minimum continuous temperature rating of 400°F and ASTM E230 Standard Limits or NIST ITS
90 electrical qualifications (e.g., Watlow SERV-RITE P/Ns K24-3-507 and J24-3-507).

Rev. 14 Page 3-3
11. Ethernet cable, aircraft grade category 5 (required only for HSDB interfaces). Only Ethernet
cables listed in Table 3-5 can be used. 24 AWG is preferred.
Table 3-5 HSDB Cables
Manufacturer Cable Part Number Gauge
E10422 [1] 22 AWG
PIC WIRE AND CABLE E10424 24 AWG
E12424 24 AWG
EMTEQ D100-0824-100 24 AWG
THERMAX MX100Q-24 24 AWG
CARLISLE IT 392404 24 AWG
GIGAFLIGHT CONNECTIVITY GF100T-24CAT5 24 AWG
Notes:
[1] E10422 cable is not recommended because of the larger insulation diameter, making it
very hard to work with in the high density connectors. E1042x cable is also not
recommended due to insulation shrinkage that can occur.
12. EIS annunciator indicator(s) capable of displaying warning (red) and caution (yellow)
annunciations.
Table 3-6 EIS Annunciators
Aircraft System
Manufacturer Annunciation
14V 28V
Applied Avionics Caution/Warning 95-40-17-B4-E1WPN LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6 [1]
MS25041-4 Cap MS25041-4 Cap
Caution
MS25237-330 Lamp MS25237-327 Lamp
Mil-Spec (Various)
MS25041-2 Cap MS25041-2 Cap
Warning
MS25237-330 Lamp MS25237-327 Lamp
Notes:
[1] Requires two 47Ω, 1/4 WATT -55 C to +125 C resistors. Refer to Figure B-8.
13. For resistive fuel probe connection with GEA 24 EIS adapter (not applicable to GEA 24B):
2.2k Ω (± 1%), 0.25W (or greater) resistors qualified to retain power rating at 70 °C and qualified
to MIL-R-10509. Acceptable resistors include:
• RN60D2201FB14 (ref. Garmin Kit P/N 011-05829-00)
• RN60C2201DB14
• RN65E2201FB14
14. Standard heat shrink tubing (M23053/5, X = color)
• M23053/5-104-X for single conductor wire
• M23053/5-105-X for insulating twisted-pair wire
• M23053/5-106-X for insulating triple conductor wire or RG-400 coax
15. For GDL 60 Remote Aircraft Status installation: RAS relay components:
• M12883/41-16 Relay Socket
• M83536/10-15M Relay for 14V Systems
• M83536/10-024M Relay for 28V Systems
OR
• M12883/45-01 Relay Socket
• M83536/2-024M Relay for 28V systems

Rev. 14 Page 3-4
3.1.3 Special Tools Required
The following tools are required for building the wire harness.
Milliohm Meter
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 milliohm (or better) to perform continuity and power/ground
checks.
Crimp Tool
A crimp tool meeting MIL specification M22520/2-01 and a positioner/locator are required to ensure
consistent, reliable crimp contact connections for the rear D-sub connectors. Refer to Table 3-7.
Table 3-7 Recommended Crimp Tools

Hand 22-28 AWG 22-24 AWG
Manufacturer Crimping Insertion/ Insertion/
Tool Positioner [1] Positioner
Extraction Tool Extraction Tool
Military P/N M22520/2-01 M22520/2-09 M81969/14-01 M22520/2-08 M81969/1-02
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-739 N/A N/A N/A
Positronic 9507 N/A N/A 9502-5 M81969/1-02
AMP 601966-1 601966-6 91067-1 601966-5 91067-2
Daniels AFM8 K42 N/A K13-1 M81969/1-02
Astro 615717 615725 N/A 615724 M81969/1-02
Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to change without notice.
Notes:
[1] For configuration module pins, verify the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
GSB 15 Installation
A crimp tool is required for the GSB 15 installation. The recommended crimp tool is Molex Hand Crimp
Tool (P/N 638190000). For other options, refer to GSB 15 Installation Manual (P/N 190-00303-A3).

Rev. 14 Page 3-5
3.2 GI 275 Installation Requirements
This section provides installation requirements for the GI 275 system.
3.2.1 Power Distribution

GI 275 LRUs cannot share circuit breakers or ground return wires with each other or with other equipment.
For the purpose of the GI 275 system installation, the “essential bus” is a bus that receives power when the
battery master is switched on and is not automatically shed with the loss of a generator or alternator. Power
distribution requirements are summarized in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Power Distribution

LRU BUS Requirement
MFD • Avionics bus.
• No. 1 EIS display on essential bus.
• No. 2 EIS display on essential bus.
EIS Display • If dual essential buses are available, connect each EIS display to a separate
essential bus.
• No. 1 GEA 24(B) on essential bus.
• No. 2 GEA 24(B) on essential bus.
GEA 24(B) • If dual essential buses are available, connect each GEA 24(B) to a separate
essential bus.
• If connected to a GI 275, it is recommended to connect the GSB 15 to same
GSB 15 bus as GI 275 to ensure the GSB 15 is powered on with the GI 275.
• If not connected to a GI 275, connect GSB 15 to avionics bus.

Rev. 14 Page 3-6
Circuit breakers and switches added as part of GI 275 system installation must be labeled as shown in
Table 3-9 (single bus) and Table 3-10 (independent buses). Labels must be readable in all lighting
conditions. Ambient flood lighting is acceptable. The labeling for each LRU denotes the following where
applicable:
• Number designation – LRUs of same type/function in the system.
• A/B designation – Differentiates the essential bus.
Table 3-9 Circuit Breaker Labels - Single Essential Bus

Label CB Value
Description
Single LRU Dual LRU 14V / 28V System
MFD 1 [1]
GI 275 configured as MFD MFD [1] 5A
MFD 2 [1]
EIS 1
GI 275 configured as EIS EIS 5A
EIS 2
ENG SNSR L
GEA 24(B) ENG SNSR 5A
ENG SNSR R
USB 1
GSB 15 USB 5A or 7.5A [2] [3]
USB 2
Notes:
[1] Not connected to essential bus. Refer to Table 3-8.
[2] It is acceptable to use a fuse in lieu of a circuit breaker for the GSB 15.
[3] If a GSB 15 Type-C unit (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30, -40, -50) is installed in a 14V electrical
system, a 7.5A breaker or fuse is required.
Table 3-10 Circuit Breaker Labels - Independent Essential Busses

Label CB Value
Description
Single LRU Dual LRU 14V / 28V System
MFD 1 [1]
GI 275 configured as MFD MFD [1] 5A
MFD 2 [1]
EIS L A
EIS A EIS L B
GI 275 configured as EIS 5A
EIS B EIS R A
EIS R B
ENG SNSR L
GEA 24(B) ENG SNSR 5A
ENG SNSR R
USB 1
GSB 15 USB 5A or 7.5A [2] [3]
USB 2
Notes:
[1] Not connected to essential bus. Refer to Table 3-8.
[2] It is acceptable to use a fuse in lieu of a circuit breaker for the GSB 15.
[3] If a GSB 15 Type-C unit (P/Ns 011-04937-20, -30, -40, -50) is installed in a 14V electrical
system, a 7.5A breaker or fuse is required.

Rev. 14 Page 3-7
3.2.2 Engine Indication System (EIS)
Installation of the EIS must maintain compliance with the minimum number of gauges required by
14 CFR 91.205 for the type of flight allowed by the aircraft’s Type Certificate. The following must be
considered for an EIS installation:
CAUTION
Engine damage may occur if length of oil temperature probe is incorrect. Refer to Section 4.6.3.
1. Only install EIS in aircraft that comply with all limitations in Section 2.1.3.
2. Engine RPM, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure, EGT, CHT, and Manifold Pressure (if installed) must
be displayed on the EIS.
3. Optional EIS gauges listed in Table 3-12 that are not currently installed in the aircraft may be
added as approved in this STC.
4. No indication/parameter on the EIS display(s) can be duplicated by any other installed indicator
that is not connected to the GEA.
5. Ensure engine sensors can be installed and the corresponding gauges can be displayed. Refer to
Appendix E, Table 3-11, and Table 3-12 for gauge layout information. Depending on the number
of gauges, a second EIS display may be required (only permitted in single-engine aircraft). Refer
to Section 2.1.3.
6. Some turbocharged aircraft require a differential pressure sensor for fuel pressure. This STC
provides electrical interface for select differential pressure sensors (refer to Appendix Section
C.12); however, installation approval is not provided and must be obtained separately
7. Do not replace an existing gauge if the GI 275 will not provide the functions and markings
required by the POH/AFM, TCDS, or other aircraft model-specific data. Refer to Section 5.7.4.2
for available EIS gauge markings. If the EIS gauges cannot be configured as noted in the POH/
AFM, the installation does not qualify for EIS unless alternate airworthiness approval is obtained.
8. Annunciator lights, including alternator/generator annunciators operated by a sensor or switch
independent of the existing gauge, must remain operative and independent from the GI 275 EIS. If
an annunciator is operated by a gauge that might be replaced by the GI 275 EIS, the associated
annunciator can be deactivated only if the GI 275 Caution/Warning alert activates for the same
condition as the original annunciator. The GI 275 Caution/Warning alert is provided on the display
or an independent annunciator. However, if the new GI 275 EIS gauge does not support a Caution/
Warning alert for the same condition, the existing gauge and annunciator must remain installed.
9. If an annunciator is replaced by the GI 275 EIS display, deactivate the existing annunciator so it
does not illuminate and then install a placard over the deactivated lens or as close as practical
within view of the pilot that states: “X ANNUN DISABLD”, with “X” being the deactivated
annunciator(s). Modification of the existing annunciator panel is outside the scope of this STC.
10. All placards that were associated with any/all gauges being replaced (non-limitation data) must
remain in the proximity of the EIS display.
11. Reused sensors must function through the sensor’s entire range. For example, fuel tank floats may
have worn resistive elements that will result in performance issues with the gauge display.
12. If the aircraft POH or AFM has a fuel flow limit (i.e., red line), the installer must verify fuel flow
accuracy ±10% of the full scale range and adjust the K-Factor if necessary. Obtain the correct fuel
flow value using the engine or aircraft manufacturer manuals. If that data is not available, perform
a pre-installation static RPM ground check and document the pre-installation fuel flow using the
existing fuel flow indicator. Refer to Section 6.8.2 for post-installation K-Factor adjustment.
13. A single display that is a standalone EIS allows for the GPS connection to be optional. Standalone
EIS displays that do not have a GPS source connected will display dashes (---) for Fuel Endurance.

Rev. 14 Page 3-8
For cases where the standard gauge marking configuration cannot be used, aircraft-specific solutions for
unique gauge markings are provided in Appendix Section E.6.2.
Table 3-11 Required Gauges for EIS
Indicator Notes
RPM
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
EGT
CHT
Manifold Pressure If applicable.
Table 3-12 Additional Gauges

Indicator [1] Notes
Flow check may be required prior to de-modification; refer
Fuel Flow
to Appendix D.
Primary EGT [2]
Turbo/Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) [2]
Carburetor Temperature Only required if existing gauge had colored markings,
Inlet Air Temperature (IAT) alerts, and/or associated POH/AFM limitations.
Compressor Discharge Temperature (CDT)
IAT/CDT Differential (DIFF)
Fuel Quantity (Main) AUX fuel quantity can only be displayed when main fuel
quantity is also displayed. GI 275 interface to fuel quantity
sensors is not approved in certain aircraft models. Refer to
Fuel Quantity (Aux) Appendix D for model-specific information.
Amps/Volts
Only two of the four parameters may be gauges with
• load meter
colored markings, alerts, and/or associated POH/AFM
• battery charge/discharge
limitations (the same parameter cannot be displayed
• bus voltmeter
twice).
• battery voltmeter
Configure if replacing an existing indicator. Optional if not
Prop Sync Wheel
previously installed.
Percent Power indication can be provided when a
Manifold Pressure, RPM, OAT, and Fuel Flow sensor are
all installed and interfaced with the GI 275 EIS. Percent
Percent Power [3] Power cannot be configured on the Main EIS page if a
Prop Sync Wheel is shown on the other EIS gauge.
Percent Power can be configured on the Aux EIS page if
a Prop Sync is present.
Notes:
[1] Gauges in this table are required if the existing aircraft gauge had colored markings, alerts, and/or
associated POH/AFM limitations. If the number or required gauges exceeds the available space
on the display, a second primary EIS display is required. Refer to Appendix E for gauge layouts.
[2] Primary EGT and TIT cannot both be indicated on the GI 275. Only one TIT or Primary
EGT sensor can be displayed on the GI 275 EIS.

Rev. 14 Page 3-9
[3] If there is an existing percent power gauge with colored markings, alerts, and/or associated POH/
AFM limitations, then the existing percent power gauge must be retained and percent power must
not be configured or displayed on the GI 275.
All EIS sensors approved to interface with the GI 275 are listed in Appendix Section C.12.
Compare the range, markings, and colors in Table 3-13 to the required aircraft parameters. Ensure sensor
range is wide enough for each planned gauge. This STC requires that all lines/ranges that are red or yellow
generate an alert. Blue, green, and white markings do not generate alerts. If there was no alert associated
with the red or yellow line/radials on the original gauge, this STC approves the addition of an alert to the
associated line/radial.
The sensor ranges in Table 3-13 are only for reference to help determine if EIS is compatible with the
aircraft; specific approved sensors may have different ranges than those shown. If an aircraft gauge has
markings outside the available sensor range, but the sensor range includes all limits for the gauge specified
by the POH/AFM, TCDS, or other aircraft model-specific data, the gauge may be replaced by the GI 275
EIS per this STC.
Table 3-13 Available EIS Parameters
Available Gauge Available Marking Approved
Display Display Range
Markings Colors Units
Tachometer (RPM) 0 – 4000 RPM Arc R, Y, B, G, W RPM
Manifold Pressure 0 – 60 in Hg Arc R, Y, B, G, W in Hg, PSI
Oil Pressure 0 – 150 PSI Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W PSI
Oil Temperature -24 – 300° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
Main Fuel Quantity 0-2980 Gallons Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W GAL
Aux Fuel Quantity 0-2980 Gallons Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W GAL

GAL/HR
Fuel Flow 0 – 80 GPH Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W
Pounds/HR
Fuel Pressure 0 – 75 PSI Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W PSI
CHT (1 probe per cyl) 0 – 900° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
EGT (1 probe per cyl) 0 – 1800° F None N/A °C, °F

Primary EGT
0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
(1 probe per engine)
TIT #1 0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
TIT #2 0 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
Carb Temperature -24 – 34° C Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C
CDT 32 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
IAT -100 – 1800° F Line/Range R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F

Line/Range
CDT/IAT Diff Temp -100 – 1800° F R, Y, B, G, W °C, °F
(Max of 2 Ranges)
Load Meter (alternator
current) or Ammeter -150 – 150 A Line/Range R, Y Amps
(charge/discharge)
Battery Voltage /
-80 – 80 VDC Line/Range R, Y Volts
Bus Voltage

Rev. 14 Page 3-10
Available Gauge Available Marking Approved
Display Display Range
Markings Colors Units
Prop Sync Wheel N/A N/A N/A N/A
OAT -125 – 175° C N/A N/A °C, °F
Percent Power 0 – 100% N/A N/A N/A
3.2.3 GPS Requirements

The GI 275 can be interfaced with up to two independent GPS sources and/or the internal VFR GPS. Refer
to Appendix Section C.1 for approved GPS sources. A GPS source is optional.
3.2.4 Display Lighting Control

Lighting on the GI 275 display can be controlled by either the lighting bus or the built-in photocell. The
photocell can be used for lighting control for all installations. If there is a significant reduction in lighting
bus load due to the GI 275 system installation, it is recommended that the photocell be used to control the
lighting.

Rev. 14 Page 3-11
3.2.5 HSDB Architecture
The HSDB architecture allows for many connection possibilities. The Ethernet architecture limitations/
options shown in this section are used as a guide for common LRU combinations. Block diagrams are
illustrated in Figure 3-2 and Figure 3-3. A summary of Garmin LRUs with HSDB capability and available
ports is shown in Table 3-14.
Table 3-14 Garmin LRU HSDB Port Summary
LRU Number of HSDB Ports
GI 275 2
GTN 6XX/7XX 4
GTN Xi 4
GTS 8XX 1
GDL 60 2
GDL 69 series 4
GTX 345 2
GPS 175/GNX 375/GNC 355 1
G500/G600 TXi 4
The following steps/figures are used to guide in making HSDB connections (not all possibilities are
included):
1. When multiple GI 275 indicators are installed, they must be connected to each other directly in
series.
2. The GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355, if installed, must be connected
directly to a GI 275.
3. LRUs not installed under this STC must still meet the installation requirements that are applicable
to those LRUs.
4. Choose the figure that most closely represents the aircraft’s equipment and cross out any LRUs not
installed. Apply the rules above to complete the HSDB connections, if necessary.
5. It is acceptable to connect GI 275 units with other Garmin LRUs using redundant HSDB paths if
there are enough available HSDB ports. Redundant HSDB connections provide extra data paths in
case of LRU failure. Refer to Figure 3-2 for an example.
Optional connection
GI 275 STC if specific LRUs are present
1 HSDB port 1
Required connection
2 HSDB port 2 if specific LRUs are present
OTHER STC Optional redundancy connection

if HSDB ports are available
Figure 3-1 HSDB Architecture: Legend
NOTE
The orientation of LRUs and HSDB ports in the following diagrams do not represent the
actual orientation of the installation in the aircraft.

Rev. 14 Page 3-12
GI 275 1 1
GI 275
EIS EIS
2 2
GPS Source
Figure 3-2 HSDB Architecture: EIS
GI 275 1 GPS Source #1

MFD
Traffic Source
GPS Source #2
Figure 3-3 HSDB Architecture: MFD

Rev. 14 Page 3-13
3.3 Interfaces to Other Equipment
Information in this section provides details for interfacing to equipment not installed by the GI 275 STC.
The information provided must be reviewed when these interfaces are considered.
3.3.1 GPS Source

The GI 275 has a built-in VFR GPS source that can be used with the backup GPS antenna installed. Up to
two additional external GPS sources can be interfaced to the GI 275.
3.3.2 Navigation Receiver

The GI 275 display uses data from a navigation receiver to display VOR and ILS information on the HSI
page. Up to two independent navigation receivers can be interfaced to a display. The third-party composite
NAV connection must be directly connected to a GI 275 display when present.
3.3.3 Radar Altimeter

The GI 275 can receive data from a digital radar altimeter system to provide the display of radar altitude.
The display can also be configured to allow for the initiation of the radar altimeter self-test for certain radar
altimeter models. Radar altimeters must be wired to a discrete output from the GI 275 to enable self-test.
3.3.4 Traffic
The GI 275 can receive data from an ADS-B/TIS/TAS/TCAS I traffic system to display traffic.
3.3.4.1 TIS-A
Traffic Information Service-equipped aircraft receive limited traffic information from nearby ground radar
uplinks. The GI 275 can interface with a GTX 33X to provide TIS-A. The traffic data can be crossfilled to
display on other GI 275 units.
3.3.4.2 TAS / TCAS

The GI 275 can interface with a number of traffic sources that function as Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS)
or Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS). The traffic data can be crossfilled to display on
other GI 275 units.
3.3.4.3 TIS-B / FIS-B / ADS-B

TIS-B/FIS-B/ADS-B In-equipped aircraft receive traffic information from nearby ADS-B ground stations
and ADS-B Out-equipped aircraft. The GI 275 can receive and display weather and traffic services with
compatible equipment installed. The traffic data can be displayed on all GI 275 units capable of displaying
traffic data. Refer to Appendix Section C.7 for compatible equipment.
3.3.5 Data Link

The GI 275 can interface to a GDL 69/69A SXM to receive SiriusXM weather service with a valid
subscription. It does not provide control for music.

Rev. 14 Page 3-14
3.3.6 WX-500 Stormscope®
The GI 275 can receive data from a WX-500 Stormscope® system to provide the display of lightning data.
The GI 275 cannot be used to control the Stormscope® system. A controlling display (e.g., GDU 620,
GDU 700/1060, GTN 6XX/7XX, or GTN Xi) must be present in the system to display Stormscope data on
the GI 275.
3.3.7 Audio Panel

The GI 275 can be interfaced to an audio panel for audio alerting. An interfaced audio panel cannot be
controlled via the GI 275.
3.3.8 Transponder Control

The GI 275 can interface to GTX 345 series transponders to provide a Transponder Control page when
configured as an MFD. This allows the GI 275 to control transponder code, the IDENT function, and the
mode of operation for up to two interfaced GTX 345 transponders.
3.3.9 External TAWS

Only one TAWS that generates aural and visual annunciations is permitted in the aircraft. If the aircraft has
a TAWS installed, the GI 275 must be configured to prevent conflicting aural and visual annunciations.
Combinations of external TAWS sources, GI 275 settings, and the resulting alert sources are shown in
Table 3-15.
The GI 275 provides the terrain alerting from the GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, or GNS 400W/500W;
however, the GI 275 does not provide all of the necessary annunciations and therefore the GTN 6XX/7XX,
GTN Xi, or GNS 400W/500W may still require an external TAWS annunciator panel.
Table 3-15 External TAWS Setup with GI 275
Aircraft Setup LRU Alert Source
External Terrain/ PFD MFD Map Impact MFD Terrain Aural
External
TAWS TAWS Mode Annunciation Area/Pop-up Proximity Callouts
TAWS
System [2] Text Source Alerts Shading from LRU
Installed
External GTN TAWS GTN TAWS Terrain page GTN TAWS
GTN TAWS (HSDB)
[1] Installed
External GTN TAWS GTN TAWS Terrain page GTN TAWS
(HSDB)
Installed
External GNS TAWS None Terrain page GNS TAWS
GNS TAWS (MapMX)
[1] Installed
External GNS TAWS None Terrain page GNS TAWS
(MapMX)
Installed Non-Garmin
External None None Terrain page
Non-Garmin (Other) TAWS
TAWS Installed Non-Garmin
External None None Terrain page
(Other) TAWS
Notes:
[1] If GNS/GTN TAWS becomes unavailable, the display will revert to Terrain Proximity.
[2] The Terrain Mode is automatically configured to External when any External TAWS setting
is configured to anything other than Not Installed.

Rev. 14 Page 3-15
3.4 Selection of GI 275 System Components
3.4.1 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist
The aircraft must meet the requirements for the GI 275 system installation set forth by this STC. The
following checklist is used as a guide to identify if those requirements are satisfied. Complete the checklist
before the aircraft is modified.
Table 3-16 Aircraft Eligibility Checklist

Completed Item Reference
GENERAL
 Verify the aircraft is on the Approved Model List. Appendix D
 Appendix
Verify an approved external GPS/navigation data source is installed.
Section C.1
 Select the GI 275 equipment that will be installed. Section 3.4
 Identify the equipment that will be interfaced, and verify each interface is approved. Appendix C
 Determine if the STC limitations applicable to the aircraft are acceptable. Section 2
 Determine if the aircraft electrical system is adequate. Section 3.5
 Obtain the current aircraft weight and balance data. POH/AFM
INSTRUMENT PANEL
 Determine the location of each display. Section 4.3
 Determine the location for each circuit breaker and its placard. Section 3.2
 Verify the total mass of equipment being installed in the instrument panel is not more
Section 4.8
than the total mass of the equipment being removed from the panel.
EIS
 Perform Fuel Flow Baseline Check, if required. Section 3.2.2
Determine which parameters will be displayed on the EIS, and verify they can be Section 3.2.2

displayed. Appendix E
 Determine the location of all gauges that must be retained and verify the operating
Section 3.2.2
limits for each.
 Determine the GEA 24(B) location(s). Section 4.6.1
 Determine the GTP 59 OAT Probe location(s), if used. Section 4.5.2
 Select engine sensors for parameters determined to be displayed on the EIS. Section 3.4.2

Rev. 14 Page 3-16
Table 3-17 is provided to assist with the selection of GI 275 components. Mark the applicable entry based
on the criteria given in the section. Review the relevant wiring diagram(s) to determine the installation.
Table 3-17 GI 275 System Components

Equipment Selection Notes Location
Backup Battery  GI 275 BB (Optional for GI 275 Base)
USB  GSB 15  Dongle
Backup GPS  Backup GPS antenna

 GEA 24(B) #1
Engine Adapter
 GEA 24(B) #2
(required for twin-engine aircraft)
Engine Annunciation  GI 275  Annunciator(s) Section 4.3.3
 EGT probe for each cylinder [1]
 Single EGT probe (i.e., Primary EGT) [1]
 CHT probe for each cylinder [1]
 Turbine Inlet Temp Sensor [1]
 Induction Air Temp Sensor [1]
 Compressor Discharge Temp Sensor [1]
 Manifold Pressure Sensor
 Oil Pressure Sensor
Engine Sensors [2]
 Oil Temp Sensor
 RPM Sensor
 Carb Temp Sensor
 Fuel Pressure Sensor
 Fuel Flow
 Fuel Quantity [1]
 Shunt (Amperage) [1]
 OAT [3]
Notes:
[1] Not installed under this STC.
[2] Refer to Appendix Section C.12 for STC compatibility.
[3] Interface a single OAT probe to only one GEA Engine Adapter.
External data sources intended for use with the GI 275 must be checked for compatibility before
installation. These checks must be accomplished in accordance with procedures and data furnished by the
equipment manufacturer.

Rev. 14 Page 3-17
3.4.2 EIS Equipment
A GEA 24(B) is required for each aircraft engine if EIS is installed. EIS sensor options and configurations
are presented in Appendix Section C.12. Select the sensors required to support the EIS gauges determined
in Section 3.2.2. Specific sensors are discussed below.
1. EGT/TIT and CHT

The number of probes required for aircraft installation is shown in Table 3-18. The Primary EGT/TIT
and CHT indication, if applicable, must be retained. The primary EGT/TIT probe can be changed, but
the installed location must remain the same.
Table 3-18 EGT and CHT Probe Quantity

Aircraft Engines Single Twin
Cylinders per engine 4 6 4 6
EGT 4 6 8 12
PROBE QTY CHT 4 6 8 12
PRIMARY AS REQUIRED
All thermocouple lead wires must match the thermocouple type (K- or J-Type). Do not crimp
connector pins to a single-strand thermocouple wire, as the wire is too thick; only use a multi-strand
lead wire for connector pins. Copper wire must never be used for thermocouples.
2. Oil Pressure Sensor

Select the most suitable sensor from Table C-13.
3. Oil Temperature Sensor

Use the engine manufacturer’s guidance for probe length/location.
CAUTION
Ensure the oil temperature probe is the correct length. Installation of the incorrect probe
may result in engine damage.
4. Manifold Pressure Sensor

5. Fuel Pressure Sensor

Some fuel injected engines use a fuel pressure sensor to indicate fuel flow. This STC requires that
when replacing such a sensor, individual EIS sensors for both fuel flow and fuel pressure must be
installed.
Some turbocharged aircraft use a differential pressure sensor. Refer to Section 3.2.2 for more
information.

Rev. 14 Page 3-18
6. Fuel Quantity Sensor
The fuel quantity sensors must be either resistive float sensors with a resistance range between
25-620 Ω or CiES CC Series Fuel Senders. It is permissible to re-use existing fuel quantity wiring.
Extension splices are permissible. This STC does not approve alteration of the fuel tank wiring, fuel
tank equipment, or grounding provisions for the fuel system. For resistive fuel quantity sensors, the
maximum resistance of the tank must be no more than 620Ω, and the resistive range from full to empty
must be at least 25Ω.
For resistive float sensors interfaced to a GEA 24, parallel resistors spliced from the fuel excitation pin
are required, and the sensor configuration must be set as 0-5 Volt sensors. For new installations of a
GEA 24B, use a direct connection to the resistive fuel floats and set the sensor configuration to
“0-620ohm”. If replacing a GEA 24 with a GEA 24B, use the original parallel resistor wiring and set
the sensor configuraton to “0-5 Volt”. A new fuel quantity calibration must be conducted when a
GEA 24 is replaced by a GEA 24B (refer to Section 5.7.5).
Refer to Appendix B for wiring diagrams and Appendix C for compatible part numbers. All CiES CC
Series Fuel Quantity Senders approved in STC SA02511SE are compatible.
7. Fuel Flow Sensor(s)

Select a fuel flow sensor that is approved under this STC listed in Appendix Section C.12 and suitable
for the engine horsepower and aircraft fuel supply type:
i. Electronics International FT-60 (Red Cube) - For aircraft with up to 350 HP and an engine-
driven fuel pump.
ii. Electronics International FT-90 (Gold Cube) - For aircraft with 350-550 HP or with gravity-
fed fuel systems.
The fuel flow sensor will introduce a small pressure drop. Refer to Appendix D to determine if a fuel
pressure test is required for a specific aircraft model. If required, the installer must perform the
Minimum Inlet Pressure Test as documented in AC 23-16 to ensure the minimum inlet fuel pressure
and a safety margin are available. Refer to AC 23-16, paragraph 23.955(a) for additional information
and procedures. If the AFM/POH has an operating limitation based only on fuel flow, the fuel flow
must be accurate within 10% to ensure the limitation is maintained. Refer to Section 6.5.3.6 for the
fuel flow check procedure, if it is required.
8. RPM Sensor
Methods for RPM sensing appropriate to the engine should be selected as follows:
1. P-lead sensor – One per magneto or two per dual magneto. Resistors must be installed in
accordance with Figure B-6.
2. Magneto vent mounted sensor – Not compatible with geared engines. One sensor for each
engine on non-pressurized magnetos only (e.g., Bendix -20, -21, -200, 1200 series, and Slick
6000, 4000 series).

Rev. 14 Page 3-19
9. Shunt
Compatible shunts are listed in Appendix Section C.12. The EIS configuration setting must match the
shunt rating and type. The shunt rating is the maximum current and is typically marked on the shunt.
The type is the voltage between the shunt posts at maximum current rating. The shunt rating and type
may also be found in the aircraft data.
If the shunt rating cannot be determined by part markings or the aircraft data, the following procedure
may be used for 50 mV shunts:
1. With the aircraft power ON, no ground-power applied, and a minimal electrical load ON,
measure the millivolts between the shunt terminals using a calibrated voltmeter. Record the
millivolt measurement (V1).
2. Apply an electrical load (L1) as follows:
a. If an alternator load meter is installed, the shunt will measure the charging current from
the alternator to the main bus. With the engine running, apply an electrical load and
measure the current (L1) from the alternator using a calibrated ammeter. Measure and
record the new shunt millivolt value (V2).
b. If a battery ammeter is installed, the shunt will measure the current from the battery to the
main bus. Without the engine running, apply an electrical load and measure the current
(L1) from the battery using a calibrated ammeter. Measure and record the new shunt
millivolt value (V2).
3. Record the millivolt change (Vchange) between steps 1 and 2. Vchange = V2 - V1.
4. Determine the shunt rating using the following calculation.
L1 (Amps) x 50mV
Shunt Rating (Amps) =
Vchange (mV)
If the shunt value cannot be determined, retain the existing gauge(s) or install an appropriately rated
compatible 50 mV shunt. Shunt installation is outside the scope of this STC and must be approved
using other means.
10. OAT
For standalone EIS installations that display horsepower but do not have an air data computer in the
system, an OAT probe can be connected to the GEA 24(B) as an EIS sensor. Refer to Appendix
Section C.12 for sensor compatibility.
11. Remote Aircraft Status

For installations with a GDL 60 that wish to utilize the Remote Aircraft Status feature, a number of
relay assemblies will need to be installed. A relay assembly consists of a relay socket, a relay bracket,
and a relay. Refer to Section 3.1.2 for part numbers. Refer to Figure B-29 for specific interconnect
drawings.
NOTE
It is recommended to connect an OAT probe directly to the GEA if it is desired to receive
Air Temperature data as part of the Remote Aircraft Status.

Rev. 14 Page 3-20
3.5 Electrical Load Analysis
An Electrical Load Analysis (ELA) must be completed before the GI 275 is installed to verify that the
aircraft electrical system is adequate. The purpose of the ELA is to show compliance with 14 CFR 23.1351
and 23.1353(h) by demonstrating that the maximum electrical system demand does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating and the aircraft battery is capable of providing electrical power to equipment
essential for continued safe flight and landing in the event of a complete loss of the primary electrical
system. Satisfactory completion of the ELA must be recorded on FAA Form 337.
NOTE
Certain operating requirements (e.g., 14 CFR Part 135) may impose additional requirements in
the event of electrical power loss. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that the aircraft meets
the additional requirements if used for these operations.
Typical current draw of all GI 275 system components is summarized in Table 3-19.
Table 3-19 LRU Current Draw

Current Draw
LRU 14V System 28V System
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GI 275 Base (without battery) 0.65 A 0.75 A 0.32 A 0.40 A
GI 275 Base (with battery) 0.65 A 1.70 A 0.32 A 0.80 A
GEA 24(B) 0.20 A 0.40 A 0.10 A 0.20 A
GSB 15 Dual Type-A
Varies 2.86 A Varies 1.43 A
(charging from both ports)
GSB 15 Type-A & C and Dual Type-C
Varies 4.86 A Varies 2.43 A
(charging from both ports)
Net change to the electrical load with the GI 275 installed must be determined. Net decrease in electrical
load requires no further analysis, assuming that the electrical system is within limits. This is likely to occur
when existing equipment is removed or older systems are replaced with newer equipment that requires less
power to operate. The amended electrical load calculation documenting load reduction should be filed with
other aircraft permanent records. A sample net electrical load calculation is shown for a 14V aircraft in
Table 3-20.
Table 3-20 Net Electrical Load Change Calculation Example (14 VDC Aircraft)
Equipment Removed Equipment Added
Item Load [A] Item Load [A]
Mid-Continent MD 200-206 VOR/LOC/GS
0.30 Garmin GI 275 Base 0.75
Indicator
SUBTOTAL 0.30 SUBTOTAL 0.75

NET CHANGE +0.45
A complete Electrical Load Analysis must be performed to show adequate capacity of the alternator/
generator if the electrical load is increased with GI 275 installed. ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for
Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity Analysis offers guidance on preparing an ELA.
Alternatively, electrical loads under different operating conditions can be measured (refer to Section 3.5.1).

Rev. 14 Page 3-21
3.5.1 Measurement of Electrical Loads
It must be shown that the maximum electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the
alternator data plate rating. Discussed in this section is the ELA for a single alternator/single battery
electrical system determined by load measurement. It must be modified accordingly for aircraft with
multiple batteries or alternators. During measurement, applied electrical system loads must account for
combinations and durations for probable aircraft operations.
NOTE
Circuits must be protected and LRU circuit breaker ratings must meet specifications in Section 3.2.
Additionally, follow guidelines in AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 11, Section 4.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to equipment, the ammeter must be capable of handling the anticipated load.
The current measurement is best accomplished with an in-circuit or clamp-on calibrated ammeter with
0.5 A or better precision. Continuous rate, as indicated on the alternator and the battery data plate/
nameplate, must be noted.
1. The tabulated form provided in Figure 3-5 can be used to compile a list of electrical loads on the
aircraft. Typically, the list is comprised of existing circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches as
shown by the example in Figure 3-6. Continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., stall warning
horn, landing gear) loads must be identified.
2. Use the worst-case flight condition and identify which phase of flight each particular load is used
in for normal flight operation. Certain loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on at the
same time (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning). Use only the worst-case load conditions for each
phase of flight.
NOTE
Normal operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is operating
normally. Emergency operation is when the primary electrical power generating system is
inoperative.
3. Use the worst-case flight condition and identify which phase of flight each load is used in for
emergency flight operation. At a minimum, the list of equipment must include:
a. PFD
b. AHRS #1
c. ADC #1
d. GI 275 EIS (if applicable)
e. COM radio #1
f. GPS #1
g. Audio panel [1]
h. Stall warning system (if applicable)
i. Pitot heat
j. Landing light (switched on during landing only)
k. Instrument panel lighting
l. Landing gear indication lights
m. Navigation lights
n. Strobe lights

Rev. 14 Page 3-22
Notes:
[1] If the landing gear warning or stall warning audio requires the audio panel, then the audio
panel must be included; otherwise, the audio panel is not essential for continued safe
flight/landing and may be omitted.
CAUTION
The pitot heat must be switched on long enough to take the current measurement and then
switched off. Since the pitot probe may get hot, ensure the probe cover is removed. Care
must be taken to avoid burns or damage to the unit.
4. The ammeter must be connected in line between the external power source and the master relay
circuit, as shown in Figure 3-4. This will eliminate errors due to the charging current drawn by the
battery.
$00(7(53/$&(0(17
(,7+(56,'($&&(37$%/(
'2(6127,1&/8'(%$77(5<&+$5*,1*&855(17
$ $ (/(&75,&$/%86

0$67(55(/$< *
$/7(51$725

(;7(51$/
32:(5
Figure 3-4 Ammeter Placement for Current Measurement

5. With all circuit breakers closed, external power must be applied to the aircraft and voltage set to
the nominal alternator voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
6. The battery master switch must be turned on. Do not measure intermittent electrical loads. It is
assumed if any additional current is required beyond the alternator capability, this short-duration
demand will be supplied by the battery.
7. The following lighting settings must applied during the entire electrical load measurement:
a. All instrument panel and flood lights set to maximum brightness.
b. The GI 275 backlight set to 50% brightness.
c. All other backlit displays, including GPS navigator, set to 50% brightness.
8. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the taxiing phase of flight and record the
current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form in column 1, Figure 3-5). The
autopilot circuit breaker must be closed, but the autopilot must not be engaged during the
measurement.
9. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the normal takeoff/landing phase of
flight and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form in column 2,
Figure 3-5). Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF. The autopilot
circuit breaker must be closed and the autopilot must be engaged.
10. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the normal cruise phase of flight and
record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 3, Figure 3-5).
The autopilot circuit breaker must be closed and the autopilot must be engaged.
11. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the emergency cruise phase of flight and
record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 4, Figure 3-5).
Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF.
12. Switch on all continuous electrical loads that are used for the emergency landing phase of flight
and record the current that is measured by the ammeter (tabulated ELA form column 5,
Figure 3-5). Measurements must be taken with the landing lights ON and OFF.

Rev. 14 Page 3-23
The aircraft electrical system is capable of supporting the GI 275 system if the maximum electrical system
demand, as documented on the tabulated ELA form, does not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity. It is
permissible for the electrical load to exceed 80% of the alternator capacity when the pitot heat and landing
light are both switched on during the takeoff/landing phase of flight. In this case, the electrical load must
not exceed 95% of the alternator capacity. If the pitot heat is on and the landing light is off, the electrical
load may not exceed 80% of the alternator capacity.
NOTE
The Electrical Load Analysis for this installation is only valid for modifications performed
under this STC. Subsequent changes to the aircraft electrical system will require a new
load analysis.

Rev. 14 Page 3-24
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Normal Operation Emergency Operation
Circuit
Breaker Operating Taxiing TO/Land Cruise Cruise Land
Circuit/System Number Time 10 min 10 min 60 min (Calculated) 10 min
Figure 3-5 Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 3-25
Date: Tail Number: Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps):
%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % N/A N/A
(< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail:
Notes:
Figure 3-5 Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 3-26
Date: //201 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
Alternator Field A1 Continuous

Annunciator Panel C1 Continuous
Vacuum Warning C2 Intermittent
Stall Warning C3 Intermittent
Gear Warning C4 Intermittent
Gear Actuator C5 Intermittent
Cluster Gauge D1 Continuous
Ignition D2 intermittent
*,%DVH D3 Continuous
Turn Coordinator D4 Continuous
Gear Relay D5 Intermittent
Panel Lights E2 Continuous
Glareshield Lights E3 Continuous
Flap Actuator E5 Intermittent
COM 1 F1 Continuous
GPS/NAV 1 F2 Continuous
COM 2 F3 Continuous
GPS/NAV 2 F4 Continuous
Autopilot [1] F5 Continuous
Audio Panel G1 Continuous
Radio Blower G2 Continuous
ADF G3 Continuous
Transponder G4 Continuous
GDL 69 H1 Continuous
TCAD H2 Continuous
JPI Engine Monitor H3 Continuous
Bose Headsets H5 Continuous
Altitude Encoder J1 Continuous
Strobe Light SW1 Continuous
Nav Lights SW2 Continuous
Pitot Heat SW5 Continuous
Elevator Trim SW6 Intermittent
Boost Pump SW7 Intermittent
Figure 3-6 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 3-27
Date: //201 Tail Number: N5272K Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/system is used
Circuit
60.0
Ldg Lt ON
(b1)
Total current used (amps): 45.7 43.5 34 48.1
(a) 44.7 (c) (d) (e)
Ldg Lt OFF
(b2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps): 70
86 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: 68 % 62 % N/A N/A
(< 80%) 64 (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail: PASS PASS PASS
Notes:
[1] Duringtaxiphase,Dutopilotcircuitbreakerisclosedbutautopilotisnotengaged.
Figure 3-6 Example of Completed Tabulated Electrical Load Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 3-28
3.5.2 Battery Capacity Analysis
NOTE
A Battery Capacity Analysis is not required if only installing the GI 275 as an MFD.
The capacity of the aircraft battery must be verified if the GI 275 installation increases the electrical load
on the system. The capacity of the existing battery is adequate if it supports loads essential to the continued
safe flight and landing for a minimum of 30 minutes. For aircraft with a maximum service ceiling greater
than 25,000 feet and certified with FAR 23.1353(h) at amendment 23.62, the battery must support
60 minutes of continued safe flight. Otherwise, the battery must be replaced with a battery that has
sufficient capacity.
Refer to ASTM F 2490-05 Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity
Analysis for more information.
Verification of the battery capacity can be accomplished following these steps:
1. Battery Capacity (de-rated) – 75% of the battery capacity (as indicated on battery nameplate) is
assumed available (this value has units of Amp Hrs). Ensure the value is converted to Amp Mins.
2. Normal Operation Load – Worst-case cruise condition (cruise at night) during normal operation
is assumed with 5 minutes given to the pilot to shed non-essential loads. Any automatic load
shedding can be considered immediate and does not need to be considered in the calculations.
Multiply the normal operation load (Amps) by t1 (mins) [t1 = 5 min].
3. Emergency Landing Load – Electric load during the approach and landing with failed generator/
alternator. This load is assumed to drain the battery for 10 minutes and needs to be determined.
Multiply the emergency landing operation load (Amps) by t2 (mins) [t2 = 10 min].
4. Emergency Cruise Load – Minimum load necessary to maintain flight in cruise after the
generator/alternator has failed needs to be determined.
The following equation determines the battery capacity for emergency cruise expressed as time (t3):
Battery Capacity - Normal Operation - Emergency Landing (1) - (2) - (3)
t3 = =
Emergency Cruise Load (4)
The duration of the entire emergency flight on battery power is:
t = t1 + t2 + t3
t = 5 min + 10 min + t3
t = 15 min + t3

Rev. 14 Page 3-29
EMERGENCY POWER OPERATION CALCULATION EXAMPLE
Date: 12/04/2019 Registration No.: N5272K
POWER SOURCE QTY. INSTALLED VOLTAGE MANUFACTURER MODEL
ALTERNATOR 1 13.75 VDC PRESTOLITE AL 12-P70
BATTERY 1 12.00 VDC GILL G-35
Assumptions:
1. Most severe operating condition is considered to be night IFR with the pitot heat operating.
2. Load demands are shown for steady state operation and do not include inrush current draw.
3. Load shedding is accomplished manually by the pilot within five minutes of warning
annunciation.
4. Loads measured using a calibrated Extech DC ammeter clamped on the cable between battery
terminal and master relay.
Analysis:
(1) Battery Capacity
0.75×35 Amp hrs = 26.25Ah×60 min = 1575 A-min
(2) Normal Operation Load [t1 = 5 minutes duration]

Current drawn in normal cruise 43.5 A
Load 5 min×43.5 A = 217.5 A-min
(3) Emergency Landing Load [t2 = 10 minutes duration]

Current drawn in emergency landing 48.1 A
Load 10 min×48.1 A = 481 A-min
(4) Emergency Cruise Load.

Current drawn in emergency cruise 34.0 A
(5) Battery capacity for emergency cruise

(1) - (2) - (3) 1575 - 217.5 - 481
t3 = = = 25.8 minutes
(4) 34
(6) Total duration of flight on emergency (battery) power
t = t1 + t2 + t3
t = 5 min + 10 min + 25.8 min = 40.8 min
Results:
The total required flight duration on emergency power is 30 minutes. The existing battery capacity
provides 40.8 minutes for emergency flight duration. The battery is adequate.

Rev. 14 Page 3-30
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation...........................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Shielded Cable Preparation ........................................................................................................4-3
4.2 Equipment Bonding ..........................................................................................................................4-5
4.2.1 Vibration Mounts .......................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.2 Aluminum Surface Preparation..................................................................................................4-6
4.3 Instrument Panel Installations...........................................................................................................4-7
4.3.1 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator ..................................................................................................4-8
4.3.2 Backup Battery .........................................................................................................................4-14
4.3.3 EIS Annunciator.......................................................................................................................4-16
4.3.4 GSB 15 .....................................................................................................................................4-18
4.4 Backshell Assembly........................................................................................................................4-25
4.4.1 Configuration Module Installation ...........................................................................................4-28
4.4.2 GSB 15 Connector Assembly ..................................................................................................4-29
4.5 Display Sensors...............................................................................................................................4-30
4.5.1 Backup GPS Antenna...............................................................................................................4-30
4.5.2 GTP 59 .....................................................................................................................................4-33
4.6 Engine Indicating System ...............................................................................................................4-37
4.6.1 GEA 24(B) ...............................................................................................................................4-37
4.6.2 Carburetor Air Temperature.....................................................................................................4-41
4.6.3 Oil Temperature .......................................................................................................................4-42
4.6.4 Pressure ....................................................................................................................................4-43
4.6.5 Fuel Flow..................................................................................................................................4-47
4.6.6 RPM .........................................................................................................................................4-50
4.6.7 CHT, EGT, TIT Probes ............................................................................................................4-51
4.7 Remote Aircraft Status Relay Installation ......................................................................................4-52
4.7.1 Relay Installation Examples.....................................................................................................4-52
4.8 Weight and Balance ........................................................................................................................4-54
WARNING
This manual only approves the installation of the GI 275 Base (including backup battery
and backup GPS antenna), GSB 15, and GEA 24(B) (including EIS annunciator(s) and
engine sensors). Other compatible LRUs listed in Appendix C must use other installation
approvals and may require installation and/or configuration by an authorized Garmin
dealer per Garmin’s installation policy.

Rev. 14 Page 4-1
4.1 Wire Routing and Installation
GI 275 LRU connector definitions and pin functions are defined in Appendix A. System installation
requires fabrication of electrical wire harnesses. When fabricating and installing each harness:
• Reference the aircraft manufacturer (electrical) standard practices manual and equipment
manufacturer documentation for guidance on wire type, gauge, routing, and wire identification.
Methods, techniques, and practices defined in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Aircraft Electrical
Systems, are acceptable.
• Refer to the equipment manufacturer for any specific shield requirements, or follow general
practices and guidance in this manual if none exist.
• For all existing wiring that is overbraided, the overbraid must be maintained and include the new
wire added between the GI 275 and the existing system. It is acceptable to install new overbraid
containing the new wire provided the existing wire and overbraid routing is maintained. The
overbraid should be terminated in the same or better manner at each connector. If pigtails are used,
then they should be kept as short as possible and no longer than the original overbraid.
• Ensure the wiring does not contact sources of heat or RF/EMI interference (power sources) and is
not routed near moving components of aircraft controls or other systems. Wire routing must
preclude accidental impact or damage.
• Provide adequate space for the LRU or sensor connector(s). Include additional wire length to
create a service loop for maintenance, where appropriate.
• Shield terminations must be as short as possible and not exceed 3.0 inches unless otherwise
specified. Shields may be connected to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is
grounded to the airframe chassis ground, unless otherwise specified by equipment manufacturer.
Alternately, the shield termination may be directly connected to the airframe ground.
• The GEA 24(B) wiring must be routed away from any windows. Installed GI 275s must not share
any circuit breakers or ground returns. The standby instruments must not share any circuit breakers
or ground returns with any GI 275.
• Intermediate connections must be minimized to maintain certified electromagnetic compatibility.
All shields must have continuity at intermediate connections (e.g., bulkhead connectors, terminal
blocks, splices, etc.). If intermediate connectors are installed, unless otherwise specified, the shield
must be terminated at both sides of the intermediate connector backshells (if metal connector) or to
airframe ground on both sides of the intermediate connectors.
NOTE
Interconnect diagrams in this manual only show end-to-end connections and do not show
intermediate connections that may be present in an aircraft.

Rev. 14 Page 4-2
4.1.1 Shielded Cable Preparation
Prepare all of the shielded cables in accordance with Figure 4-1. When terminating shield drains, a
maximum of two shields can be daisy-chained together. The daisy-chaining method may only be used if
the six tapped holes in the shield block are insufficient to ground all shields.
1. At the end of the shielded cable, strip back a 2.5-inch maximum length of the jacket to expose the
braid.
2. Remove this exposed braid.
3. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 inches from the end and remove the jacket to leave the braid
exposed.
NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.
4. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire (2) to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to
Figure 4-1. Refer to AC 43.13-1B for termination techniques.
NOTE
Solder Sleeves with pre-installed lead: A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items (2) and (3). For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.
5. Slide a shield terminator (3) onto the prepared cable assembly.

6. Connect the shield wire (2) to the shield using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The
chosen size of solder sleeve must accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable
and the shield wire (2) to be attached.
7. Crimp contacts onto the cable wires.
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 as needed for the remaining shielded cables.
9. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape A-A-59163 (MIL-I-46852C) at the point where
the backshell strain relief and cast housing will contact the cable bundle.
10. Install a ring terminal onto the cable shield termination wires (2), grouping wires as applicable for
the connector.

Rev. 14 Page 4-3
2.5" MAX 3
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
2
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
PREFERRED METHOD
SHIELD DRAIN COMPONENTS AS SHORT

AS PRACTICAL (3" MAX COMBINED)
2
3
2.5" MAX
0.17"
0.31" MAX OF EXPOSED SHIELD
ALTERNATE METHOD (DAISY-CHAIN)
Figure 4-1 Shield Termination Methods

Rev. 14 Page 4-4
4.2 Equipment Bonding
All installed items listed in Table 4-1 must be electrically bonded to the same airframe ground plane and
meet the listed milliohm requirement. The resistance must be verified with a calibrated milliohm meter
with ±0.1 mΩ (or better) accuracy with all connector(s) disconnected.
All existing third-party remote equipment interfaced to a GI 275 must be electrically bonded to the
airframe ground. It is not acceptable to interface the GI 275 equipment to existing third-party equipment
that relies only on power ground return wires as an electrical ground.
Electrical bonding can be achieved with mounting hardware (e.g., rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) or via
bond straps. Bonding surfaces must be clean of any primer, grease, or dirt. If mounting hardware is used to
create the electrical bond, the area under the head of the bolt or washer must be free of primer and a spot
face prepared that is at least 0.125 inches wider than the head of the bolt or the washer. Any exposed area
still visible after the bond is completed must be primed and finished with the original coating or other
suitable film. Rivets used to mechanically attach brackets and shelves provide an inherent electrical bond
through the rivets and require no additional bond preparation. The top or bottom side of the Garmin racks
or equipment flanges do not need any special bond preparations. Reference the aircraft manufacturer
(electrical) standard practices manual for procedures on electrical bond preparation, or follow SAE ARP
1870 Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety,
Section 5, Detail Requirements.
Table 4-1 Bonding Requirements
Unit Value
GI 275 Base 2.5 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel).
Engine Annunciator(s) 10 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel).
GEA 24(B) 2.5 mΩ (from unit to local structure).
2.5 mΩ or electrically isolated per Appendix D (from
GTP 59
unit to local structure).
2.5 mΩ (from unit to instrument panel or local
GSB 15
structure).
The instrument panel must be metal construction allowing a ground path for instrument panel installations.
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, the ground path is inherently achieved through the metallic airframe
structure. For composite aircraft, a ground plane (or reference) must be used to achieve a comparable
ground.
The face sheet on honeycomb shelves must be metal when equipment is mounted to the shelf. The
honeycomb material between the face sheets is not conductive; therefore, care must be taken to ensure
proper bonding of the equipment. The top and bottom face sheets must be grounded to each other and at
least one of face sheets must be grounded to the airframe.

Rev. 14 Page 4-5
4.2.1 Vibration Mounts
For instrument panels with vibration mounts, verify the mounts are grounded to the metallic airframe
structure with a bonding jumper. Ensure the jumper meets the following specifications:
• The cross-sectional area of the strap is greater than 0.016 square inches (approximately
20,800 circular mils).
• The braid is a 7/16” or wider tubular braid (P/N QQB575R30T437, 24,120 circular mils) or a 3/4”
or wider flat braid (P/N QQB575F36T781, 20,800 circular mils).
• The braid contains a terminal lug (mil-spec MS20659-130) at each end.
• The strap length is as short as possible, not exceeding 6 inches.
Ensure each terminal lug is secured to its respective mating surface with a #10 steel bolt and one flat
washer (P/N AN970-3). Lugs and washers should be center-aligned and flush on all outside edges. These
components should be in full contact with the mating surface.
4.2.2 Aluminum Surface Preparation

In order to prepare the aluminum surface for proper bonding, the following general steps should be
followed. For a detailed procedure, refer to SAE ARP1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location. When area is cleaned
around fastener heads or washers, the area cleaned should be 0.125 inches wider than the footprint
of the washer or the bolt head.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat, such as Alodine 1200, to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, if any films or coatings were removed from the surface, re-apply a
suitable film or coating to the surrounding area.

Rev. 14 Page 4-6
4.3 Instrument Panel Installations
The GI 275 is primarily designed to replace existing 3-inch diameter flight instruments on the instrument
panel. For all GI 275 installations, the instrument panel must be constructed from metallic materials.
The GI 275 must be electrically bonded to the aircraft instrument panel with a direct current (DC)
resistance specified in Table 4-1. Electrical bond is accomplished through GI 275 surface to backside of
instrument panel surface contact.
The GI 275 display(s) must be located such that it is within the pilot’s field-of-view and also within reach
of the pilot. The GI 275 display(s) must not interfere with the installation of flight control systems or
control lock devices.
FAA AC 23.1311 defines the pilot’s field-of-view as the ability to view the flight instruments with
“minimum head and eye movement”. Figure 4-2 provides an example of the pilot’s field-of-view based on
a distance of 30 inches from the pilot eye to the instrument panel, as recommended in AC 23.1311.
30.0
LEFT
UP EW
VI
F-
IEW D -O
F-V EL
D-O FI 21.0 MAX
IEL UM 35°
UMF XIM
AXIM MA F-V IEW
YM Y LD-O
IMA
R 40° AR ARY
FIE
PR IM PRIM 15° 8.0 MAX
HORIZONTAL PR PILOT
PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW
FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
15°
8.0 MAX
15°
NORMAL 0°
21.0 MAX
20°
RIGHT
DOWN
9(57,&$/),(/' +25,=217$/),(/'
PER AC23.1311-1C , PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW IS BASED ON THE VERTICAL ANDHORIZONTAL VISUAL FIELDS
FROM DESIGN EYE REFERENCE POINT THAT CAN BEACCOMMODATED WITH EYE ROTATION ONLY.THIS
AREA IS NORMALLY RESERVEDFOR PRIMARY FLIGHT INFORMATION AND HIGH PRIORITY ALERTS, E.G. EIS
ANNUNCIATOR (IF INSTALLED).
PER AC23.1311-1C PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW IS BASED ON THE VERTICALAND HORIZONTAL VISUAL
FIELDS FROM DESIGN EYE REFERENCE POINT THAT CANBE ACCOMMODATED WITH EYE ROTATION AND
MINIMAL HEAD ROTATION. THESEAREAS IS NORMALLY USED FOR IMPORTANT AND FREQUENTLY USED
INFORMATION, E.G. GI 275 MFD AND GI 275 EIS.
Figure 4-2 Example of Pilot Field-of-View Installation
NOTE
Display location must not affect the readability of any existing or added switches under all
lighting conditions, including switches that maybe blocked from the instrument flood lights.
In Figure 4-2, the pilot’s field-of-view centerline is coincident with:

1. A projection of the centerline of the pilot’s seat onto the instrument panel; or
2. The center of control yoke or stick in neutral position if the control yoke or stick are offset from
the centerline of the pilot’s seat.
3. Per AC 23.1311, it is acceptable for the pilot field-of-view centerline to deviate horizontally from
the actual centerline by ±2.0 inches.

Rev. 14 Page 4-7
NOTE
If the GI 275 EIS is installed outside the pilot’s maximum field-of-view, and a PFD capable of
annunciating EIS warnings and cautions is not installed, a remote annunciator(s) will be required
as an engine caution and warning advisory. The annunciator(s) must be located within the pilot’s
primary field-of-view. Refer to Section 4.3.3.
4.3.1 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator

The GI 275 MFD is designed to be installed in a standard 3.125-inch instrument slot in the instrument
panel as long as the data provided by that instrument is provided somewhere else within the viewing angles
in the instrument panel. GI 275 EIS units in multi-engine aircraft must be located adjacent to each other
and oriented (i.e., vertically or horizontally) the same as the previously approved installation.
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
GI 275 MFD GI 275 EIS
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 MAX
Figure 4-3 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine)

Rev. 14 Page 4-8
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
GI 275 EIS (ENGINE #1)

GI 275 MFD
GI 275 EIS (ENGINE #2)
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 MAX
PILOT PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW.
PILOT PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW
Figure 4-4 Example of GI 275s in “Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Multi-Engine)
PILOT FIELD-OF-VIEW
CENTERLINE
GI 275 MFD
GI 275 EIS
8.00 MAX 8.00 MAX
21.00 (REF) 21.00 (REF)
PRIMARY FIELD-OF-VIEW
PRIMARY MAXIMUM FIELD-OF-VIEW
Figure 4-5 Example of GI 275s in Non-“Six Pack” Instrument Panel (Single-Engine)

Rev. 14 Page 4-9
Table 4-2 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Weight & Size
Weight Dimensions in. (mm)
Item
lb. (kg) Height Width Depth
GI 275 Base (-00, -60) 1.58 (0.71) 6.44 (163.5)
3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
GI 275 Base (-00, -60) with connector kit 1.87 (0.85) 7.40 (188.0)
Notes:
[1] Does not include the weight of the backup battery. If the battery is installed, add 0.32 lbs
(0.145 kg).
%$&.6,'(2),167580(17
3$1(/)$&(
3

*36
Figure 4-6 GI 275 Multifunction Indicator Dimensions
In most cases, installation of the GI 275 requires minimal modification to the existing instrument panel, as
shown in Figure 4-7.
CAUTION
The instrument panel coating that surrounds the fastener holes and contacts directly with
the GI 275 unit must be removed prior to installation in accordance with Section 4.2.2.
If modification is required, typically it will be trimming an existing 3-inch cutout on the instrument panel
to accommodate the knob on the unit. It may also be necessary to enlarge the instrument panel fastener
holes. Refer to Figure 4-8 for the recommended fastener hole diameter.

Rev. 14 Page 4-10
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GI 275FASTENER
HOLE3 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
GI 275 REF
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF
THE AREA ON THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL THAT COMES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE GI 275
1 MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND PER SECTION 4.2.2. PREPARE AREA 0.125 INCHES LARGER
THAN THE GI 275 METAL INSERTS.
ITEM QTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

MS35214-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED,
[1] [2] BRASS 0.164-32 UNC-24
1 3 OR
MS24693BB-XX [1] SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°,
[2] CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #8-32 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted with any suitable pan head or countersink #8-32 UNC-2A
aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque screws to 8.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
Figure 4-7 Installation of GI 275 Display in the Instrument Panel

Rev. 14 Page 4-11
If new cutouts for the GI 275 are required, the dimensions and minimum spacing are shown in Figure 4-8.
;>@
;

>@
; >@

127(6
',0(16,216,1&+(6>PP@0(75,&9$/8(6$5()255()(5(1&(21/< ;5
72/(5$1&(6,1&+(6 PP
;;;
;;;;;
0,1,0805(&200(1'('6(3$5$7,2181,77281,7&(17(572&(17(5',67$1&(,1$1<',5(&7,21,6>@
Figure 4-8 GI 275 Cutout

Rev. 14 Page 4-12
When fabricating a new instrument panel, it must:
1. Use the same thickness, material type, and corrosion protection as the original instrument panel.
a. If existing instrument panel material isn’t known, 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5,
6061-T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or AMS-QQ-A-250/11 must be used.
b. Corrosion protection must be in accordance with aircraft model-specific standard practices
manual, or alternatively chemical conversion coating per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II, or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II, and high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy primer per
MIL-PRF-23377, Class N.
2. Be manufactured using methods and procedures defined in an aircraft standard practices manual,
maintenance manual, or structural repair manual. Methods, techniques, and practices defined in
AC 43.13-1B Chapter 4, Section 4, Metal Repair Procedures, are acceptable.
3. Maintain the form of the existing instrument panel, including the location of fasteners, and retain
all elements of the instrument panel structure (if comprised of multiple parts assembled together),
such that every feature of the instrument panel is preserved or duplicated.
a. Multiple individual pieces of instrument panel assembly must not be combined.
b. Single pieces must not be split into smaller components.
4. Remain at the location where it was originally installed in the aircraft, use the same type of
fasteners as specified in the aircraft model-specific parts catalog, and retain the same instrument
panel installation method as defined by aircraft type design.
5. Retain the lighting for all previously installed instrument(s) that will be re-installed.
Installation and placement of the required placards and limitations must be in accordance with the
applicable aircraft data and aircraft type TCDS.
If any placards were relocated as a result of a display installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the placard it is replacing.
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard it is replacing.
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard that it is replacing (it can be
arranged differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
• The new placard must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component in the flight deck.
If new switch labels were added as a result of the GI 275 installation, verify the following:
• The font size and label is legible from the pilot’s seat.
• The labels are legible in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are legible with
ambient flood lighting in darkness.
• The switch label must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component to include the switch position.
For all aircraft listed on the AML, electrical bonding and wire routing must be considered for aircraft with
non-metallic airframes.

Rev. 14 Page 4-13
4.3.2 Backup Battery
The backup battery is internal to the GI 275. Captive screws secure a cover plate protecting the battery. The
battery pack will not be vented outside the aircraft. The backup battery can optionally be installed in a
GI 275 MFD. The battery must be installed in the GI 275 unit prior to installation in the instrument panel.
Table 4-3 Backup Battery Weight and Size
Item
1.13 (28.7) (connector end)
GI 275 Backup Battery 0.32 (0.145) [1] 2.36 (60.0) 2.60 (66.0)
0.85 (21.5) (non-connector end)
Notes:
[1] Weight includes the silicone end cap (seen in Figure 4-10).
Figure 4-9 Backup Battery Dimensions

(Shown without required silicone cap)

Rev. 14 Page 4-14
To install the backup battery in the GI 275:
1. Remove the four screws and cover plate from the top of the GI 275 unit.
2. Place the two included end caps onto each end of the battery.
CAUTION
The battery end caps are required for installation of the backup battery in the GI 275.
3. Insert the battery into the GI 275 ensuring the battery connector aligns with the GI 275 connector.
4. Press down to fully seat the battery. It should be level with the top of the unit when fully seated.
5. When the battery is installed correctly, the GI 275 will power on. Power off the unit before
continuing with the installation.
6. Replace the cover and torque the screws to 8 ± 1 in-lbf. Ensure the cover is fully seated.
72548(6&5(:672,1/%)
Figure 4-10 GI 275 Backup Battery Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-15
4.3.3 EIS Annunciator
EIS annunciation is required if the GI 275 EIS is located outside the pilot’s maximum field-of-view.
The EIS annunciator(s) must be located within the pilot’s primary field-of-view. Refer to Figure 4-2 for the
definition of the pilot’s field-of-view.
Two types of EIS annunciators are approved for installation.
4.3.3.1 EIS Annunciator

The Applied Avionics EIS annunciator provides a red “ENGINE” warning and yellow “ENGINE” caution.

57<3

5()$,5&5$)7,167580(17
3$1(/
5()02817,1*6/((9(3$57
2)$1181&,$725
3$1(/&87287 5()
7<3,&$/ 3/8*48,&.&211(&79,9,681
%(:31 $1181&,$7259'&,1&$'(&(17&$87,21$1':$51,1*(1*,1(,1',&$7,21$(5263$&(237,&6

/('%$(:3 $1181&,$7259'&/('&$87,21$1':$51,1*(1*,1(,1',&$7,21$(5263$&(237,&6
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
ϭ͘ /DE^/KE^Z/E/E,^hE>^^Kd,Zt/^^W/&/͘
Ϯ Z/E/ZdKEddt/d,EEhE/dKZDKhEd/E'^>sdd,<^/K&/E^dZhDEdWE>Dh^dWZWZ
&KZ>dZ/>KEdK,/s/ZdhZZEdZ^/^dE>^^d,EKZYh>dKϭϬD/>>/K,D^^D^hZdtE
EEhE/dKZKzE/ZZ&d/E^dZhDEdWE>͘
Figure 4-11 EIS Caution and Warning Annunciator Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-16
4.3.3.2 Separate EIS Annunciator
The Mil-Spec annunciators must be installed side-by-side with the caution (yellow) annunciator on the left
and the warning (red) annunciator on the right. Install using the following procedure:
1. Drill the cutouts to the dimensions in Figure 4-12.
2. Insert MS25041 assembly without the lens holder from the forward side of the panel and secure.
3. Install lamp on the lens holder.
4. Install and secure lens holder on the indicator.
5. Install a placard or label as outlined in Section 6.6.
1 2 FOR 28V AIRCRAFT
3 4 FOR 14V AIRCRAFT
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
7+($5($217+(%$&.2)7+(,167580(173$1(/7+$7&20(6,1',5(&7&217$&7:,7+7+(
$1181&,$7250867%(35(3$5(')25(/(&75,&$/%21'3(56(&7,21,7,65(&200(1'('
7+$77+(35(3$5('$5($%(,1&+(6/$5*(57+$17+(&87287
ITEM OTY PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 1 MS25041-4-327 ANNUNCIATOR, YELLOW, PRESS TO T(67 FOR

28V AIRCRAFT
2 1 MS25041-2-327 ANNUNCIATOR, RED, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR 28V AIRCRAFT
ANNUNCIATOR, YELLOW, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR
3 1 MS25041-4-330
14V AIRCRAFT
4 1 MS25041-2-330 ANNUNCIATOR, RED, PRESS TO 7(67 FOR 14V AIRCRAFT
Figure 4-12 Separate EIS Caution and Warning Annunciators Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-17
4.3.4 GSB 15
The GSB 15 is a USB database and charging hub. The GSB 15 is designed to be mounted on a vertical
surface, where moisture and fluids are less likely to be trapped inside the USB ports but still be visible and
accessible to the user.
The preferred location for the GSB 15 is the instrument panel. Other locations are acceptable provided that
they do not interfere with the safe operation of the aircraft. Only units installed in the pilot’s side of the
instrument panel are approved for USB connections (refer to Figure B-13). All other installations
(including co-pilot) are limited to power only.
There are six variants of the GSB 15. Variants include dual USB Type-A ports, dual USB Type-C ports,
and single USB Type-A/single USB Type-C ports. Each variant also has the option to have the connector
on the rear or side of the unit.
Table 4-4 GSB 15 Weight and Size

Item
GSB 15 Rear Connector
0.16 (0.07) 1.50 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 1.225 (31.1)
(P/N 011-04937-00, -20, -40)
GSB 15 Side Connector 0.16 (0.07) 1.85 (46.99) 1.50 (38.1) 0.844 (21.4)
(P/N 011-04937-01, -30, -50)
2.25” Mounting Kit 0.11 (0.05)
3.125” Mounting Kit 0.20 (0.09)
GSB 15 decorative cover, unfinished 0.03 (0.01)
GSB 15 decorative cover, black 0.03 (0.01)

Rev. 14 Page 4-18
5($5 CONNECTOR (-00), UNIT ONLY 6,'( CONNECTOR (-0), UNIT ONLY
1.50 38.1 .92 23.5 1.50 38.1 .84 21.4
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 .438±.005 11.11±0.13

1.50 38.1
1.55 39.3
0 0.00 0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 .438±.005 11.11±0.13

0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.4 10
0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.4 10
5($5 CONNECTOR (-00), WITH CONNECTOR KIT (011-05044-00) 6,'( CONNECTOR (-0), WITH CONNECTOR KIT (011-05044-00)
1.02 25.9
.64 16.2
.80 20.24
1.85 47.0
BACK OF MOUNTING SURFACE BACK OF MOUNTING SUFACE
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED.
Figure 4-13 GSB 15 Dimensions

Rev. 14 Page 4-19
If a new cutout for the GSB 15 is required on the instrument panel, the dimensions of the cutout is shown in Figure 4-14. Note that the location of the GSB 15 on the
instrument panel is not required to meet any particular field-of-view requirements. When installing the decorative cover, the cutout with four screw holes is required.
RECOMMENDED PANEL CUTOUT DIMENSIONS FOR UNIT
+.030 +0.76
1.000 - .005 25.40 - 0.13
2X .129±.003 3.26±0.08
(FOR PAN HEAD SCREWS)
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
STANDARD HOLES
45°
0 0.00
OR OR
.438±.005 11.11±0.13 0 0.00
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
.438±.005 11.11±0.13
(FOR 100° FLAT HEAD SCREWS)
2X .129±.003 3.26±0.08 THRU ALL

.225 5.72 X 100°
COUNTERSUNK HOLES
OR OR
Figure 4-14 GSB 15 Cutout Dimensions

Rev. 14 Page 4-20
CAUTION
the GSB 15 unit must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 FASTENER HOLE
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.
2
THE AREA ON THE BACK OF THE INSTRUMENT PANEL THAT COMES IN DIRECT CONTACT WITH THE
1 GSB 15 MUST BE PREPARED FOR ELECTRICAL BOND PER SECTION 4.2.2. PREPARE AREA 0.125 INCHES
LARGER THAN THE GSB 15 METAL INSERTS.

010-02201-00, -20, 40 GSB 15, REAR, UNIT
1 1 OR
010-02201-01, -30, -50 GSB 15, SIDE, UNIT
MS35214-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED,
[1] [2] BRASS, 0.112-40 UNC-2A
2 2 OR
MS24693-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [2] 100°, CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #4-40 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable pan head or countersink #4-40 UNC-2A
aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque 0.112-40 UNC-2A screws to 5.0 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
Figure 4-15 GSB 15 Cutout Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-21
The GSB 15 can be installed directly into an existing 2-inch diameter flight instrument cutout without
modifying the instrument panel using the GSB 15 2.25” Mounting Kit (P/N 011-05043-00).
CAUTION
the GSB 15 Mounting Kit (Item 2) must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 MOUNTING KIT

FASTENER HOLE
4 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
2
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.

010-02201-00, -20, -40 GSB 15, REAR, UNIT
1 1 OR
010-02201-01, -30, -50 GSB 15, SIDE, UNIT
2 1 011-05043-00 SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING KIT, 2.25”, GSB 15
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°P,
3 2
[1] [2] CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #4-40 UNC-2A
SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED,
MS35214-XX [1] [3]
BRASS, 0.138-32 UNC-2A
4 4 OR
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [3] 100°P, CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #6-32 UNC 2-A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable aerospace steel screws.
Figure 4-16 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (2.25-Inch Cutout)

Rev. 14 Page 4-22
The GSB 15 can be installed directly into an existing 3-inch diameter flight instrument cutout without
modifying the instrument panel using the GSB 15 3.125” Mounting Kit (P/N 011-05043-01).
CAUTION
the GSB 15 Mounting Kit (Item 2) must be removed prior to installation.
%$&.2),167580(173$1(/35(3$5$7,21
INSTRUMENT
PANEL
GSB 15 MOUNTING KIT

FASTENER HOLE
4 PLACES
,167$//$7,21,1,167580(173$1(/
2
4 INSTRUMENT PANEL
REF.

010-02201-00, -20, -40 GSB 15, REAR, UNIT
1 1 OR
010-02201-01, -30, -50 GSB 15, SIDE, UNIT
2 1 011-05043-01 SUB-ASSY, MOUNTING KIT, 3.125”, GSB 15
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD, 100°,
3 2
[1] [2] CROSS-RECESSED, BRASS, #4-40 UNC-2A
SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED
MS35214-XX [1] [3]
BRASS, 0.138-32 UNC-2A
4 4 OR
MS24693BB-XX SCREW, MACHINE, FLAT COUNTERSUNK HEAD,
[1] [3] 100°P, CROSS-RECESSED, #6-32 UNC-2A
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other suitable aerospace steel screws.
Figure 4-17 GSB 15 Installation with Mounting Kit (3.125-Inch Cutout)

Rev. 14 Page 4-23
4.3.4.1 GSB 15 Decorative Cover
NOTE
If using the unfinished version of the decorative cover, finishing methods that require less
than 120° C are recommended. If the finishing method (such as powder coating) exceeds
120° C, it is recommended to pre-heat the cosmetic piece to 200° C or greater before
applying a finish in order to prevent cosmetic defects.
Perform the following steps to install the Decorative Cover Kits listed in Table 3-4.
1. Install the GSB 15 unit per Section 4.3.4.
2. Install the intermediate piece using the two provided screws.
3. Peel off the tape liners from the intermediate piece.
4. Install the cosmetic piece.
For best results, install the decorative cover as specified below:
• Recommended installation temperature: 70-100°F (21-38°C).
• Minimum installation temperature: 50°F (10°C).
• Recommended screw torque: 4-6 in-lbf.
• After removing the tape liners from the intermediate piece, avoid touching the exposed adhesive.
• Before installing, clean the inside of the cosmetic piece with a 50-90% isopropyl alcohol and water
mixture. Allow it to fully dry before proceeding.
• When installing the decorative cover, apply an evenly distributed minimum force of 7 lbf (3 kgf or
30 N).
• The adhesive will fully cure within 72 hours (90% strength after 24 hours).
Figure 4-18 GSB 15 Decorative Cover Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-24
4.4 Backshell Assembly
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the LRU in accordance with Section 4.1.1, then terminate
the cables to the LRU jackscrew backshell assembly using the following procedure. Refer to Figure 4-19
and Figure 4-20.
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts (4) in the D-sub connector (7) in accordance with the
aircraft wiring drawings.
2. Place the smooth side of the backshell strain relief clamp (9) across the cable bundle and secure
using three 4-40 x 0.375 pan head screws (10).
CAUTION
Place smooth side of strain relief (9) across cable bundle. DO NOT place grooved side
across cable bundle. Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle
may damage wires.
3. Terminate the ring terminals (6) to the tapped holes on the backshell (8) by placing items on the
8-32 x 0.312 pan head shield terminal screw (13) in the following order before finally inserting the
screw into the tapped holes on the shield block:
a. split washer (14)
b. flat washer (15)
c. first ring terminal (6)
d. second ring terminal (6) (if needed)
NOTE
Each tapped hole on the backshell (8) may accommodate only two ring terminals (6). It is
preferred that a maximum of two wires (2) be terminated per ring terminal. Two wires per
ring terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153). If only a single wire is left or if only a single wire is needed for this
connector a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG (MS25036-149) can accommodate
this single wire. If more wires exist for the connector than two per ring terminal, it is
permissible to terminate three wires per ring terminal.

Rev. 14 Page 4-25
12 [
11
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN

RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE
ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
10 [
Figure 4-19 Jackscrew Backshell and Shield Block Assembly

Rev. 14 Page 4-26
NOTES
PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE. DO NOT PLACE
1
GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
2 PREFERRED SHIELD TERMINATION METHOD SHOWN.
Figure 4-20 Shield Block Termination on Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

Rev. 14 Page 4-27
4.4.1 Configuration Module Installation
GI 275 connector assemblies serve as housing for configuration modules. This section lists configuration
module assemblies and installation procedures for installations.
Refer to Figure 4-21 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip back approximately 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness
(3). It is the installer’s responsibility to determine the proper length of insulation to be removed.
2. Crimp a pin (4) to each conductor.
3. Ensure that the wire is visible in the inspection hole, and that the insulation is 1/64 to 1/32 inches
from the end of the contact.
4. Insert newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the connector housing (5) location. For details,
refer to the applicable interconnect drawings.
5. Attach the module (1) to the backshell (6) using a pan head screw (10).
6. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the module (1).
7. Orient the connector housing (5) so that the 4-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side of the
backshell (6) as the module (1).
8. Attach the cover (7) to the backshell (6) using two screws (8).
Figure 4-21 Jackscrew Backshell Assembly

(Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. 14 Page 4-28
4.4.2 GSB 15 Connector Assembly
Prepare the shielded cables to be connected to the LRU in accordance with Section 4.1.1, then terminate
the cables to the LRU ground lug using the following procedure:
1. Terminate the crimped pin/socket contacts in the locking connector in accordance with the aircraft
wiring drawings.
2. Attach the locking connector to the GSB 15, paying attention to the keying and latching features of
the connector.
3. If the data transfer functionality is intended to be used, terminate the shield drain ring terminal to
the ground lug on the back of the GSB 15 unit using the 4-40 x 0.125 pan head screw. This step is
not required if the GSB 15 will be used for charging only.

Rev. 14 Page 4-29
4.5 Display Sensors
4.5.1 Backup GPS Antenna
The backup GPS antenna is designed for installation on top of an existing instrument panel glareshield.
The selected location must offer good visibility of the sky through the windshield.
Installation of the backup GPS antenna is optional. When installed, the antenna cannot obstruct or limit the
pilot’s vision (even though the antenna has a low profile). The optimal antenna position is horizontal or as
close to horizontal as practical given the shape of the glareshield.
Fastener holes for non-removable antenna installation, as depicted in Figure 4-23, must not penetrate
through the ventilation or defrost channels built into the glareshield, if present. If the glareshield is part of
the instrument panel structure, fastener holes may only be drilled if allowed by the aircraft maintenance
manual or structural repair manual.
Table 4-5 Backup GPS Antenna Weight and Size

Item
Backup GPS Antenna 0.20 (0.092) 0.60 (15.2) 2.88 (73.2) 2.22 (56.4)
; LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
LQ PP
Figure 4-22 Backup GPS Antenna Dimensions

Rev. 14 Page 4-30

5()*/$5(6+,(/'
,167580(173$1(/
(;,67,1*
'5,//
7<33/&6

'5,//

7<33/&6

'5,//
7<33/&6
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('&$'3/$7('81&$,1/21*

06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('%/$&.2;,'(),1,6+81&$,1/21*
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*3/$7(7:2/8*5('8&('5,9(763$&,1*/2:+(,*+767((/81-&%
06$' 5,9(762/,'&2817(5681.'(*35(&,6,21+($',12',1/21*
3/$7('(7$,/ 6+((77$/,1&+7+,&.3(5$06$06$0644$
%$&.83*36$17(11$
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
Ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,<hW'WÊdEE/dDϭ͘
ϯ &^dEZ,K>^Z>KddKDd,EhdW>d/dDϰ͘
ϰ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯ
WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϱ h^&^dEZt/d,><Ky/&/E/^,/&EdEE>Kd/KE/^^h,d,d&^dEZ^Zs/^/>dKd,W/>KdKZKW/>Kd
ED/',dKD^KhZK&/Ed>'>Z͘dKZYh͘ϭϯϴϬͲϯϮhEͲϮ^Zt^,Ed/',d͘
Figure 4-23 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Non-Removable Installation Example)

Rev. 14 Page 4-31
2.0
REF. GLARE SHIELD,

INSTRUMENT PANEL
EXISTING 1
1
2 2
2 1
3 2
1
3 FASTENER TAPE, SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE BACKED, A-A-55126 CLASS 1/2, TYPE 1, LOOP 1.0 INCH WIDE
1 A-A-55126 3
2 FASTENER TAPE, SYNTHETIC, ADHESIVE BACKED, A-A-55126 CLASS 1/2, TYPE 1, HOOK 1.0 INCH WIDE
1 1 011-04036-0 BACKUP GPS ANTENNA
QTY ITEM PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
NOTES
1. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2 PEEL OFF ADHESIVE PROTECTING FILM AND PRESS THE FASTENER TAPE IN TO BOND. SURFACES MUST BE CLEAN AND FREE
FROM OIL OR OTHER CONTAMINANTS. LOOP FASTENER IS BONDED TO GLARE SHIELD AND HOOK FASTENER IS BONDED TO
ANTENNA. TAPE FASTENER MUST BE 2.0 INCHES OR LONGER.
3 GPS ANTENNA KIT, GARMIN PART NO. 010-12444-00 INCLUDES DUAL LOCK FASTENER, GARMIN PART NO. 252-00433-00
WHICH CAN BE USED INSTEAD OF A-A-55126 FASTENER TAPE.
Figure 4-24 Backup GPS Antenna Installation (Removable Installation Example)

Rev. 14 Page 4-32
4.5.2 GTP 59
An effective location for the GTP 59 OAT Probe is on or near an access panel on the bottom of the wing, or
in areas where it would mostly be shaded in straight and level flight.
For composite aircraft, the probe must be mounted on an access panel or inspection cover. A typical
installation example is shown in Figure 4-27. If the access panel or inspection cover is conductive, a non-
conductive doubler must be used and a minimum 0.5 inches of clearance maintained between the GTP 59
probe/terminal lug and any conductive element of aircraft structure. A typical installation example is
shown in Figure 4-28.
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, electrical bond between GTP 59 and nearby aircraft metallic
structure must achieve a direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ with the connector
disconnected. It may be necessary to use a bonding strap to electrically bond the probe. Bonding strap
must:
1. Have the cross-sectional area greater than 0.016 square inches (approx 20,800 circular mils).
QQB575R30T437 7/16” tubular braid (24,120 circular mils) or QQB575F36T781 3/4” flat braid
(20,800 circular mils) meet this requirement.
2. Be as short as possible, not to exceed 6 inches. When installed, the strap must not loop back on
itself.
3. Use MS20659-130 lug and #10 stud (or larger) attached to local aircraft metallic structure with
minimum thickness of 0.032 inches.
4. Use a 5/16 stud size terminal lug connected directly to GTP 59 probe.
LQ PP 81()$ LQ PP
LQ PP LQ PP LQ PP
LQ PP
Figure 4-25 GTP 59 OAT Probe Dimensions
For metal and tube-and-fabric aircraft, if the GTP 59 is installed in an access panel in Lightning Zone 2A
(refer to Appendix Section F.2), the access panel must be at least 0.032-inch thick aluminum or, if the
access panel is less than 0.032-inch thick aluminum, a doubler that is at least 0.032-inch thick aluminum
(per Figure 4-26) must be installed.
For aircraft with metallic airframes, a doubler is required when the GTP 59 probe is installed in the skin.
The doubler must be a minimum of 2 inches and at least one gauge thicker than the skin with a minimum
doubler thickness of 0.032 inches. The doubler material and installation must be provisioned by the aircraft
structural repair manual or standard practices manual, or alternatively:
1. Use the same material as the aircraft skin. If the material used in the construction of the aircraft
skin is not known, 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5 can be used.
2. If corrosion protection methods are not specified by the model-specific aircraft standard practices
manual, the doubler material must be chemical conversion coated per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II and primed with a high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy
primer per MIL-PRF-23377, Class N.

Rev. 14 Page 4-33
The GTP 59 probe must not be mounted in a fuel tank area (wet or dry). An air scoop or a ducted inlet are
an adequate location for the GTP 59 probe. The probe must be located no closer to the inlet edge than the
width of its narrowest opening.
The probe has no icing protection. Temperature measurements may be incorrect if ice accumulates on the
probe, which in turn may affect Engine Percent Power or other data that depend on the measurement of air
temperature.
It is recommended the GTP 59 probe is installed in Lightning Zone 3, although Zone 2A may be an
acceptable location for certain aircraft.
'28%/(5*732$7352%(
06$' 5,9(762/,'81,9(56$/+($'
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

0,1

5()$,5&5$)7 7<33/&6(9(1/<63$&('
6.,10(7$//,&
57<3

EKd^
Ϯ Ehd/dDϭ͕t^,Z/dDϮ͕EWZK/dDϯZWZdK&'dWϱϵKdWZK^^D>z;</dͿ͕'ZD/EWͬEϬϭϭͲϬϬϵϳϴͲϬϬ͘
ϯ D/E/DhDKh>Z^/^,KtE͘/Zh>Z^,WKWd/KE>͘Kh>Zd,/<E^^/^KE'h'd,/<Zd,E/ZZ&d^</E͘
ϰ ^WKd&dKZDKsKd/E'^ZYh/ZdKD/Ed/E>dZ/>KE͘
ϱ Z/sd^Z/E^d>>WZD/>ͲZͲϰϳϭϵϲ;E^DϰϳϭϵϲͿZ/sd͕h<dzW͕WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KE͕KZWZD/>Ͳ^dͲϰϬϯ
WZWZd/KE&KZE/E^d>>d/KEK&Z/sdÊ^Zt^͕ZK<dD/^^/>͕E/Z&ZD^dZhdhZ^͘
ϲ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-26 GTP 59 Installation in Metallic Aircraft

Rev. 14 Page 4-34
For composite aircraft, the GTP 59 probe must be installed in Lightning Zone 3 and installed such that it is
electrically isolated. For aircraft model-specific information regarding acceptable lightning zones for the
GTP 59, refer to Table D-1. Refer to Appendix F for lightning zone details. Regardless of its location, the
probe must protrude into the air flow when the aircraft is in flight and be kept away from direct sources of
heat (e.g., engine exhaust, direct sunlight, cabin exhaust, etc.) to provide an accurate air temperature
measurement.
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

5()$&&(663$1(/
121&21'8&7,9( '5,//

EKd^
ϯ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-27 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Non-Conductive Access Panel)

Rev. 14 Page 4-35
'28%/(5*732$7352%(3+(12/,&:,7+&27721),%5(0,/,6
*732$7352%(
:$6+(5/2&.6(/)6($/,1*,1
187+(;$*21$/6.,5781()%
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21

5()$&&(663$1(/
&21'8&7,9(

EKd^
ϯ D/E/DhDKh>Z^/^,KtE͘/Zh>Z^,WKWd/KE>͘Kh>Zd,/<E^^/^Ϭ͘ϬϲϬ/E,D/E/DhD͘
ϰ Kh>Z/^>Kd^h,d,dd,WZK,K>/ÊdZKEd,,K>/E^^WE>͘
ϱ KEKh>ZdK^^WE>h^/E'WZK^ÊDdZ/>^^^W/&//E/ZZ&dD/EdEEDEh>EͬKZ
^dZhdhZ>ZW/ZDEh>&KZEKEͲ^dZhZdhZ>WW>/d/KE^͘
ϲ dKZYh͘ϯϭϮϱͲϯϮhE&ͲϮEhdϭϬϬ͘Ϭ ϮϬ͘Ϭ>&Ͳ/E͘
Figure 4-28 GTP 59 Installation in Composite Aircraft (Conductive Access Panel)

Rev. 14 Page 4-36
4.6 Engine Indicating System
The aircraft must retain all engine indications for engine and aircraft operations within the limits defined in
the Pilot’s Operating Handbook or other approved manual.
Only the GI 275 EIS sensors specified in this section are approved for installation as part of the GI 275
STC. Installation of other sensors requires separate airworthiness approval from the cognizant authority.
The following sections contain information applicable to EIS sensor installation:
• List of compatible sensor interfaces – Appendix Section C.12.
• Selection of aircraft specific sensors – Appendix Section C.12.
• Sensor configuration – Section 5.7.2 and Appendix Section C.12.
• Interconnect diagrams of sensor connections to the GEA 24(B) – Appendix B.
NOTE
This STC does not approve any modifications to the engine firewall.
In addition to the data in this manual, the installation of each probe/sensor and wire must be accomplished
in accordance with the sensor manufacturer’s instructions or as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
Wire routing and clamping must follow procedures defined in the aircraft maintenance manual or standard
practices manual. Practices defined in Chapter 11, Electrical Systems, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection
and Repair are acceptable.
Sensors must be connected using hoses and fittings approved as part of the aircraft or engine type
certificated design or standard aircraft parts (AN/MS).
Sensors must not be mounted directly to the engine or engine baffle unless otherwise instructed in this
manual.
CAUTION
Check hose routing for sharp bends. Check sensors and fittings for leaks during engine
run-up; correct any leaks prior to flight.
4.6.1 GEA 24(B)

The GEA 24(B) must be installed in the fuselage cabin environment where it is protected from accidental
damage by occupants and rapid thermal change. It can be mounted directly or indirectly (i.e., via a support
structure) on the aircraft structure. It can be mounted in any orientation, but vertical with the connectors
pointing down is preferred. The unit should be mounted so that the connectors and status LED is viewable
and where it can be inspected and serviced.
CAUTION
The GEA 24(B) cannot be mounted in the engine compartment or where it could be
exposed to moisture or fluids.
If provisioned by the aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual, the GEA 24(B) can be
mounted on the engine firewall (opposite surface of the powerplant), fuselage frames, or stringers. The
GEA 24(B) wiring must be routed through existing pass-through holes in the firewall or use existing
bulkhead connectors; otherwise, separate airworthiness approval is required for added holes in the engine
firewall.
The GEA 24(B) must not be placed directly below fluid lines (e.g., fuel lines, oil or hydraulic lines). It also
must be installed as far away as practical from heat sources.

Rev. 14 Page 4-37
If installing the GEA 24(B) on the avionics shelf or the instrument panel, ensure the new fastener holes
maintain a minimum of 2D edge distance and 3D spacing from existing holes. Additionally, ensure the
combined weight of the GEA 24(B) and existing equipment remain within the established weight limit of
the shelf or instrument panel.
If an avionics shelf or suitable platform for the GEA 24(B) is not available, a support structure can be
fabricated. The support structure must:
• Be electrically bonded to the airframe per Section 4.2.
• Be made from 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5, minimum 0.040 inches thick.
• Be protected from corrosion by applying conversion coating per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II or
MIL-DTL-81706 Type II and primed with epoxy primer per MIL-PRF-23377, Class N.
• Be fabricated in accordance with methods outlined in AC 43.13-2B chapters 1 and 2 and
AC 43.13-1B chapter 4.
• Allow a minimum clearance of 3.0 inches between the connector end of the GEA 24(B) and any
structures for proper wire harness routing.
• Maintain a maximum load capacity of 3.0 lbs.
An example of the support bracket for a GEA 24(B) is shown in Figure 4-29.
Figure 4-29 Example Support Structure
Table 4-6 GEA 24(B) Weight and Size

Item
GEA 24 unit 0.71 (0.322)
3.0 (76.2)
GEA 24B unit 0.74 (0.336) 1.9 (48.3) 6.5 (165.1)
GEA 24 with connector 1.60 (0.725) 5.0 (127.0)

Rev. 14 Page 4-38
2X 0.20 5.1 2X 6.40 162.6
NOTE:
1. DIMENSION: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE
FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES
ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED
2.00 50.8
2X 0.42 10.7
4.98 126.6
2.94 74.7
3.4 86 0.2 4
CENTER OF GRAVITY CENTER OF GRAVITY
2.00 50.8
1.1 27
CENTER OF
GRAVITY
6.80 172.7 0.04 1

TYPICAL THICKNESS
BENEATH FASTENER HEAD
Figure 4-30 GEA 24(B) Dimensions

Rev. 14 Page 4-39
011-02848-01 GEA 24 REMOTE MOUNTED ENGINE INTERFACE UNIT
1 1 OR
011-05991-01 GEA 24B REMOTE MOUNTED ENGINE INTERFACE UNIT
MS35207-XX SCREW, MACHINE, PAN HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED, CARBON
2 4
[1] [2] STEEL, CADMIUM PLATED, #10-32 UNF-2A
3 8 NAS1149F0363P WASHER
NUT SELF-LOCKING, HEXAGON REGULAR HEIGHT, 250°F,
4 4 MS21044N3 [3]
CADMIUM PLATED, STEEL, #10-32
Notes:
[1] Screws can be substituted by any other equivalent aerospace steel screws.
[2] Torque 0.190-32 UNF-2A screws 13.5 ± 1.0 in-lbf.
[3] Nut can be substituted by any suitable aerospace steel self-locking nuts or nutplates.
Figure 4-31 GEA 24(B) Mounting Hardware

Rev. 14 Page 4-40
4.6.2 Carburetor Air Temperature
The sensor location will vary for different carburetors. This STC provides the basis for airworthiness
approval only for the temperature sensor installed in the existing port with 0.2500-28UNF-2A thread.
Refer to the engine or carburetor manufacturer data for temperature sensor location, if required.
1
4 2
1
2 1
1
3 3
1
4
1
5 REF. EXISTING 0.2500-28UNF-2A

THREADED PORT IN CARBURETOR WALL
1 4 CARBURETOR, EXISTING
1 3 MS35769-2 GASKET, METALLIC, ENCASED, ANNULAR, COPPER, Ø1/4 ID×Ø1/2 OD
1 2 MS20995 WIRE, SAFETY OR LOCK
1 1 T3B10-SG PROBE, CARBURETOR TEMPERATURE
NOTES
WHEN INSTALLED, FACE OF THE SENSOR THREADED BOSS IS FLUSH WITH THE INSIDE OF CARBURETOR BARREL. USE
WASHER(S) IF REQUIRED TO SPACE THE SENSOR ACCORDINGLY.
T3B10-SG TEMPERATURE SENSOR HAS 0.2500-28UNF-2A THREAD. INSTALL WITH MEDIUM STRENGTH THREADLOCKER.
EXERCISE CAUTION TO PREVENT FUEL CONTAMINATION.
SPLIT FACE OF THE GASKET FACES NON-ROTATING SURFACE.
SAFETY WIRE PROBE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 7, SAFETYING OF CHAPTER 7, AIRCRAFT HARDWARE, CONTROL
CABLES AND TURNBUCKLES OF AC43-13-1B, AIRCRAFT INSPECTION AND REPAIR.
SENSOR INSTALLATION IN EXISTING CARBURETOR PORT ONLY. ADDITION OF NEW TAPPED HOLES TO CARBURETOR
BARREL NOT ALLOWED.
Figure 4-32 Carburetor Temperature Sensor Installation Example
CAUTION
Fuel and air passages must remain free of contaminants during work near and around the
carburetor.

Rev. 14 Page 4-41
4.6.3 Oil Temperature
CAUTION
Severe engine damage may occur if the incorrect probe length or type is installed. Use the
engine manufacturer’s guidance for proper oil temperature probe length and type.
When installing the oil temperature sensor, use the engine manufacturer’s guidance for probe length and
location. The unbroken side of the crush washer must face the sensor flange. The sensor is torqued finger
tight plus one-half turn and safety wired in accordance with practices defined in Section 7, Safetying, of
Chapter 7, Aircraft Hardware, Control Cables and Turnbuckles, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and
Repair.
Figure 4-33 Oil Temperature Sensor Installation Example

Rev. 14 Page 4-42
4.6.4 Pressure
The manifold pressure, oil pressure, and fuel pressure sensors all have similar installation requirements and
processes.
When replacing existing sensors/instruments:
• Do not remove fittings with small orifices that are installed in existing hoses or plumbing. It may
limit fluid loss and fire damage in the event of a hose failure.
• If the sensors/instruments were installed on the cold side of the firewall, reuse the lines and
fittings. This STC does not approve the routing of new fuel or oil lines into the cockpit.
• Do not remove previously installed devices designed to absorb pressure shock/surge (snubber).
• Reuse manifold tubing if it has a vent hole, and install the manifold pressure sensor so that it is not
at the low point in the line.
• Inspect the condition of all existing tubes, hoses, and fittings that are being reused; replace as
necessary.
• Replace the fuel and oil hoses with new hoses if they are used by the sensors installed under this
STC and are located in the engine compartment.
• Install oil and fuel pressure sensors in the same compartment as the sensor being replaced. This
ensures the same ambient reference pressure is used and the indication is consistent with the
previous gauge.
• Verify that the supply voltage and sensor configuration are correct if a different sensor is installed
(e.g., if a brass sensor is replaced by a GPT sensor).
When installing pressure sensors:
• Install sensors in accordance with the applicable installation example (refer to Figure 4-34 (brass),
Figure 4-35 (mil-spec), and Figure 4-36 (GPT).
• Fuel and oil hoses installed in the engine compartment must meet TSO-C53a Type C or D (fire
resistant). Only use approved aircraft fittings (e.g., AN/AS-spec or Mil-spec) and hoses
(e.g., Aeroquip 303 or Aeroquip AE 466). All hoses must be rated for the pressure and temperature
and be compatible with the fuel or oil.
• Do not install sensors directly below fittings or components that may leak flammable fluid.
• Thread sealant must be used for the NPT threads. To reduce the risk of system contamination, a
minimal amount of sealant should be applied, leaving at least two threads at the end of the fitting
clear of sealant.
• Sensor hoses must be routed as far away from the aircraft exhaust system as practical and no closer
than 6 inches.
• Line fittings, routing, alignment, bonding, and support spacing must be installed as defined in the
aircraft maintenance manual or Section 8-31 of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair.
WARNING
Ensure the pressure sensor installation does not introduce thread sealant or debris into the
aircraft system.

Rev. 14 Page 4-43
10
1
8
1
6
1
1
1

9 11
1 1
4
1 7
12 1

1
5
1
78%(,12'
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('81)$,1&+/21*
06% 6/((9(&2035(66,2178%(),77,1*)/$5('78%(2'
06:'* &/$03/2237<3(&86+,21('78%(
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1: &283/,1*3,3($137
$1 18778%(&283/,1*6+25778%(2'81-)%
$1 $'$37(5675$,*+73,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 $'$37(5(/%2:'(*3,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 $'$37(5(/%2:'(*3,3(7278%(1377281-)$
;; 35(6685(6(1625
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEd͕KZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^ϭͬϴͲϮϳEWdW/Wd,Z͘^/d/KE>>Kd/KEE/E^d>>d/KE/E&KZDd/KE/E

d,/^^d/KE͘

/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿdK
KEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-34 Brass Sensor Installation

(Coupling Mount Example)

Rev. 14 Page 4-44
6
1
1
1
4
1
5
1
2
1
7
1
8
1
3
1
78%(,12'
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06 6&5(:0$&+,1(3$1+($'&52665(&(66('81)$,1&+/21*
06% 6/((9(&2035(66,2178%(),77,1*)/$5('78%(2'
06:'* &/$03/2237<3(&86+,21('78%(
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1 18778%(&283/,1*6+25778%(2'81-)%
35(6685(75$16'8&(59(17('*$*(
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEdKZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^^dEZ&/dd/E';D^ϯϯϲϱϲͿt/d,ϳͬϭϲͲϮϬhE:&Ͳϯd,ZEZYh/Z^ϯϳ
'Z&>ZdhKEEd/KE͘
>DWd,Ê^KZKz;/dDϭͿdKDKhEd͘>DWEKddK>K<sEd,K>^/EÊ^KZKz͕/&WZÊd͘
/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿ
dKKEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-35 Mil-Spec Style Sensor Installation

(Housing Mount Example)

Rev. 14 Page 4-45
3 1
1 1
2
1
6
1
7
1
4
8 1 11
1 1
10 5
1 1
$/7(51$7,9(
9
&/$03,1*
1 237,21
1
1
1 11 MS21919WDG1 CLAMP LOOP TYPE, CUSHIONED, SUPPORT, Ø TUBE
1 10 AN818- NUT, TUBE COUPLING, SHORT, Ø0.250 TUBE OD, 81-)%
1 9 MS51533B SLEEVE, COMPRESSION, TUBE FITTING, 37Û FLARED
1 8 TUBE, Ø0.0 IN OD
AN816- ADAPTER, STRAIGHT, PIPE TO TUBE 1/8-27 NPT TO 81-)$
1 7 AN822- ELBOW, PIPE TO TUBE, 90Û-27 NPT TO 81-)$
AN823- ELBOW, PIPE TO TUBE, 45Û, 1/8-27 NPT TO 81-)$
1 6 AN910-1W COUPLING, PIPE, 1/8-27 ANPT
NUT, SELF-LOCKING, 450ÛF, REDUCED HEXAGON, REDUCED HEIGHT, RING
1 5 MS21042L3
BASE, NON-CORROSION RESISTANT STEEL, 0.190-32UNF-3B
1 4 NAS1149F0332P WASHER, FLAT, STEEL, CAD PLATED, 0.032 INCH THICK, ID 0.203, OD 0.438
SCREW, MACHINE PAN-HEAD, CROSS-RECESSED, CORROSION RESTING STEEL,
1 3 MS51958-;;
0.190-32UNF-2A
1 2 MS21919WDG9 CLAMP LOOP TYPE, CUSHIONED, SUPPORT, Ø9/16 TUBE
1 1 011-05783-XX PRESSURE SENSOR, GPT
EKd^
dKWZsEd&>h/EdZWDEdKZ/Edd,Ê^KZ^K/d/ÊKd^dZ/',dhW͘
WZ^^hZÊ^KZ,^ϭͬϴͲϮϳW/Wd,Z͘^/d/KE>>Kd/KEE/E^d>>d/KE/E&KZDd/KE/Ed,/^^d/KE͘
>dZEd/sDd,K͕>DWZKhEd,Ê^KZKz;/dDϭͿ͘
/&,K^KZdh/E'/^WZs/Kh^>z/E^d>>͕h^WWZKs/ZZ&d&/dd/E'^;Ğ͘Ő͕͘Eͬ^Ͳ^WKZD/>Ͳ^WͿdK
KEEdd,Ê^KZ͘
Figure 4-36 GPT Sensor Installation

(Housing Mount Example)

Rev. 14 Page 4-46
4.6.5 Fuel Flow
Refer to Figure 4-37 to determine the fuel flow transducer installation for the specific aircraft fuel system.
Fuel Pump / FF Transducer

Fuel Filter Fuel Servo /
OUT Engine
Carburetor
IN
(a) Fuel Injected or Carbureted Engine without a Fuel Return Line
FF Transducer
Fuel Pump / Fuel Flow
Fuel Filter OUT
Divider
Fuel Servo IN
Engine
Fuel Return Line
Fuel
Tank
(b) Fuel Injected Engine with a Fuel Return Line
#1 FF Transducer
Fuel Pump /
OUT
Fuel Filter
Pressure Carburetor Engine
IN
#2 FF Transducer
Fuel
OUT Fuel Return Line
Tank
IN
(c) Pressure Carburated Engine with a Fuel Return Line
Figure 4-37 Fuel Flow Installation Configurations
NOTE
The fuel flow sensor will introduce a small pressure drop. Refer to Appendix D to determine if
a fuel pressure test is required for the aircraft model.

Rev. 14 Page 4-47
The fuel flow transducer can be mounted by clamping the hoses connected to the transducer or by using a
bracket. If mounting with clamps, the unit placement must be no further than 6 inches from the clamp to
the nearest face of the transducer.
• The transducer can be installed in the following orientations:
◦ The wires pointing up.
◦ The cap with five bolts pointing up.
◦ The output port pointing up.
◦ Any combination thereof.
• The flow must follow the direction marked on the ports.
• The hose connected to the IN port should be straight for a minimum of 4 inches.
• The length of hose connected to the OUT port should be level or slope up. It must not slope down
more than 4 inches per foot.
If mounting the transducer with a bracket, the bracket must be fabricated. The bracket can be fastened at
the top of the engine using the existing engine crankcase fasteners. The amount of available space between
the top of the engine and the engine cowling needs to be considered in the design of the bracket. The
location of the bracket and position of the fuel flow transducer must result in as few bends in the fuel lines
as possible.
The bracket must be fabricated from 300 series austenitic stainless steel (annealed per AMS 5901 or
½ hard per AMS 5517), sheet thickness 19 gauge minimum (0.044 inches), and installed as provisioned by
the aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices manual. Methods, techniques, and practices
defined in Chapter 4, Metal Structure, Welding and Brazing, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and
Repair are acceptable.
Hoses and fittings connected to fuel flow transducer must meet the following:
• The fuel flow transducer must be connected with new hoses and the hoses must not be subject to
movement that could loosen the fittings.
• The hoses must have the same internal diameter as the hose being replaced and meet TSO-C53a
Type C or D (fire-resistant) specifications.
• Fuel-compatible thread sealant must be used for the NPT threads. To reduce the risk of fuel
system contamination, a minimal amount of sealant should be applied, leaving at least two threads
at the end of the fitting clear of sealant.
• Fitting torque must not exceed 15 ft-lbf or two full turns past finger-tight, whichever occurs first.
• The transducer and fuel hoses must be routed as far away from the aircraft exhaust system as
practical. The transducer must be protected with Aeroquip AE102-( ) fire-sleeve if within
6 inches of any exhaust component.
• Line fittings, routing, alignment, bonding, and support spacing must be installed as defined in the
aircraft maintenance manual or Section 8-31 of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair.
WARNING
Ensure the fuel flow transducer installation does not introduce thread sealant or debris into
the fuel system.
CAUTION
Do not blow pressurized air through the flow transducer.

Rev. 14 Page 4-48

5()$1
%2/7(1*,1(%/2&.(;,67,1*

7<33/&6

5()061187(;,67,1*
5()$1&:$6+(5(;,67,1*
7<33/&6
6+,(/')8(/6(1625+$/80,180,17+,&.
%5$&.(7)8(/)/2:6(1625
1$6)3 :$6+(5)/$767((/&$'3/$7(',1&+7+,&.,'2'
06/ 1876(/)/2&.,1*5('8&('+(;$*215('8&('+(,*+75,1*%$6(81-)%
$1 $'$37(5675$,*+73,3(7278%(1377281-)$
$1 %2/70$&+,1($,5&5$)781)$,1*5,3'5,//('6+$1.
)7 )8(/)/2:75$16'8&(538/6(6*$/(/(&7521,&6,17(51$7,21$/
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
ϭ ,K>^/E^W/E'dKDd,E'/E^K>d^͘
Ϯ ,K>^/E^W/E'dKDd,&h>&>KtdZE^hZ͘
ϯ dZE^hZ^,/>/^ZYh/ZKE>z/&&h>&>Kt/E/d/KE&/>^D/,<͘
Figure 4-38 Example Fuel Flow Transducer Installation

Rev. 14 Page 4-49
4.6.5.1 Fuel Flow EMI
NOTE
The installation of EI FT-60/90 fuel flow sensors must be checked for EMI in accordance
with the procedure defined in Section 6.7.
If the fuel flow gauge fluctuates during the EMI checkout procedure (refer to Section 6.7), an EI FT-60 or
EI FT-90 fuel flow sensor must be installed with shield bracket and wire overbraid. Refer to Figure 4-38
for the installation that illustrates how the fuel flow sensor cover plates are shielded by the bracket (7). The
overbraid must cover the unshielded portion of the sensor wiring and must be terminated such that the
overbraid is connected to the fuel flow sensor and the shielding of the wire. Refer to Figure 4-39 for
overbraid installation.
GEA 24
Total Length <6"
P243
FUEL XDCR +12V 1 24 RED Orientation
FUEL FLOW RX 23 WHT EI optional
FUEL FLOW GROUND 1 20 BLK FT-60/90
s
Terminate
overbraid to Bracket
Figure 4-39 Fuel Flow Overbraid
4.6.6 RPM
The GI 275 system can use the electrical signal generated by the primary magneto coils or “P-Lead” to
display RPM. Both magneto P-Lead signals, left and right, must be connected to the GEA 24(B). The
connection is made at the ignition switch if the magneto does not have a ring terminal stud; otherwise, the
connection can be made at the magneto or at the ignition switch, whichever minimizes the length of wire
required to connect the GEA 24(B). The wire length between the P-Lead connection and the resistors must
not exceed 6 inches. Shielded wires must be used as shown in Appendix B.
If the P-Lead on TCM/Bendix magnetos was used, torque the P-Lead nut between 15 and 17 in-lbf. If the
P-Lead on Slick magnetos was used, torque P-Lead nut between 13 and 15 in-lbf.
This STC only provides interface approval to magnetic pickup RPM sensors. It does not provide
installation approval for magnetic pickup sensors. For TCM/Bendix magnetos, the magnetic pickup must
be installed in the vent hole furthest from the distributor cap. Refer to Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 TCM/Bendix Magneto Vent Hole

Rev. 14 Page 4-50
For Slick magnetos, the magnetic pickup must be installed in the vent hole furthest from the distributor
cap. Refer to Figure 4-41.
Figure 4-41 Slick Magneto Vent Hole
Following the installation of the P-Lead signal wires, verify the continuity of each magneto P-Lead to
ground while the ignition key is off. If there is evidence of discontinuity in the magneto P-Lead grounding
circuit, it must be corrected before further engine maintenance or checks. Continuity can only be measured
if the magneto points are open or the wire is disconnected from the magneto. Use a magneto timing light to
ensure the ohmmeter will not measure false continuity through the points or coil windings.
CAUTION
Do not turn the propeller and stay clear of the propeller arc when installing the P-Lead
signal wires.
WARNING
The P-Lead sensor wiring must include the resistors as shown in Appendix B. The resistors
prevent magneto shut-off in the event of a shorted RPM P-Lead wire. The resistors must be
installed as close as practical to the P-lead connection, near either the magneto or the
ignition switch.
4.6.7 CHT, EGT, TIT Probes

Garmin stocks certain probes to simplify the EIS sensor ordering process. Sensor part numbers are cross-
referenced with Alcor STC SA522SW part numbers. The GI 275 STC does not provide installation
approval for CHT, EGT, and TIT probes; however, the data in STC SA522SW is adequate for many
installations.

Rev. 14 Page 4-51
4.7 Remote Aircraft Status Relay Installation
Relays are required if a GDL 60 is installed and the Remote Aircraft Status (RAS) feature is desired. The
quantity of relays required depends on the aircraft electrical system architectures, as shown in Figure B-15.
RAS 1 relay must be installed adjacent to the battery. For other relays (RAS 2 and on), it is recommended
install them at the circuit breaker panel or in vicinity of the circuit breaker panel. Installation in a location
which exposes the relays directly to outside environment is not permitted.
When drilling new fastener holes for the relay bracket, avoid drilling new fastener holes on fatigue-critical
structures (e.g., wing and empennage structures) or pressurized fuselage (i.e. pressurized bulkheads,
frames and skin).
When drilling new fastener holes on an existing platform for the relay bracket, the new holes must
maintain 2D edge distance (D is the fastener diameter) and 3D distance from existing holes.
Before installing the relay bracket, apply a chemical conversion coating per aircraft structure repair manual
or SAE ARP 1870 Section 5.1. Priming of the relay bracket is optional. If primer is applied, prime the
relay bracket per aircraft structural repair manual.
The relay bracket shall be electrically bonded. The electrical bond shall achieve direct current (DC)
resistance of 2.5 milliohms or less between bracket faying surface and aircraft structure. Electrical bonding
is achieved through the fasteners as follows:
• If using screw/nuts/washers, use cadmium plated steel hardware and ensure the area underneath
each hardware is burnished a minimum of 1/4 inch greater than the hardware diameter. The surface
preparation shall be per SAE ARP 1870, Section 5.
• If using rivets, a minimum of three rivets shall be installed per aircraft structural repair manual.
Relays/sockets approved for installation are listed in Section 3.1.2.
4.7.1 Relay Installation Examples

Example 10A relay brackets are shown in Figure 4-42. Example 5A relay brackets are shown in
Figure 4-43. The bracket can be either flat or L-angle. The bracket can be fabricated from 6061-T6 or
2024-T3 aluminum, min 0.032 inch thick. Fabrication methods, techniques, and practices provided by
aircraft structural repair manual or standard practices defined in advisory circular AC43.13-1B, Aircraft
Inspection and Repair, are acceptable.
2.00
1.406
2.00
1.110
Ø0.20 BOTTOM MOUNT
Ø0.112 TOP MOUNT 0.032 0.032
1.25
1.56
0.56 0.75 R0.16 0.75
R0.05
0.31
1.38
Ø0.13
R0.20 1.38 TWO
PLACES
0.31
0.75
Ø0.13
TWO
PLACES
Figure 4-42 10A Relay Bracket Examples

Rev. 14 Page 4-52
1.50
1.075
1.50
Ø0.164 BOTTOM MOUNT
0.880
Ø0.112 TOP MOUNT
0.032 0.032
1.25
0.425 1.56
0.75 R0.16 0.75
0.31
0.88
Ø0.13
R0.20 0.88 TWO
PLACES
0.31
0.75
Ø0.13
TWO
PLACES
Figure 4-43 5A Relay Bracket Examples
If more than one relay is required, the relay bracket can be extended to house multiple relays. Examples of
multiple relay brackets are shown in Figure 4-44.
MAX SPACING 3.0

0.31
Figure 4-44 Multiple Relay Bracket Examples

Rev. 14 Page 4-53
4.8 Weight and Balance
The aircraft weight and balance record must be updated after the GI 275 system is installed by following
the procedures typically detailed in Section 8 of the aircraft maintenance manual. Practices defined in
Chapter 10, Section 2, Weighing Procedures, of AC 43.13-1B Aircraft Inspection and Repair are
acceptable.
The aircraft Equipment List must be updated to include items that are added, removed, or relocated. The
updated list must be dated, include the name (and certificate number) of the person that updated the list,
and be retained with aircraft records.

Rev. 14 Page 4-54
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 System Configuration Preparation....................................................................................................5-3

5.1.1 Entering Configuration Mode ....................................................................................................5-4
5.2 Software / Configuration ..................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.1 Loader Card................................................................................................................................5-5
5.2.2 Config Options ...........................................................................................................................5-6
5.3 Unit Type ..........................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.1 Unit ID........................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.2 System ID Source.......................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.3 Airframe Type ............................................................................................................................5-8
5.3.4 Unit Configuration .....................................................................................................................5-8
5.4 Feature Enable ..................................................................................................................................5-9
5.5 Interfaces.........................................................................................................................................5-10
5.5.1 GI 275s Installed ......................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.2 Wireless....................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.3 ADC .........................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.4 AHRS .......................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.5 GPS...........................................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.6 VFR GPS..................................................................................................................................5-13
5.5.7 NAV .........................................................................................................................................5-13
5.5.8 Radar Altimeter ........................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.9 Autopilot...................................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.10 AHRS Emulation......................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.11 Transponder..............................................................................................................................5-14
5.5.12 EIS ............................................................................................................................................5-15
5.5.13 Traffic.......................................................................................................................................5-16
5.5.14 GDL 60.....................................................................................................................................5-17
5.5.15 GDL 69.....................................................................................................................................5-18
5.5.16 Stormscope ...............................................................................................................................5-18
5.5.17 PFD Sync..................................................................................................................................5-18
5.5.18 General Purpose Discrete In.....................................................................................................5-18
5.5.19 General Purpose Discrete Out ..................................................................................................5-18
5.5.20 General Purpose ARINC 429 (A429) Out ...............................................................................5-19
5.5.21 General Purpose RS-232 Out ...................................................................................................5-19
5.5.22 Airspeed Switches ....................................................................................................................5-19
5.6 Setup ...............................................................................................................................................5-20
5.6.1 Lighting ....................................................................................................................................5-20
5.6.2 Page Configuration...................................................................................................................5-28
5.6.3 Audio Alert Config...................................................................................................................5-31
5.6.4 Terrain/TAWS..........................................................................................................................5-31
5.6.5 Miscellaneous...........................................................................................................................5-32
5.6.6 Battery ......................................................................................................................................5-32
5.6.7 Ownship Icon Configuration....................................................................................................5-33
5.7 EIS ..................................................................................................................................................5-34
5.7.1 Engine.......................................................................................................................................5-34
5.7.2 Sensors .....................................................................................................................................5-36
5.7.3 Pages.........................................................................................................................................5-39

Rev. 14 Page 5-1
5.7.4 Gauges......................................................................................................................................5-40
5.7.5 Fuel...........................................................................................................................................5-44
5.7.6 Diagnostics ...............................................................................................................................5-44
5.8 Calibration/Checks..........................................................................................................................5-45
5.8.1 Composite NAV Calibration....................................................................................................5-45
5.8.2 Backup Battery Test .................................................................................................................5-45
5.8.3 Fuel...........................................................................................................................................5-46
5.9 External Systems.............................................................................................................................5-50
5.9.1 Stormscope Config Status ........................................................................................................5-50
5.10 Diagnostics......................................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.1 VFR GPS..................................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.2 Backup Battery Status ..............................................................................................................5-51
5.10.3 HSDB Status ............................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.4 CAN Network ..........................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.5 Temp/Pwr Stats ........................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.6 Discrete Inputs..........................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.7 Discrete Outputs .......................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.8 Analog Inputs ...........................................................................................................................5-51
5.10.9 GDL69......................................................................................................................................5-52
5.10.10 ARINC 429 ..............................................................................................................................5-52
5.10.11 RS-232 .....................................................................................................................................5-52
5.10.12 RS-485 .....................................................................................................................................5-52
5.10.13 Clear Config.............................................................................................................................5-52
5.10.14 Factory Reset ...........................................................................................................................5-52
5.11 System Info .....................................................................................................................................5-53
5.11.1 Devices Online .........................................................................................................................5-53
5.11.2 Device Info...............................................................................................................................5-53
5.12 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................5-54
5.13 Restart Options ...............................................................................................................................5-55
5.14 Wireless Connectivity.....................................................................................................................5-56
5.15 Database Loading ...........................................................................................................................5-57
5.15.1 Automatic Database Updates ...................................................................................................5-57
5.15.2 Database Updates via USB ......................................................................................................5-58
5.15.3 Transferring Databases via Database Concierge (Wi-Fi) ........................................................5-58
5.15.4 GI 275 Databases .....................................................................................................................5-58
WARNING

Rev. 14 Page 5-2
5.1 System Configuration Preparation
Once all GI 275 components are installed in the aircraft, the system must be configured.
Due to the many different layout options of the GI 275, information contained in this section may not be
applicable to every installation. Follow the configuration flow shown in Figure 5-1. A summary of the
steps for system configuration and calibration follows:
1. Assign each GI 275 a unique Unit ID. This must be done prior to configuration of each unit.
2. Verify the GI 275 software level is current with this STC. If necessary, update the software in
accordance with Section 5.2.
3. Configure the GI 275 for the particular installation, as specified in Section 5.2 through Section 5.9.
This includes:
a. Setting the airframe-specific parameters.
b. Configuring interfaces to external systems.
4. Perform necessary system calibrations, as specified in Section 5.8.
5. Load required and optional databases, as specified in Section 5.15.
6. Perform the ground checks applicable to the installation, beginning in Section 6.2.
7. Verify all placards have been relocated, as specified in Section 6.6.
8. Perform the flight checks specified in Section 6.8.
9. Update the aircraft documentation, as specified in Section 6.9.
Figure 5-1 System Configuration Flow

Rev. 14 Page 5-3
5.1.1 Entering Configuration Mode
The Configuration mode of the GI 275 can be accessed by holding down the inner knob, located at the
bottom-left of the unit, upon initial power-up. The knob must be held until the Garmin logo with
“Configuration Mode” below it appears. For installations with multiple GI 275s, all other units can be
easily powered on in Configuration mode by navigating to the Restart Options page from the
Configuration mode home page on one unit and touching the Restart All to Config button.
Figure 5-2 Entering the Configuration Menu
NOTE
When making configuration selections on the GI 275, in many cases, there is no dedicated
Enter selection. The selections made are confirmed by touching the Back button to exit the
particular screen/page.
NOTE
When powering on the GI 275 in Configuration mode for the first time, a Unit ID must be
assigned before any configuration settings can be changed. Refer to Section 5.3.1.

Rev. 14 Page 5-4
5.2 Software / Configuration
The SW/Config page is used to update the software for the GI 275 and any LRUs directly interfaced to the
GI 275. The approved software version and part numbers can be found in the most recent revision of
GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Equipment List (P/N 005-01208-42). The Unit ID must be properly configured
prior to loading software to the GI 275. After loading software to the GI 275, configure all interfaced
LRUs.
NOTE
When connecting a USB drive to the GI 275 (whether via USB dongle or GSB 15), ensure that
the USB icon appears on the left side of the display before proceeding. If the icon doesn’t
appear after 1 minute, remove the drive, re-insert it, and wait for the icon to appear.
5.2.1 Loader Card

Software updates for the GI 275 and GEA 24(B) can be accomplished via USB using the following
procedure:
1. Create a Software Loader Card using the latest software and instructions available on
flyGarmin.com.
2. Power on all GI 275s in the system in Configuration mode.
3. Insert the USB drive into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if installed).
4. Navigate to the Loader Card page (SW/Config → Loader Card).
5. Select the applicable updates or touch the Select All button.
6. Touch Update Packages ( ) and then Begin Update. A restart is required when completed.
Figure 5-3 Software Update

Rev. 14 Page 5-5
5.2.2 Config Options
5.2.2.1 GFC 500 Manifest
Not configured per this manual.
5.2.2.2 Summary
A configuration summary can be saved to a USB drive by touching the Save Summary button. The file
will detail configuration settings for all GI 275s in the system and can be viewed on a computer web
browser.
NOTE
Files will be saved to a “aircraft_cfg” folder on the USB drive.
5.2.2.3 Import Configuration

Configuration settings can be imported via USB using the following procedure:
1. Power on the GI 275 and all LRUs in the system in Configuration mode.
NOTE
Unit ID must be set before importing configuration. Refer to Section 5.3.1.
2. Insert the USB drive containing the configuration files into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if
installed).
3. Navigate to SW/Config → Config Options.
4. Touch the Import Configuration button.
5. Touch the Select Files button and select the configuration file to be imported.
6. Touch the Select Configuration button.
7. Select the applicable configurations and then touch the Back button.
8. Touch the Import Config ( ) button and then touch the Start button.
5.2.2.4 Export Config

Configuration settings can be exported via USB using the following procedure:
1. Power the GI 275 and all LRUs in the system on in Configuration mode.
2. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or GSB 15 (if installed).
3. Navigate to SW/Config → Config Options.
4. Touch the Export Configuration button.
5. Touch the Select Name button and enter a name for the saved file.
6. Touch the Export Config button.
NOTE
Files will be saved to a “aircraft_cfg” folder on the USB drive.

Rev. 14 Page 5-6
5.3 Unit Type
The Unit Type page is used to configure the GI 275 unit as a specific type of display. This includes
Unit ID, System ID, Airframe Type, and Unit Configuration.
5.3.1 Unit ID
CAUTION
Failure to follow the procedure to set Unit ID before performing any other configuration
steps may result in configuration errors or configuration settings being overwritten by
another display. Unit IDs must be unique for each unit in the system.
A Unit ID must be assigned to each installed GI 275 prior to configuring the function of each unit.
• Unit ID – A unique ID number between 1 – 6 for each GI 275 installed in the system. Unit ID is
set to a blank default at the factory and must be manually set. For a single GI 275 installation, set
the ID to GI 1. The unit assigned GI 1 should also be set as the Master display (refer to Section
5.3.2). Each Unit ID must be unique and set using the following procedure:
When the GI 275 is powered on in Configuration mode for the first time (or after configuration settings are
cleared), it will automatically prompt the user to assign a Unit ID. This cannot be skipped.
Alternatively, the Unit ID can be configured by following the steps:
1. Verify all GI 275 units are powered off.
2. Power up a single GI 275 in Configuration mode, as described in Section 5.1.1.
3. From the home page, touch Unit Type → Unit ID → LRU and select a unique Unit ID between
1 and 6.
4. Touch Restart to apply the assignment.
5. Power down the display (do not power back on at this time).
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for the remaining installed GI 275s.
7. When all Unit ID assignments have been made, power up all displays in Configuration mode
before moving to the next configuration steps. The Unit ID assigned to each display is shown on
the left side of the display on the Configuration mode home page or on the Unit Type page.
CAUTION
For installations with more than one GI 275, all configuration settings made after the steps in
Section 5.3.1 must be done with all displays powered on and in Configuration mode.
CAUTION
Once all GI 275s have been configured, the Unit ID should not be changed. Doing so will
result in a loss of configuration settings.

Rev. 14 Page 5-7
5.3.2 System ID Source
The System ID Source page is used to set a GI 275 unit as the Master, which will generate the System ID
for the whole GI 275 system (generally, GI 1 is designated the Master). To set a GI 275 as the Master,
touch the Master button and select Yes to confirm the change. The System ID will be displayed below the
button.
CAUTION
Changing the designated Master display will change the GI 275 System ID. This will
cause any previously unlocked features and installed databases to become unavailable.
New feature unlocks will be required for the new System ID. Databases will also have to
be re-installed; a new subscription may be required for some databases.
NOTE
Feature unlocks and databases will not become unavailable until the system is rebooted
after the designation is changed.
5.3.3 Airframe Type

The Airframe Type page is used to configure the GI 275 for a Fixed Wing or Rotorcraft installation. Set
Airframe Type to Fixed Wing per this STC.
5.3.4 Unit Configuration

Instrument Type
NOTE
Verify that installation specifications for the instrument type are followed as described in
Section 4.3.
After the Unit ID has been selected, configure the instrument type. Refer to Section 5.6.2 for available
page configurations for each indicator/display type. To set the instrument type, touch the Instrument Type
button and then select the desired indicator/display. The options are:
• MFD
• EIS
Unit Location
Select the location of the display installation. Selections are:
• Pilot
• Co-Pilot
NOTE
When configured for Co-Pilot unit selection, the output of Baro correction is suppressed.

Rev. 14 Page 5-8
5.4 Feature Enable
The GI 275 system capabilities can be further enhanced by feature enablement options.
Follow these procedures to enable an applicable feature:
1. Obtain the System ID (alphanumeric).
a. In Configuration mode, navigate to the System ID Source page (Unit Type → System ID
Source).
b. In Normal mode, open the menu, touch System, then touch Info.
2. Log in to the associated flyGarmin.com account.
3. Select the GI 275 feature and enter the System ID to download the enablement to a USB drive.
4. Power on all GI 275s in Configuration mode.
5. Insert the USB drive into the USB pigtail or GSB 15 (if installed).
NOTE
When connecting a USB drive to the GI 275 (whether via USB dongle or GSB 15), ensure
that the USB icon appears on the left side of the display before proceeding. If the icon
doesn’t appear after 1 minute, remove the drive, re-insert it, and wait for the icon to appear.
6. On the display connected to the USB drive, navigate to the Features page by touching the Feature
Enable button.
7. Touch the applicable feature button to enable the feature (it will be illuminated green).
8. A system message will appear alerting the user that the feature has been enabled.
9. Restart all GI 275s for the enablement to take effect.

Rev. 14 Page 5-9
5.5 Interfaces
This section specifies the configuration and setup of the GI 275 in order to interface to all required and
optional equipment allowed by this AML STC. Each display must be individually configured to match all
applicable interconnects (refer to Appendix B) that define each display as either an MFD or EIS display.
The Interfaces page allows the GI 275 display to be configured to interface to LRUs installed as part of the
GI 275 system as well as previously installed equipment that is approved to interface to the GI 275 under
this STC. Refer to Appendix C for equipment compatibility.
The configuration for a particular display will vary based on the Instrument Type (MFD or EIS) and
number and type of other GI 275s in the system.
Each installed display must be individually configured based on the interfaced equipment.
Depending on the interface that is selected, further actions may be required by selecting the setting, as
shown in Figure 5-4, and configuring them appropriately. Some selections may be grayed out until a
preceding selection has been configured.
Figure 5-4 Interface and Ports/Config Selections
The configuration tables in this section show available interface options as well as available ports. The port
assignments must be made to match the aircraft wiring.
NOTE
The port availability at each LRU configuration will vary depending on previous
configuration actions. If a port was previously configured for another LRU, then that port
will be grayed out and not available for selection.
NOTE
Interfaces not shown in the following tables are not approved per this STC.

Rev. 14 Page 5-10
5.5.1 GI 275s Installed
The GI 275s Installed page is used to identify which GI 275s are installed as part of the system, allowing
data to be crossfilled between units via HSDB.
Verify the following for each installed GI 275:
• The Unit ID must be set and must be unique, as described in Section 5.3.1.
• The the current assigned Unit ID for each display is denoted on the GI 275s Installed page by a
grayed out selection.
Perform the following steps to configure the GI 275 system:
2. Navigate to the GI 275s Installed page (Interfaces → GI 275s Installed).
3. Select the Unit ID for each GI 275 in the system.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 on each GI 275 unit.
5. Once each unit’s GI 275s Installed page has been configured, navigate to the Devices Online page
(System Info → Devices Online).
6. Ensure each Unit ID in the system shows a green square.
5.5.2 Wireless
The Wireless page allows you to connect the GI 275 unit to a Bluetooth connection or to generate a Wi-Fi
signal. Refer to Section 5.14 or GI 275 Pilot’s Guide for more information on wireless functionality.
The Wi-Fi functionality should only be enabled on one Garmin LRU at a time.
5.5.3 ADC
5.5.4 AHRS

Rev. 14 Page 5-11
5.5.5 GPS
Configure each GI 275 for a GPS source for GPS 1 and GPS 2 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1 GPS Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Ports/Config - Settings
GPS Interface Notes
Port Number Speed
GTN 625/635/650
GTN 6XX
GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi
GTN 725/750
GTN 7XX
GTN 725Xi/750Xi
A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
GPS 400W /
GNC 420W / GNS 4XXW A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 High
GNS 430W RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
GPS 500W / GNS 530W GNS 5XXW A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 High
RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
GNS 480 GNS 480 A429 OUT 1 Thru 2 High
RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
GPS 175 GPS 175
GNX 375 GNX 375
GTX 3X5 GTX 3X5 RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2
Other GI 275 Other GI 275
GNC 355 GNC 355
Generic MapMX MAPMX RS-232 RX 1 Thru 2 [1]
Notes:
[1] The Generic MAPMX GPS format may be used for Garmin GNS 4XXW/5XXW and
GNS 480 interfaces if there are not enough data ports. This interface only requires
RS-232 and provides the GI 275 with GPS position for moving map and AHRS aiding.
TAWS Installations
If a single TAWS-equipped GTN 6XX/7XX, GTN Xi, or GNS 500W unit is installed, it must be
configured as GPS 1. Only TAWS annunciations from GPS 1 are displayed on the GI 275.
GNS 400W/500W Series and GNS 480 Installations

In dual GNS installations, the ARINC 429 OUT port selection is configured the same for both GPS 1 and
GPS 2. The GPS 2 ARINC 429 OUT port is automatically set based on the port selection made on GPS 1,
or vice versa. Changing the port selection on one will automatically change it on the other. Set the
remaining ports for both per the associated aircraft wiring diagram.

Rev. 14 Page 5-12
5.5.6 VFR GPS
The VFR GPS antenna must be installed to enable the VFR GPS per this STC. Set VFR GPS to Internal if
the antenna is directly connected to the unit. Otherwise, set to Other GI 275 if installed on another GI 275.
The built-in VFR GPS is only approved for VFR navigation.
5.5.7 NAV
Configure each GI 275 for a NAV source for NAV 1 or NAV 2 (if equipped) per the settings in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 NAV Interfaces and Configuration Settings

NAV Interface Notes
Port Number Speed
Garmin GTN 650
GTN 650 [1]
Garmin GTN 650Xi
Garmin GTN 750
GTN 750 [1]
Garmin GTN 750Xi
Garmin GNS 430W/530W GNS 430/530 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
Garmin GNS 480 GNS 480 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
Garmin GNC 255 GNC 255 RS-232 RX/TX 1 Thru 2
Garmin SL 30 SL 30 RS-232 RX/TX 1 Thru 2
Collins VIR-32/33
Discrete In
Honeywell KN-53/KX-155/ Composite ILS Energize 1 Thru 4
Lo
KX-155A/KX-165/KX-165A
NAV from other GI 275 Other GI 275
Notes:
[1] If Course Selection is disabled, configure CRS A429 port and speed.
Course Selection
Disabling Course Selection allows the GI 275 to slave to the Selected Course from an external source. Set
the Course Selection to Disabled when an external system is providing the primary Selected Course data.
Set the Course Selection to Enabled when the GI 275 is the primary source for selected course data. The
Pilot Control configuration setting for Course Selection is not currently approved under this STC.

Rev. 14 Page 5-13
5.5.8 Radar Altimeter
Configure the Radar Altimeter per the settings in Table 5-3.
Table 5-3 RAD ALT Interfaces and Configuration Settings

Radar Altimeter Interface
Port Number Speed
Garmin
GRA 55/5500 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
GRA 55/5500
Collins A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
RAC 870
RAC 870 Rad Alt Test Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Free Flight
RA 4500 A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
RA 4500
Honeywell A429 IN 1 Thru 4 Low
KRA 405B
KRA 405B Rad Alt Test Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Rad Alt from other
Other GI 275
GI 275
5.5.9 Autopilot
5.5.10 AHRS Emulation

5.5.11 Transponder
Configure the available interfaces for Transponder 1 and Transponder 2 per Table 5-4 to provide the
Transponder Control page. Only the GTX 345 series transponder is compatible for the Transponder
Control feature. Refer to the GTX 345 Installation Manual for configuration details for the GTX 345 unit.
Table 5-4 Transponder Configuration Settings

Transponder Interface Ports/Config - Settings
Mode 1 Code 4 Digit
Garmin GTX 345 GTX 345
VFR Code Recall Enabled/Disabled [1]
Notes:
[1] With VFR Code Recall enabled, touching the VFR button on the XPDR page in Normal
mode a second time will revert to the previously entered code.

Rev. 14 Page 5-14
5.5.12 EIS
Configure the EIS per the settings for EIS 1 or EIS 2 (if equipped) in Table 5-5. For twin-engine EIS, EIS 1
must be configured as left or front engine and EIS 2 must be configured as right or rear engine.
For twin-engine EIS, the first GI 275 display should have EIS 1 configured according to Table 5-5 and EIS
2 configured as Other GI 275. The second GI 275 display should have EIS 1 configured as Other GI 275
and EIS 2 configured according to Table 5-5.
Table 5-5 EIS/GEA Configuration Settings

EIS Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
RS-232 1 Thru 2
GEA 24(B) GEA 24
Annunciations [1]
EIS from
Other GI 275 Annunciations [1]
other GI 275
Notes:
[1] Annunciations are required if the GI 275 EIS is installed outside of 35° of the centerline. Refer to
Section 4.3.3 for installation information. Refer to Table 5-6 for configuration settings.
5.5.12.1 Engine Annunciator

Configure the Engine Annunciator Interface per the settings in Table 5-6. In multi-engine aircraft and in
single-engine aircraft with two EIS displays, only configure the annunciator discretes on EIS 1. Configure
the annunciator discretes on EIS 2 as None.
Table 5-6 Engine Annunciator Configuration Settings

Aircraft
Engine Annunciator Engine Caution Engine Warning
System
LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6
28V
MS25041 Discrete Out Lo Discrete Out Lo
95-40-17-B4-E1WPN 1 Thru 9 1 Thru 9
14V
MS25041

Rev. 14 Page 5-15
5.5.13 Traffic
Configure the available Traffic interface to match the particular installation per Table 5-7. Refer to the
appropriate Garmin ADS-B STC installation manual for more information on installation and
configuration requirements for systems with multiple traffic systems. When configuring the traffic
interface, first select the type of traffic system installed. Then select the appropriate interface and configure
per the settings in Table 5-7.
Table 5-7 Traffic System Configuration Settings

Traffic Interface
Type Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Source (Type)
Traffic from Active
other Traffic/ Other GI 275
GI 275 TIS-A
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
L-3
Active Discrete
Avionics SKY497 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic Control Traffic Out Lo
SKY497
Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
L-3
Active Discrete
Avionics SKY899 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Traffic Control Traffic Out Lo
SKY899
Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
L-3 De-select
Avionics Active SKY899 Discrete
SKY899 Traffic TCAS I TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Control Traffic Out Lo
TCAS I Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
Bendix/King De-select
Honeywell Active KTA 870/ Discrete
KTA 870 Traffic KMH 820 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
KMH 820 Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
Bendix/King De-select
Honeywell Active KTA 970/ Discrete
KTA 970 Traffic KMH 920 TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
KMH 920 Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo

Rev. 14 Page 5-16
Traffic Interface
Type Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Source (Type)
GTS (HSDB)
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
De-select
Active
Traffic GTS 8XX Discrete
GTS 8XX TAS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
(A429) Control Traffic Out Lo
Select
Discrete
TAS TEST 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
ADS-B GTS ADS-B
Avidyne
(Ryan) Active TAS 6XX/
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
TAS 6XX/ Traffic TCAD
TCAD
GTX 345 ADS-B GTX 345 Active Traffic TAS/TCAS
GNX 375 ADS-B GNX 375
A429 IN [1] 1 Thru 4
GTX 33X TIS-A GTX 33X Discrete
TIS STBY/ON 1 Thru 9
Out Lo
Notes:
[1] Refer to Section 5.5.20 to configure the ARINC 429 OUT port to provide data to the traffic
system, if applicable.
5.5.14 GDL 60
Configure the data link interface per the settings in Table 5-8.
Table 5-8 GDL 60 Configuration Settings

Data Link Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers Notes
HSDB Port 1-2
GDL 60 GDL 60 Connected to [1]
Other LRU
Notes:
[1] Select the appropriate HSDB port if directly connected to the configured GI 275 unit.
Select Other LRU if the configured GI 275 is connected to the GDL 60 via another LRU. If
Remote Aircraft Status is desired, the GDL 60 must be directly connected to the GI 275
EIS unit.

Rev. 14 Page 5-17
5.5.15 GDL 69
Configure the data link interface per the settings in Table 5-9.
Table 5-9 GDL 69 Configuration Settings

Data Link Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers Notes
GDL 69/69A GDL 69 [1]
SXM GDL 69A [1] [2]
Notes:
[1] The GI 275 will only display data from the GDL 69/69A SXM. Another LRU must be used
to configure the GDL 69/69A SXM. Refer to GDL 69/69A Installation Manual (P/N 190-
00355-02) for more information.
[2] If a GDL 69A SXM is installed, it is permissible to configure it as a GDL 69. In this case,
the XM weather from the GDL 69A SXM will be displayed on the GI 275 MFD, but no
audio control will be available on the display.
[3] Only second generation GDL 69/69A SXM models are compatible with the GI 275.
5.5.16 Stormscope
Configure the Stormscope interface per the settings in Table 5-10.
Table 5-10 Stormscope Configuration Settings

Stormscope Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
WX-500 WX-500 RS-232 RX 1 Thru 3
Wired to other
Other GI 275
GI 275
5.5.17 PFD Sync

5.5.18 General Purpose Discrete In

Configure the General Purpose Discrete In ports and speeds per the settings in Table 5-11.
Table 5-11 General Purpose Discrete In Settings

General Purpose Discrete In Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Discrete In Audio Inhibit Discrete In Lo 1 Thru 6
5.5.19 General Purpose Discrete Out

Configure the General Purpose Discrete Out ports and speeds per the settings in Table 5-12.
Table 5-12 General Purpose Discrete Out Settings

General Purpose Discrete Out Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
On Ground
Discrete Out Discrete Out Lo 1 Thru 9
Terrain Aud Actv

Rev. 14 Page 5-18
5.5.20 General Purpose ARINC 429 (A429) Out
Configure the General Purpose ARINC 429 port(s) and speeds per the settings in Table 5-13. The A429
Out from the GI 275 may be provided to the following LRUs. Refer to Appendix C for required
information on each LRU settings.
Table 5-13 General Purpose A429 Output Settings

General Purpose A429 Out Interface Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers
Low
General Purpose 1 #1 1 Thru 2
High
Low
High
A429 Out Present
Low
High
Low
High
Notes:
• GTX 33/330/335/345 - GP 1 A429 Low Speed OR GP 2 A429 Low Speed.
• GTS 8XX - GP 1 A429 Low Speed or High Speed.
• TAS 6XX/9900BX - GP 1 A429 Low Speed or High Speed.
• TRC 497/899 - GP 1 A429 Low Speed OR GP 2 A429 Low Speed.
• KTA 810/910, KMH 820/920 - GP 2 A429 Low Speed AND Integrated AHRS/ADAHRS High
Speed OR GP2 A429 High Speed.
• ART 2000/2100 - GP 2 A429 High Speed OR Integrated AHRS/ADAHRS High Speed.
5.5.21 General Purpose RS-232 Out

Configure the General Purpose serial port per the settings in Table 5-14.
Table 5-14 General Purpose Serial Port Setting

General Purpose RS-232 Out Ports/Config - Settings Port Numbers Notes
Altitude Format 3 RS-232 Out 1 Thru 3
5.5.22 Airspeed Switches

These settings are not approved per this STC.

Rev. 14 Page 5-19
5.6 Setup
This section describes the setup for lighting, page configuration, audio alerts, Terrain/TAWS, backup
battery, and other miscellaneous settings. Ensure all interfaces necessary in Section 5.5 have been
successfully configured prior to continuing with setup. Some pages contained in this section may not be
applicable to every installation or may not be available.
5.6.1 Lighting
This section outlines the preferred method for configuring the GI 275 lighting in the aircraft. The GI 275
STC allows display/knob lighting control with or without the Enhanced Lighting mode selection. The
Enhanced Lighting mode allows a more customized lighting curve.
Configure Day Mode Curve is the only setting available for configuration when Enhanced Lighting mode
is selected. Figure 5-5 shows the Lighting page.
NOTE
All lighting conditions must be considered when configuring the display for photocell only. If the
aircraft is equipped with an instrument panel flood or wash lighting, the installation must be
evaluated to verify the flood/wash lighting does not affect the GI 275 lighting level. If the display
lighting level is adversely affected by the flood/wash lighting, then the GI 275 must be connected
to a lighting bus to control the display brightness.
Figure 5-5 Lighting Page
To accurately configure the lighting, the ability to adjust ambient light conditions is required. The installer
must have the means to simulate complete darkness in the cockpit. Simply covering the photocells may not
allow the installer’s eye to properly judge whether the display brightness is too bright or too dim for night
use.
The following tables must be used for lighting configuration:
• Table 5-16 - Photocell for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode de-selected).
• Table 5-17 - Lighting bus for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode de-selected).
• Table 5-18 - Photocell for display/knob (Enhanced Lighting mode selected).
• Table 5-19 - Lighting Bus for display (Enhanced Lighting mode selected).
• Table 5-20 - Lighting Bus for knob (Enhanced Lighting mode selected).

Rev. 14 Page 5-20
Due to the complicated nature of configuring the Enhanced Lighting mode, Table 5-15 provides suggested
settings as a starting point for lighting curve configuration. Other user-defined curves can be used, as well
as modifying these values to better match the overall cockpit lighting scheme and installation.
Table 5-15 Example of Enhanced Lighting Mode Curve Configuration

Setting Value Setting Value
Vertex 1 20.0, 0.1 Max Level 100.00%
Vertex 2 50.0, 2.0 Min Level 0.10%
Vertex 3 70.0, 5.0 Transition 5.00%
Vertex 4 80.0, 100.0
Photocell Configuration - Enhanced Lighting De-selected

The Display Lighting and the Knob Lighting curves must be set individually as noted per Table 5-16.
Table 5-16 Photocell Configuration Procedure

Photocell Curve
Step
Display Knob
Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the source Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the source
1
for Display Source. for Knob Source.
Under the Photocell Configuration, set the Photocell - Response Time to a low level (e.g., 2 sec) to allow the
2
display to adjust more quickly to light conditions.
Touch Lighting Curve Configure and then Knob
Touch Lighting Curve Configure and then Display
Lighting. It is recommended to start configuration
Lighting. It is recommended to start configuration
3 with a Slope of 50%. This can be done by selecting
with a Slope of 50%. This can be done by selecting
Slope and entering the value (similar to Figure 5-6 for
Slope and entering the value (refer to Figure 5-6).
display lighting).
4 Turn on all instrument panel and cockpit lighting.
Minimize photocell input levels by simulating night conditions in the cockpit. Complete steps 6 - 11 with the
5
goal of achieving consistency between all cockpit lighting.
If the display is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or If the keys are too bright, lower the Min Level and/or
6 adjust the lighting Slope to achieve the desired adjust the lighting Slope to achieve the desired
brightness. brightness.
If the display is not bright enough, raise the Min Level If the keys are not bright enough, raise the Min Level
7
to the desired brightness. to the desired brightness.
8 Simulate direct maximum sunlight in the cockpit.
Verify that the display produces maximum brightness Adjust the Cutoff percentage as shown in
9 on the backlight output level. Adjust Max Level if Figure 5-7, such that the key backlighting is switched
needed. off in bright light.
10 Simulate average sunlight conditions/average input conditions in the cockpit (average Source Input Level%).
If the display is too bright or too dim, vary the Slope If the key is too bright or too dim, vary the Slope
11 and/or Offset percentage to achieve desired and/or Offset percentage to achieve desired
brightness at mid-range lighting input levels. brightness at mid-range lighting input levels.
Verify that the lighting Slope, Offset, and Min Level still maintain the low-light visibility requirements achieved
12
in previous steps. Repeat any steps necessary to re-adjust night lighting settings.
13 Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness, as required.
14 Verify that adjustments made in the preceding steps are appropriate for all expected lighting conditions.

Rev. 14 Page 5-21
Figure 5-6 Lighting Curve Slope Configuration
Figure 5-7 Cutoff Percentage Configuration

Rev. 14 Page 5-22
Lighting Bus Configuration - Enhanced Lighting De-selected
The Display Lighting and the Knob Lighting curves must be set individually as noted in Table 5-17.
Table 5-17 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure

Lighting Bus Curve
Step
Display Knob
Under Source Selection, set Lighting Bus as the Under Source Selection, set Lighting Bus as the
1
source for Display Source. source for Knob Source.
Under Lightning Bus Configuration, set the Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage and the
2 Response Time to a low level (e.g., 0 sec) to allow the display to adjust more quickly to dimmer bus input
changes.
Follow steps 4 - 12 to achieve consistency between all cockpit lighting. Figure 5-8 shows the primary settings
3
on both the display lighting and the keys lighting curves.
4 Simulate night conditions in the cockpit.
Touch Lighting Curve Configuration and then Touch Lighting Curve Configuration and then
5
Display Lighting. Knob Lighting.
Set the Transition to 5%. Below this source input
value, the photocell will override the dimmer bus for
6 display backlighting control.
NOTE: This also allows the photocell to function as a
backup in the event of a lighting bus failure.
Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting or
below the transition % value.
7 NOTE: Steps 7 - 9 and 11 will set the photocell Turn the dimmer bus knob to its minimum setting.
functionality when the lighting bus is below the
transition % value.
If the display is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or If the knob is too bright, lower the Min Level and/or
8
adjust the Slope to achieve the desired brightness. adjust the Slope to achieve the desired brightness.
If the display is too dim, increase the Min Level to If the knob is too dim, increase the Min Level to
9
achieve desired levels. achieve desired levels.
With the dimmer bus still off or below the transition %
With the dimmer bus still off, adjust the Offset such
10 value, adjust the Offset such that the display remains
that the bezel key remains visible.
readable.
Slowly move the dimmer bus knob towards its Slowly move the dimmer bus knob towards its
maximum setting. Observe the rate of change maximum setting. Observe the rate of change
between the display lighting, bezel key lighting, and between the display lighting, bezel key lighting, and
11
any other cockpit illuminated information over the full any other cockpit illuminated information over the full
range above transition % value of the dimmer bus. range of the dimmer bus. Adjust the Slope and/or
Adjust the Slope and/or Offset to obtain consistency. Offset to obtain consistency.
With the dimmer bus off, simulate direct sunlight
conditions in the cockpit. If the brightness is below
12
the desired level, adjust the Slope setting to achieve
maximum desired brightness.
Adjust the Response Time to smooth changes to brightness, as required. This can be done from the Lighting
13 Bus Configuration page (Setup → Lighting → Lighting Bus Configuration). You will need to save your
configuration when exiting the Lighting Curve Configuration page.
Verify that adjustments made in the preceding steps are appropriate and functional for all expected lighting
14
conditions.

Rev. 14 Page 5-23
Figure 5-8 Display Lighting (Left) and Knob Lighting (Right) Curves
Enhanced Lighting Mode Configuration

The Enhanced Lighting mode can be used to better control the display and knob lighting to match varying
lighting conditions. When the lighting bus is selected as the source for the display lighting control, a
backup photocell curve will be configured in the event of lighting bus failure.
Configure the Enhanced Lighting function using the instructions contained in Table 5-18, Table 5-19, and
Table 5-20.
Table 5-18 Photocell Configuration Procedure - Enhanced Lighting

Step Display Keys
1 Under Source Selection, set Photocell as the input source for both the Display Source and/or Keys Source.
2 Under Photocell Configuration, set the Response Time to a level between 2 - 7 seconds.
3 Touch Enhanced Lighting Mode on. The button should be highlighted green.
Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Knob Lighting
4 Day Mode and adjust the Cutoff percentage. This allows for
the key backlighting to be switched off in bright light.
5 Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can be
made progressively brighter for steps 6 and 7.
Under Lighting Curve Configuration → Display/Knob Lighting Day Mode, set the Min Level and
Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments can be made by selecting
6 Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-12). Seek consistency between all cockpit lighting.
NOTE: A vertex represents a specific output value based on a given input value, where the goal is to
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices
Set the remainder of the vertices while progressively introducing light to the interior of the aircraft. Set the
7 Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure the curve to such that the display reaches the
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well (refer
to Figure 5-9).

Rev. 14 Page 5-24
Figure 5-9 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Photocell
Display (Left) and Knob (Right)
Table 5-19 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Display)

Step Lighting Bus Day Mode Curve - Display
1 Under Source Selection, set Display Source to Lighting Bus.
Under Lightning Bus Configuration, set the Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage, and set
2
the Response Time to a value between 0 - 7 seconds.
Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Display Lighting Day Mode and set the Transition percentage
4 to 5% (refer to Figure 5-10). Below this set value, the display brightness will be controlled by the
photocell.
Set the dimmer knob to the off position. The Source Input level (%) must be below the transition point set
5
previously.
Touch the Curve button to change it to the Photocell Backup option (refer to Figure 5-11).
6 NOTE: The Max Level and the Min Level set in the next steps will also set the max and min levels for the
dimmer mode operation curve.
Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can
7
be made progressively brighter for steps 8 and 9.
Set the Min Level and Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments
can be made by selecting Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-12). Seek consistency
8 between all cockpit lighting.
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices.
9 Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure this curve to make sure the display reaches the
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well.
Touch the Curve button to change it to the Lighting Bus option (refer to Figure 5-11). This sets the curve
10
for the dimmer bus functionality.
11 Verify functionality of dimmer knob. Re-adjust Transition point if/as required.

Rev. 14 Page 5-25
Figure 5-10 Enhanced Lighting Mode Example Lighting Bus - Display
Figure 5-11 Selection Between Lighting Bus and Photocell Backup Curves

Rev. 14 Page 5-26
Table 5-20 Lighting Bus Configuration Procedure - Enhanced (Knob)
Step Lighting Bus Day Mode Curve - Knob
1 Under Source Selection, set Knob Source to Lighting Bus.
Set the Lighting Bus - Input Type to match the aircraft lighting bus voltage, and set the Response Time to
2
a value between 0 - 7 seconds.
4 Touch Lighting Curve Configuration → Knob Lighting Day Mode.
Simulate night conditions in the cockpit by using blankets or a similar method, such that the cockpit can
5
be made progressively brighter for steps 6 and 8.
Set the Min Level and Vertex 1 while the panel is experiencing night conditions. The level adjustments
can be made by selecting Vertex ( ) and changing the values (refer to Figure 5-12). Seek consistency
6 between all cockpit lighting.
customize the lighting curve by manipulating the vertices.
Max Level as desired. It is recommended to configure this curve to make sure the display reaches the
7
desired max output level (%) prior to 100% input. A linear curve for the photocell typically works well (refer
to Figure 5-12).
8 Verify functionality of dimmer knob. Re-adjust Transition point if/as required.
Figure 5-12 Vertex Adjustment Dialog Box
CAUTION
The display must be viewable under all anticipated lighting conditions, including:
• When the display is in direct sunlight.
• When the cockpit is bright but the photocell is in heavy shadow (such as flight into a
setting sun).
• When the cockpit is very dim, the display must not be excessively bright.

Rev. 14 Page 5-27
5.6.2 Page Configuration
The Page Config page contains options that determine which pages will display in Normal mode based on
the primary function(s) of the specific display as configured on the Unit Configuration page (refer to
Section 5.3.4). Refer to Section 5.6.2.3 for an example of each page displayed in Normal mode.
In Configuration mode, navigate to the Setup → Page Config page, as shown in Figure 5-13. Some
instrument types contain optional pages that can be toggled on and off or pages that can be rearranged.
Figure 5-13 Page Config Page - MFD (Left) and EIS (Right)
5.6.2.1 MFD Page Options

The MFD configuration contains configurable pages from 1 - 17. To configure a page as a certain function,
touch the Page ( ) button and select the desired page from the list. The GI 275 will automatically populate
the maximum number of pages based on the interfaced equipment. To limit the number of displayed pages
in Normal mode, configure unwanted pages to None.
• CDI page — Displays lateral and vertical deviations.
• Standard HSI page — Provides magnetically stabilized primary heading.
• Enhanced HSI page — Provides map underlay capable of displaying ownship on a moving map
with traffic and weather overlays.
• Traffic page [1] — Provides depiction of traffic (ADS-B, TIS-A, TCAS).
• SXM Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of SXM weather (with valid subscription).
• FIS-B Weather page [1] — Provides depiction of FIS-B weather.
• Stormscope page [1] — Provides depiction of lightning strikes.
• Terrain page — Provides depiction of terrain.
• Map page — Displays moving map with ownship icon.
• Gauges Main page [2] [3] — Displays required EIS gauges (Main EIS page in Normal mode).
• Gauges AUX page [2] [3] — Displays additional EIS gauges (AUX EIS page in Normal mode).
• CHT/EGT page [2] [3] — Displays a graph depicting cylinder head temperature and exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder.
• Fuel page [2] [3] — Displays additional fuel data.
• Summary page [2] — Displays supplementary EIS data, such as flight/engine timers and max
temperatures.
• MFD Data page — Displays configurable navigation information. Requires interface to external
navigator to populate information.
• Radio Altimeter page [1] — Displays altitude above terrain.
• Transponder page [1] [4] — Provides control and display of GTX 345 transponders.
Notes:
[1] Page only available when the GI 275 is interfaced to an applicable LRU.
[2] EIS pages only available when fully configured in accordance with Section 5.7.

Rev. 14 Page 5-28
[3] GI 275 MFDs must not display any EIS pages other than the Summary page in twin-
engine EIS installations or installations with more than one primary EIS display.
[4] The Transponder page must be set as the final page, if configured.
5.6.2.2 EIS Page Options

• Gauges Main page — Displays required EIS gauges (Main EIS page in Normal mode).
• Gauges AUX page — Displays additional EIS gauges (AUX EIS page in Normal mode).
• CHT/EGT page — Displays a graph depicting cylinder head temperature and exhaust gas
temperature for each cylinder.
• Fuel page — Displays additional fuel data.
• Summary page — Displays supplementary EIS data, such as flight/engine timers and max
temperatures.
5.6.2.3 GI 275 Normal Mode Page Options
MFD Data page CDI page Standard HSI page
Enhanced HSI page Traffic page SXM Weather page

Rev. 14 Page 5-29
FIS-B Weather page Stormscope page Terrain page
Map page Gauges Main page Gauges AUX page
CHT/EGT page Summary page Fuel page
Radar Altimeter page Transponder page

Figure 5-14 GI 275 Normal Mode Pages

Rev. 14 Page 5-30
5.6.3 Audio Alert Config
Audio Out
This determines which GI 275 unit will produce audio. Must be set to the unit with Terrain Alerting
enabled, if applicable. The default is GI 1.
Voice Type
This makes the selection between Male and Female voices for alerts. The default is Female.
Alert Volume
This sets the audio level. Audio alerts must be loud, attention-getting, and clearly intelligible under all
cockpit noise conditions. Audio alerts should be set slightly louder than the normal volume of COM and
intercom transmissions. The default is 50%.
Audio Test
This allows the testing of associated audio clips. Touch the icon on any/all annunciations to verify
volume audibility set in the previous step. Adjust the Alert Volume as desired to match audio levels of
other systems installed in the aircraft.
5.6.4 Terrain/TAWS
If the GI 275 system does not have TAWS B enabled, then configure the Terrain/TAWS for one of the
following options (Terrain-FLTA is automatically set if SVT is enabled):
Table 5-21 Terrain/TAWS Setting

External TAWS Terrain Mode
Terrain-FLTA
Not Installed
Terrain-Proximity (Off)
Installed (MapMX)
Installed (Other) External
Installed (HSDB)
The GI 275 is capable of producing aural and visual TAWS alerts. The alerting algorithm relaxes the
terrain alerting criteria at nearby airports. An airport is considered to be a “nearby airport” if the runways at
the airport meet certain criteria. Select the runway Surface Type and Minimum Length for the aircraft, as
described in Table 5-22.
Table 5-22 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data

Selection Description Notes
Required runway surface Set the type of runway surface for which the aircraft is
Runway Surface
type authorized.
Set the shortest distance required for takeoff and
Runway Minimum runway length for
landing (typically the distance given for sea level using
Min Length TAWS/Terrain Alerting
the coldest temperature given in the POH/AFM).

Rev. 14 Page 5-31
5.6.5 Miscellaneous
Traffic Color
Must be set to White. This color designates the base color for traffic targets.
Altitude Alerter
Database Sync
NOTE
For GI 275 software v2.60 or later, Database Sync with GTN 6XX/7XX units is not
supported. However, Database Sync with GTN Xi units is supported.
GI 275 and GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi units synchronize databases using Database Sync in order to
minimize user effort when loading/updating databases. The user only has to insert an SD card with
databases to be loaded into the GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi and the databases will be updated on all
connected LRUs for all displays with Database Sync enabled rather than having to update each unit
individually. The GI 275 system and GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi will have different system IDs. The
databases being synchronized must be enabled for both system IDs in order to allow the Database Sync to
take place. Refer to Section 5.2 for more information on acquiring and loading databases.
The following databases are synchronized:
• Airport directory
• Aviation
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• Basemap
The following databases are not synchronized:
• Terrain
Make the desired selection between Pilot Control and Disabled for Database Sync functionality. Selecting
Pilot Control enables Database Sync functionality.
CDI & BARO Side SYNC

With this setting enabled, changing the CDI source on the GI 275 will also change it on the other GI 275.
Choose from Always On or Pilot Control. The default is Pilot Control.
Outside Air Temp

This setting is not applicable for MFD and EIS installations.
5.6.6 Battery
This configures whether a backup battery is installed in the GI 275. The backup battery is optional. This
should only be enabled if the GI 275 backup battery is installed per Section 4.3.2.
When toggled from disabled to enabled (illuminated green), the GI 275 will trigger a requirement to
perform a Battery Rundown Test (refer to Section 5.8.2). Until this test is completed, the GI 275 will
produce an annunciation in Normal mode.

Rev. 14 Page 5-32
5.6.7 Ownship Icon Configuration
• Icon – Select one of the following appropriate icons to match the aircraft type:
◦ Low Wing Prop
◦ High Wing Prop
◦ Turboprop
◦ Twin Engine Prop
◦ Arrow
◦ Basic Aircraft
• Color – Select White as the display option.

Rev. 14 Page 5-33
5.7 EIS
This section provides data for the configuration of a GI 275 EIS. Prior to beginning EIS configuration, an
EIS data source (GEA 24(B)) must be configured via the Interfaces page, per the directions found in
Section 5.5.12. Refer to Section 2.1.3.1 for limitations and guidance on selection of engine adapter(s). The
GI 275 must be configured as either an EIS display or an MFD in order for the EIS page to be available.
There are six subsections of the EIS configuration. The subsections must be completed in the following
order:
1. Engine – Enter single- or multi-engine, number of cylinders, engine power settings, flight hours,
HOBBS hours, and Tach hours.
2. Sensors – Select the sensors that are installed in the aircraft for EIS 1 or EIS 2 (if applicable).
3. Pages – Configure Full Time Gauges, Full Time Extra Info, CHT/EGT page extra info, and lean
parameters.
4. Gauges – Configure the gauge markings and layout.
5. Fuel – Enter fuel tank specifications and fuel type, and perform a Quantity Calibration.
6. Diagnostics – View the status of the engine sensors and GEA.
The sections below outline the data required and the data entry procedure for the first three subsections.
Fuel Quantity Calibration is outlined in Section 5.8.3.1. Procedures begin assuming the GI 275 is powered
on in Configuration mode.
5.7.1 Engine
Configure the EIS as a Single- or Multi-engine system with a 4- or 6-cylinder engine depending on the
aircraft.
Set the Engine Power parameters for supplemental Percent Engine Power indication if desired. The
following items under Engine Power must be configured for engine power to be available:
• Maximum Rated Engine Horsepower.
• Maximum Manifold Pressure.
◦ If normally-aspirated, defaulted to 29.92 in-Hg.
• RPM at Maximum Rated Engine Horsepower.
• Verify configured RPM value type matches the display RPM type (i.e., engine RPM vs propeller
RPM).
• Minimum Brake Specific Fuel Consumption.
◦ Defaulted to 0.39 lb/hr/BHP.
NOTE
Minimum BSFC should not be changed from the default value unless an alternate value
can be identified in a specific installation’s engine operator’s manual. Some engine
operator’s manuals graphically depict minimum BSFC on engine performance curves.
Refer to the aircraft time meter(s), tachometer, and the aircraft records to ensure the times are entered in
the correct field and are accurate.
Flight Hours accumulate when the aircraft is in the air. The EIS will increment this value when the engine
exceeds 1250 RPM. HOBBS Hours accumulate when the engine is running and the oil pressure exceeds 5
psi. Tach Hours increment at a normal rate when the RPM is equal to cruise RPM, slower when RPM is
less than cruise RPM, and faster when RPM is above cruise RPM.

Rev. 14 Page 5-34
Table 5-23 EIS Configuration - Engine
Engine Number of Cylinder
Engine Single Engine or 4 cylinders or
Multi Engine 6 cylinders
Flight Hours HOBBS Hours Tach Hours Cruise RPM [1]
Acft/Eng Time
Notes:
[1] Set Cruise RPM based on the removed tachometer. Refer to Table 5-24.
Obtain the required information for the Engine subsection using Table 5-23, and populate all fields on the Engine page.
Table 5-24 Cruise RPM Setting

GI 275
Removed Tachometer
Config
Example Aircraft, Reference Only
Cruise Stewart
IFR Mitchell AC Type
Setting Warner
Commander 112, 114; Grumman/American AA-1, AA-1A; Beech C35, D35,
E35, F35; Bellanca/Champion 7EC, 7FC, 7GC, 7HC,7GCB, 7ECA, 7GCAA,
2300 55-35-7 D1-112-5023 P-551-AZ RT-7 7GCBC, 7KCAB, 8KCAB, 14-19; Cessna 120, 140, 170, 180, 182, 185 (with IO-
470 eng); Lake Aircraft C-1, C-2, L-4; Mooney M20, M20A, M20D; Piper PA-12,
PA-18, PA-20, PA-22, PA-23, PA-24, PA-28, PA-30, PA-32, PA-39
2050 55-35-8 D1-112-5122 P-551-AYZ RT-8 Beech 35, A35, B35, 35R
2300 55-35-9 D1-112-5030 P-551-AZH RT-9 Aeronca Champion, Chief (early models); Piper PA18 (w/TCM eng)
2050 55-35-10 D1-112-5124 P-551-AZJ RT-10 Aeronca Champion, Chief (late models), 7AC, 11AC; Beech Musketeer
Bonanza: G35, H35, J35, K35, M35, N35, P35, S35, V35, 36, A36, 95, B95,
2566 55-35-11 D1-112-5025 P-551-TA RT-11 B95A, D95A; Cessna 150, 152, 172, 177, 185, 188 (with IO-520 eng), 206, 207,
210, 310, 320; Helio H250, H391, H395; Navion E, F, G
2566 55-35-12 D1-112-5032 P-551-AZK RT-12 Bellanca Champion: 7AC
1800 55-35-14 D1-112-5028 P-551-AZA RT-14
3000 55-35-15 D1-112-5034 P-551-AZB RT-15 Cessna 175
1800 55-35-16 D1-112-5029 P-551-AZL RT-16
2400 55-35-17 D1-112-5024 N/A RT-17 Maule M5/6/MX7-180, M5/6/7/MX7-235
If the Cruise RPM cannot be determined from Table 5-24 or from markings on the original tachometer, use the POH/AFM to find the cruise RPM for 65% HP, 6000
ft PA, Standard Temperature, at 21 in. Hg (if applicable). Verify the Cruise RPM value type matches the display RPM type (i.e. engine RPM or propeller RPM).

Rev. 14 Page 5-35
5.7.2 Sensors
Configure each connected EIS sensor as shown in Appendix Section C.12. The following steps are required
for this section:
1. Determine all installed EIS sensors that interface to the GI 275 system.
2. Navigate to the System Info → Devices Online page and verify that EIS 1/2 has a green
checkmark.
3. Navigate to EIS → Sensors.
4. Select the Sensor Model configuration shown in Appendix Section C.12 for each sensor.
Figure 5-15 Sensor Menu Example
a. Touch File Location and then select the source.

b. Select the wired GEA port, if applicable, via the Port Select field. If not applicable, there will
be no Port Select field.
c. Touch Model and then select the installed sensor. A silver checkmark will appear if the
configuration is valid. A yellow triangle will appear if the configuration is not valid.
d. Touch Enter.
An example configuration of a TIT sensor is shown in Figure 5-16. The selection sequence is highlighted.

Rev. 14 Page 5-36
1 2 3
4 6
7 8 9
Figure 5-16 TIT Sensor Configuration Example
Additional specific sensor configurations are as follows:

RPM
• The RPM must display the originally intended RPM based on the aircraft/engine performance. The
following information can be found either on the engine TCDS or Operator’s Manual. Only the
P-Lead can be used for geared engines.
• Select the RPM sensor type:
◦ P-Lead - select configuration to match the engine magneto type, two single magnetos or one
dual-magneto. Select the engine reduction gear ratio (if applicable) to ensure the RPM gauge
displays the AFM/POH values.
◦ Mag Vent Pickup.

Rev. 14 Page 5-37
Shunt - Alternator Load
1. Select the model.
2. The shunt can be calibrated only if it is out of tolerance. For calibration:
a. With the aircraft alternator OFF, select the installed shunt.
b. Reselect the Shunt - Alternator Load.
3. Touch Calibrate to zero the indication.
The displayed shunt value is a static value captured upon entering the Shunt page; if the electrical load
changes, the page must be reloaded to display the new value.
Manifold Pressure
1. Select the sensor (Sensor→ Manifold PRESS).
2. For the Garmin 011-04202-00 and 011-05783-00 sensor configurations, if the displayed manifold
pressure value is incorrect, perform the calibration.
a. Reselect the manifold pressure sensor model, then touch the Calibration. button.
b. Enter the local Barometric Pressure, then touch the Current BARO button.
c. Enter the local field elevation, then touch the Field Elevation button.
d. Touch the Calibrate button.
Fuel Quantity
Select the fuel quantity sensor model (refer to Section 3.4.2 for sensor selection details). Refer to
Section 5.8.3.1 for the calibration procedure.
Fuel Flow
1. Select the sensor model. Most aircraft will use Low for less filtering with a more responsive gauge.
Select Hi if the fuel flow gauge is unsettled (e.g., to smooth carburetor float surges).
2. Enter the nominal fuel flow sensor K-Factor. Use the Floscan 201B-6 sensor configuration for a
JPI P/N 700900-1. Use the Floscan 231 sensor configuration for a JPI P/N 700900-2.
For all aircraft with an existing fuel flow limitation, the EIS fuel flow must be within 10% of actual; refer
to the fuel flow check in Section 6.5.3.6. The pilot can make adjustments in Normal mode, which is limited
to 15%.
Refer to Table 5-25 for the nominal K-factor values.
CAUTION
K-Factor must be in units of pulses per gallon. Different units will result in inaccurate fuel
flow and fuel computer results.

Rev. 14 Page 5-38
Table 5-25 Fuel Flow K-Factor
Sensor K-Factor
EI FT-60 (Red Cube) (Hi or Low) 68,000
EI FT-90 (Gold Cube) 33,800
Floscan 201B-6 (Hi or Low) [1]
Floscan 231 (Hi or Low) [1]
JPI 700900-1 (201) [1]
JPI 700900-2 (231) [1]
Beech 102-389012-11 (Hi or Low) 84,949
Notes:
[1] Use the tag attached to transducer for K-Factor value. Data must be entered as XX,XXX.
For example, if the value is XY.XX, multiply the K-factor value from the tag by 1000 and
enter XY,XXX. If there is no K-factor available on the attached tag, use a K-factor value of
29000.
5.7.3 Pages
5.7.3.1 All Pages
Full Time Gauges
Configures which gauges will display as half-arc gauges at the top of every EIS page (from left to right).
RPM and Manifold Pressure (if applicable) must be selected as full time gauges per this STC. The order
that they are displayed (left or right) must be configured so that the RPM gauge is the same orientation (left
or right) as the aircraft’s throttle control.
Full Time Extra Info

Configures which extra information will display on each EIS page above the full time gauges. Select from
the following options:
• Percent Power (requires RPM, Manifold Press, Fuel Flow, and OAT).
• Prop Sync (limited to conventional twin-engine aircraft; prohibited in centerline thrust aircraft,
such as Cessna 337).
• Off.
NOTE
Prop Sync will only display on one of the two EIS displays in a conventional twin-engine
installation. Percent Power must be configured off if the other EIS has Prop Sync
configured.

Rev. 14 Page 5-39
5.7.3.2 CHT/EGT Page
Leaning Source
Configures which temperature sensor is used as the source for Lean Assist. The options are EGT and TIT.
Using TIT as the Leaning Source is not approved for aircraft with multiple TIT sensors.
Advanced
Configures Lean Assist settings. Configure the settings per Figure 5-26.
Table 5-26 CHT/EGT Page Advanced Settings

Setting Description
Lean – Temp Incr Select the temperature increase threshold. The default is 14°F.
Lean – Temp Drop Select the temperature drop threshold. The default is 7.2°F.
Lean – Use FFlow? [1] Enable or Disable the use of fuel flow sensor data for lean assist aiding.
Lean – FFlow Hyst Select the fuel flow hysteresis threshold. The default is 0.2 gal/hr
Notes:
[1] When the use of Fuel Flow sensor data is disabled, only Rich of Peak Lean Assist is available.
5.7.4 Gauges
If configured for twin-engine EIS, a Source button will be selectable at the top of the Gauges page. The
GI 275 that is directly interfaced to the GEA connected to Engine 1 (i.e., EIS 1) must have Engine 1
selected as the Source per this STC. The GI 275 that is directly interfaced to the GEA connected to
Engine 2 (i.e., EIS 2) must have Engine 2 selected as the Source per this STC.
5.7.4.1 Gauge Layout

Refer to Appendix E for gauge layout information.
5.7.4.2 Gauge Markings and Ranges

Obtain the AFM/POH or other approved data to set the gauge markings and gauge ranges. If the existing
aircraft gauges that are being replaced do not match the AFM/POH or other approved data, the installer
must resolve the discrepancy. Prior modifications may have altered the aircraft limitations and operating
parameters.
WARNING
Gauge markings, limitations, and units present in the AFM/POH, this manual, or other
approved data must be represented on the EIS gauge. No additional markings are permitted
on required gauges.
NOTE
The GI 275 EIS typically utilizes bar gauges instead of full radial gauges. Because of this,
colored “arcs” listed in the POH/AFM should be configured as colored “ranges” on the
GI 275 instead.

Rev. 14 Page 5-40
NOTE
Only red or yellow colors are capable of alerting. A red range will alert and can be used
for items such as low fuel quantity alerting. Refer to Appendix Section E.6.1.
Gauge markings are not approved for the following gauges:

• EGT
If replacing an existing gauge, all markings will need be replicated on the EIS display. Use Table 5-27 to
gather the marking and range information for each gauge specified in the AFM/POH or other approved
data.
If configuring a new EIS gauge, only configure the Units and the Gauge Range. All units must match the
AFM/POH, if applicable, and values selected must be appropriate for the gauge function.
Table 5-27 Original Gauge Settings

Attribute Data
Gauge Type
Units
Color:
Arc(s) Min:
Max:
Color
Minimum Line
Min:
(minimum safe operating limit)
Max:
Color:
Maximum Line
Min:
(maximum safe operating limit)
Max:
Color:
Line/Radial(s) Min:
Max:
Minimum (lowest value on gauge):
Gauge Range
Maximum (highest value on gauge):
Other Markings
Include the settings in Table 5-28 for the specific gauge. If the markings in Table 5-28 conflict with AFM/
POH or other approved data, use the AFM/POH or other approved data.
Table 5-28 Additional Gauge Settings

Gauge Marking
Carb Temp Blue range from -15°C to 5°C
Fuel Quantity Red line at 0 (usable fuel)

Rev. 14 Page 5-41
As an example only, the configuration of a pressure gauge is shown in Figure 5-17.
a. b. c.
a. Select Gauges from the
EIS page.
b. Select the gauge type to be
configured.
c. Configure the gauge units
and Gauge Range.
d. Select Marks.
e. Select New Range to add a
range.
f. Configure color, range
minimum, and range
maximum. Select Enter to
confirm. Repeat as
d. e. f. necessary to configure
markings.
g. Select New Line to add a
line.
h. Configure line color, value,
and as a minimum or
maximum. Select Enter to
confirm. Repeat as
necessary to configure
markings.
i. Verify final gauge
presentation.
g. h. i.
Figure 5-17 Gauge Configuration Example
Use the following procedure for gauge configuration:

1. Complete Table 5-27 for each gauge specified in the AFM/POH or other approved data, and refer
to Table 5-28 for additional settings.
2. Using the information gathered in step 1, configure each gauge as shown in the example in
Figure 5-17. The EIS gauge settings must accurately convey the limitations in the AFM/POH or
other approved data.
3. Use Table 5-29 as an additional guide to set the gauge ranges. When setting the gauge range, verify
the minimum and maximum values are captured within the physical markings of the gauge. It may
be necessary to adjust the minimum and maximum gauge range so that the gauge needle has a
value represented. Refer to Figure 5-18 for an example.
4. When configuring gauge ranges that include red line markings, the total gauge range must be
configured so that the pilot can identify an exceeded value if the gauge passes the redline marking.

Rev. 14 Page 5-42
a. The range markings of 5 PSI b. To capture the range between
and 110 PSI are not captured 5 PSI and 110 PSI, it may be
within gauge presentation. necessary to extend the range.
Figure 5-18 Gauge Range Marking Example
If a gauge range is not specified by the AFM/POH or other approved data, an appropriate range must be
defined based on the gauge function, as specified in Table 5-29.
Table 5-29 Gauge Minimum and Maximum Ranges
Gauge Guidelines
If a new gauge is being added, configure the gauge range for the functional range of the parameter
General (refer to Figure 5-18).
Unless noted below, the gauge range must include all markings.
Configure the gauge range minimum and maximum based on the range of the tachometer being
Tachometer
replaced.
Manifold The minimum value must be the lower of the following: 10 inHg or 1 inch below the lowest range
Press marking. Use 1 inch above the highest marking as the maximum value.
Oil Press Use 0 psi as the range minimum. Use 5-10 psi above the highest marking as the range maximum.
Oil Temp Use 0°F as the range minimum. Use 10°F above the redline as the range maximum.
Fuel Use 0 as the range minimum. Use the same range maximum as the fuel indicator being replaced. It
(Main/Aux) is common for the fuel tank to hold more fuel than the system can measure.
Use 0 GPH as the range minimum. Use +10% of the highest marking or +10% of the highest takeoff
Fuel Flow
fuel flow at sea level as the range maximum.
Fuel Press Use 0.0 psi as the range minimum. Use +10% above the highest marking as the range maximum.
Use 25°F below the lowest marking as the range minimum. Use 25°F above the highest marking as
CHT
the range maximum. If no markings are present, use a range of 200°F-500°F.
Use 1000°F as the range minimum. Use 50°F above the redline as the range maximum. If no
Primary EGT
markings are present, use a range of 1000°F-1700°F.
Carb The range must be set to -24°C to 34°C.

Rev. 14 Page 5-43
Side Text
The GI 275 EIS provides the Side Text feature for twin-engine aircraft. Side Text allows each gauge to be
labeled L, R, or F to more easily differentiate between EIS 1 and EIS 2 in left/right twin-engine aircraft as
well as centerline thrust (forward/rear) twin-engine aircraft. In single-engine aircraft, this feature should
remain set to the default None.
Figure 5-19 Side Text Example
5.7.5 Fuel
Main Tank
Configure to Single Main or Left & Right for the aircraft main tank.
AUX Tank
Configure to None, Single AUX/Tip, or Left & Right for the aircraft auxiliary tank.
AUX Label
Configure to AUX or Tip for the auxiliary tank label.
Fuel Type
Configure to Avgas, Jet A, or Jet B for the aircraft fuel type.
Quantity Calibration
Refer to Section 5.8.3.1 for the Fuel Quantity Calibration procedure.
Full Capacity
Configure the full capacity of the main tank.
Tab Capacity
Configure the tab capacity of the main tank.
5.7.6 Diagnostics
Sensor Status
Displays information on installed GEAs, including temperature and port configurations. Select between
EIS 1 and EIS 2 (if applicable) in the Selected Unit field.
GEA Status
Displays status of configured EIS sensors.
Fuel Calibration
Shows information on the last completed Fuel Quantity Calibration.

Rev. 14 Page 5-44
5.8 Calibration/Checks
This section provides guidance for calibrating the GI 275 system after the configuration steps have been
completed.
5.8.1 Composite NAV Calibration

If a Composite NAV connection is interfaced to a GI 275, the displays must be calibrated to each
individual NAV radio using the following procedure:
1. Power on the GI 275 in Configuration mode and then power on NAV1.
2. Navigate to the Analog NAV Calibration page (Calibration/Test → Analog NAV).
3. Touch the Localizer button.
4. Use an appropriate NAV tester to generate a localizer signal with 0.155 DDM left or right, and
tune the NAV radio to the test frequency.
5. Touch the Calibrate button and then the OK button.
6. Wait for the calibration to complete (approximately 6 seconds) and touch the OK button.
7. Verify that the DDM readout is 0.155 ± 0.010.
8. If the DDM readout is not within the specified value, adjust the Gain value manually so that the
readout is 0.155 ± 0.010 DDM.
9. Touch the Back button and then the VOR button.
10. Use a NAV radio tester to generate a 0° FROM radial VOR signal, and tune the NAV radio(s) to
the test frequency.
11. Press the Calibrate button and then the OK button.
5.8.2 Backup Battery Test

This procedure will analyze the voltage and discharge qualities of the installed backup battery. The
procedure is required to be completed when a backup battery is installed in the system. A fault indication
message will be displayed in Normal mode until this procedure is completed.
NOTE
The Backup Battery Test page will only be available if a backup battery is configured on
the Battery page (refer to Section 5.6.6).
NOTE
The Battery Rundown Test may take up to 150 minutes to complete.
NOTE
The Battery Rundown Test date is reported in UTC.
To complete the Backup Battery Test, complete the following steps:

1. Power on each GI 275 with an installed backup battery in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the Backup Battery Test page (Calibration/Test → Backup Battery Test).
3. Touch the Before Test Checklist button.
4. Verify that “Discharging” is not displayed under Battery State.
5. Touch the Test Date button and enter the current date.

Rev. 14 Page 5-45
6. Complete the on-screen checklist. Touch each checklist item once completed. Once all checklist
items have a green check mark, touch the Back button.
7. Touch the Start Test button and follow the on-screen commands.
8. The GI 275 will power off automatically when the test is complete.
9. Power on the GI 275(s) in Configuration mode and verify a PASS was achieved by navigating to
the Backup Battery Test page and touching the Test Results button and then the Rundown Test
Results button.
10. For aircraft that are approved for flight over 25,000 feet, a rundown time of at least 60 minutes is
required to be considered a PASS. For aircraft that are only approved for flight at 25,000 feet or
less, a rundown time of at least 30 minutes is required to be considered a PASS.
5.8.3 Fuel
5.8.3.1 Fuel Quantity Calibration
The Fuel Quantity Calibration is performed in Configuration mode (EIS → Fuel → Quantity Cal or
Calibration/Test → Fuel → Quantity Cal). Ensure the settings on the Fuel page are configured.
CAUTION
Ensure the correct Fuel Quantity sensor configuration before calibration. If using a
GEA 24(B) with resistive fuel probes, the fuel quantity sensor must be configured as 0-5
Volt. Refer to Appendix C.
This procedure is used to calibrate the GI 275 fuel quantity gauges. It begins with drained fuel tanks, then
unusable fuel is added, and then fuel is added in specified quantities during the fueling process. Tank
calibration takes time and cannot be interrupted once initiated. The Fuel Quantity Calibration procedure is
not required to be performed immediately following the setup of the fuel quantity gauge; however, it must
be completed before flight.
When determining the number of calibration points and amount of fuel to add at each, it is recommended
to take the total usable fuel capacity of each tank and divide it by a number of points that results in an
easily measurable amount of fuel to be added at each point (e.g., for a 24 GAL (of usable fuel) tank, divide
24 (gallons of usable fuel) by 6 (calibration points) to equal 4 (gallons of fuel to be added at each point).
Take that number of points (6 in this example) and add 1 more for the unusable fuel (Point 1). So, a tank
that holds 24 gallons of usable fuel could perform the calibration with 7 points, adding 4 gallons at each
point after the unusable fuel is added in the first point.

Rev. 14 Page 5-46
5.8.3.2 Required Information and Equipment
A calibrated/verified fueling system is required to add known quantities. The aircraft manufacturer’s
information for aircraft leveling requirements/procedures and the unusable fuel quantity is required.
Table 5-30 is used as a guide to calibrate the fuel quantity gauge(s). If the installation does not include
auxiliary tanks, set the Aux Tank field to None. Table 5-31 describes each of the settings during the
calibration of the fuel quantity.
Table 5-30 Fuel Page Settings

Setting Options
Single Main
Main Tank
Left & Right
None
AUX Tank Single AUX/Tip
Left & Right
AUX
AUX Label
Tip
Avgas
Fuel Type Jet A
Jet B
Full Capacity Refer to AFM/POH
Tab Capacity Refer to AFM/POH
Table 5-31 Fuel Quantity Calibration Settings

Setting Options Notes
Set to match the maximum range from the
Main Gauge Maximum
Gauge Max Main gauge being removed. This is configured on
(0-2980 GAL) the EIS → Gauges → Fuel (Main) page.
Set to match the maximum range from the
AUX Gauge Maximum
Gauge Max AUX gauge being removed. This is configured on
(0-2980 GAL) the EIS → Gauges → Fuel (Aux) page.
The accuracy of the fuel quantity indication
will increase with more calibration points. It is
recommended to use at least the same
Num Points 5 to 16 points
number of points as graduations on the
gauge being replaced. Refer to Section
5.8.3.1 for details.
Single Main
Single AUX/Tip Main L & R and Aux/Tip L & R procedures
Main L & R (Recom.) alternate left then right calibration points to
keep the aircraft balanced. These are
AUX/Tip L & R (Recom.)
Procedure recommended if the aircraft has left and right
Main L
tanks. The available options are dependent
Main R on “Main Tank” and “Aux Tank” settings on
AUX/Tip L the Fuel page.
AUX/Tip R

Rev. 14 Page 5-47
5.8.3.3 Fuel Quantity Calibration Procedure
Complete the following procedure using a calibrated fueling system:
1. Drain the fuel from the aircraft in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Level the aircraft in accordance with the aircraft manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Navigate to the Fuel page (Calibration/Test → Fuel).
4. Configure the fuel tank settings using Table 5-30.
5. Touch the Quantity Cal button.
6. Verify the Gauge Max Main and Gauge Max Aux settings are correct using Table 5-31.
7. Touch the Check gauge max button. A green checkmark will appear.
8. Touch the Drain fuel button if step 1 was completed. A green checkmark will appear.
9. Touch the Level aircraft button if step 2 was completed. A green checkmark will appear.
10. Touch the Num Points button and enter the number of calibration points to be performed. Refer to
Table 5-31 and Section 5.8.3.1 for guidance in determining the number of calibration points.
11. Touch the Select num points button. A green checkmark will appear.
12. Touch the Procedure button and select the procedure using Table 5-31.
13. Touch the Select procedure button. A green checkmark will appear.
14. When all steps are checked, the Begin button will be available. Touch it to begin.
15. Add the amount of unusable fuel determined from the aircraft manufacturer or other approved data
using a calibrated/verified fueling system.
16. Touch the corresponding button once the fuel has been added to check it off (refer to Figure 5-21).
17. Once the sensor readout has stabilized in the tenths place, touch the corresponding button to check
it off (refer to Figure 5-21).
a. It may be required to manually vibrate the area near the fuel sensor to prevent the float from
sticking and to improve the sensor response during each calibration point.
18. Touch the Calibrate button to set the first point with 0.0 GAL of usable fuel (i.e., tank only has the
required amount of unusable fuel).
19. If the Left & Right procedure was selected, repeat steps 15 through 18 for the other tank.
20. Fill the indicated tank with the specified amount of usable fuel using a calibrated fueling system.
a. The GI 275 will calculate an estimated amount of fuel to be added based on the number of
calibration points and the gauge max.
b. If more than the indicated amount of fuel was added, touch the Add Fuel Amount button and
enter the actual amount of fuel that was added. The GI 275 will automatically compensate for
the difference during the next calibration point for that tank.
21. Touch the corresponding button on the display once the fuel has been added to check it off.
22. Once the sensor readout has stabilized in the tenths place, touch the corresponding button.
23. Touch Calibrate to accept that value.
24. Repeat steps 20 through 23 for any other tanks included in the calibration and for each remaining
calibration point.
a. Touch the View ( ) tank status button at any point to view a graphical representation of the
process (refer to Figure 5-21).
b. Do not add more fuel than the maximum gauge range. The manual entry field will not allow
more fuel than the maximum to be entered.

Rev. 14 Page 5-48
c. It is common for fuel tanks to hold more fuel than shown on the fuel indicator; however, the
indicator will not show fuel above the maximum gauge range.
d. Some fuel tank designs can hold more fuel when the aircraft is not level, so the maximum
gauge range may not be obtainable. Fill the tank as much as possible and enter the actual
amount that was added. The final fill point must be within 10% of the gauge range (e.g., if the
gauge range is 50 gallons, the final calibration point for that tank must fall between 45 and
50 gallons).
25. Repeat the Fuel Quantity Calibration for any remaining fuel tanks not included in this calibration
(e.g., auxiliary tank).
Figure 5-20 Fuel Quantity Calibration Page
Enter the
ACTUAL
amount of fuel
added this point
Wait until this

value stabilizes
at the tenths
place before
continuing
Figure 5-21 Fuel Quantity Calculation Procedure
NOTE
It is recommended that the display configuration be saved to a USB drive immediately
after the Fuel Quantity Calibration is completed.

Rev. 14 Page 5-49
5.9 External Systems
5.9.1 Stormscope Config Status
The Stormscope Config Status page provides a means to view the configuration status and system
information of a configured WX-500 Stormscope. Instructions for configuration of the Stormscope
interface are contained in Section 5.5.16.

Rev. 14 Page 5-50
5.10 Diagnostics
The Diagnostics page provides additional information useful for installation and configuration
troubleshooting.
5.10.1 VFR GPS

GPS Signal Strength
This displays information on the VFR GPS, including whether the antenna is connected, GPS signal
strength, and GPS coordinates.
5.10.2 Backup Battery Status

This displays the charge, temperature, and cell voltage of an installed backup battery.
Rundown Test Results

This displays the most recent Battery Rundown Test results.
Clear Test Results

This clears the most recent Battery Rundown Test results.
5.10.3 HSDB Status

The HSDB Status page shows the status of both GI 275 HSDB connections.
5.10.4 CAN Network

The CAN page provides CAN bus error and warning information for any devices connected on the CAN
bus network.
5.10.5 Temp/Pwr Stats

The Temp/Pwr Stats page shows the total number of power ups, operating hours, and CPU temperatures.
5.10.6 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete In page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each Discrete Input and how it is configured.
5.10.7 Discrete Outputs

The Discrete Out page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each Discrete Output. Connected and
configured outputs can be toggled Active and Inactive by touching the associated button. Active outputs
say “Active” in green lettering, while inactive or not configured outputs say “Inactive” in gray lettering.
5.10.8 Analog Inputs

The Analog In page shows the voltage of each Analog Input.

Rev. 14 Page 5-51
5.10.9 GDL69
The GDL 69 page shows information for a configured GDL 69/69A SXM.
5.10.10 ARINC 429

The ARINC 429 page shows the status of each ARINC 429 port.
5.10.11 RS-232
The RS-232 page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of each RS-232 connection. Yellow indicates that the
port is not actively receiving or transmitting data.
5.10.12 RS-485
The RS-485 page shows the status (Active/Inactive) of the RS-485 connection. Yellow indicates that the
port is not actively receiving or transmitting data.
5.10.13 Clear Config
CAUTION
Touching the Clear Config button will erase all configuration settings.
5.10.14 Factory Reset
CAUTION
Touching the Factory Reset button will restore the unit to its factory defaults, including
resetting calibration results. It is not recommended to select this option when
troubleshooting.

Rev. 14 Page 5-52
5.11 System Info
This provides the option to review a configured device’s detailed information, such as serial number, part
number, and software versions. LRUs must be configured in order for their data to be displayed.
5.11.1 Devices Online

The Devices Online page reports the status of installed LRUs. The icon next to each LRU reports one of
three colored symbols to indicate the status of each LRU, as described in Table 5-32. Verify that all LRUs
connected or configured to each display have a green checkmark.
Table 5-32 LRU Status Indicators

Status Color LRU Condition
Green Checkmark The LRU is online. No faults are detected.
Yellow Question Mark The LRU is configured, but the GI 275 is not receiving data.
Red X The LRU is configured, but a warning is present.
Empty The LRU is not configured.
5.11.2 Device Info

The Device Info page provides information for each configured LRU in the GI 275 system. Touch the
Device button and select an LRU to view information such as serial number, part number, and software
version.

Rev. 14 Page 5-53
5.12 Maintenance
Config Mode Fast Sync
Configure this setting on to expedite maintenance log downloads to a USB drive.
Export Logs
The GI 275 has maintenance and error logs that can be downloaded to a USB drive with the following
procedure:
2. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (a USB icon will appear in the bottom-left of the screen).
3. Navigate to the Maintenance page.
4. Touch the Export Logs button.
5. Touch the Download Log button and select the log type to download: Assert, Flight Data, Aircraft
Report, or Fault Log.
a. If Flight Data was selected, touch the Download Log Style button and select All or From
Date. If From Date was selected as the Log Style, enter the date in the fields below.
Touch the Start Download button and then the Begin Download button.
Export Config
Export configuration settings via USB. Refer to Section 5.2.2.4 for procedure.
Export External LRU Logs

To download external LRU error logs:
2. Power on all LRUs in the system.
3. Insert a USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (a USB icon will appear in the bottom-left of the screen).
4. Navigate to the Maintenance page.
Touch the Export External LRU Logs button. The available logs will automatically download. Exported
logs can be viewed and printed using a computer’s web browser.
Logging Options
This gives the option to enable or disable the logging of flight data during operation. The default is
Enabled.
Clear Assert Logs

This clears the assert logs. This cannot be undone.
Clear Flight Logs

This clears the flight logs. This cannot be undone.
Clear Databases
This clears all flight databases. This cannot be undone.

Rev. 14 Page 5-54
View Event Log
This allows all events to be displayed and reviewed based on configurable filters. Select the number of
power cycles to be included in the log, a specific Event ID (optionally select All), and a date range to be
included. Touch View events to view a list of events. Select each event to view additional information.
5.13 Restart Options

Restart All to Config
Restarts all GI 275s in the system in Configuration mode.
Restart All to Normal

Restarts all GI 275s in the system in Normal mode.
GI ( )
Select restart options for the GI 275 unit. Options are Do Not Restart, Normal Mode, and Config Mode.
Restart
Restarts the GI 275 according to the above selection. If Do Not Restart is selected, the unit will not restart.

Rev. 14 Page 5-55
5.14 Wireless Connectivity
The GI 275 has built-in Wi-Fi and Bluetooth capabilities. Garmin Connext allows for a wireless
connection between the GI 275 and a personal electronic device (PED) running the Garmin Pilot
application to update flight databases (refer to Section 5.15) and other functions (refer to Section 1.2.2.3).
Only one Wireless source can be configured in the system at a time.
If a Flight Stream is installed as part of the system, the GI 275 wireless setting must be set to Other LRU. If
the cockpit has an ADS-B source with Bluetooth (e.g., GTX 345), a GI 275 should be configured as the
wireless source, and the Bluetooth should be deactivated on the ADS-B source.
To configure a wireless connection:
1. Power on the GI 275 in Configuration mode.
2. Navigate to the Wireless page (Interfaces → Wireless).
3. Wait until the Continue button becomes selectable (up to 2 minutes).
4. Select the device for the wireless source:
◦ This LRU – the specific GI 275 being configured.
◦ GI ( ) – a different GI 275 with that Unit ID.
◦ Other LRU – disables the wireless functionality.
SSID
Enter the built-in Wi-Fi SSID. A maximum of eight characters is allowed.
The built-in Wi-Fi is used to transfer databases via Database Concierge. Refer to Section 5.15.
Password
Enter the Wi-Fi password. The password must be eight characters.
The built-in Wi-Fi is used to transfer databases via Database Concierge. Refer to Section 5.15.
Connext Features
• Database Update – Allows flight databases to be updated via the Bluetooth from Garmin Pilot. The
default is enabled.
• Flight Plan Import – Allows flight plans to be synced from a GPS 175, GNX 375, or GNC 355.
The default is disabled.
Pair a Device
Connect to a Bluetooth-enabled PED with the Garmin Pilot application. Refer to Garmin Pilot for iOS
User’s Guide or Garmin Pilot for Android User’s Guide for more information on the Garmin Pilot
application. To pair a device:
1. Open the Garmin Pilot application on the PED and follow in the instructions in the applicable
user’s guide to enable Bluetooth connectivity.
2. On the GI 275, touch the Pair a Device button.
3. Touch the Bluetooth Name button and select the device.
4. Touch the Pair button. The GI 275 can store up to 13 paired devices. Once a device is paired, it
can be connected to automatically in Normal mode to initiate database uploads.
Bluetooth Devices
Manage and delete paired devices. Auto-Reconnect can be enabled from this menu.

Rev. 14 Page 5-56
5.15 Database Loading
NOTE
When updating databases on the GI 275, ensure the aircraft has been on the ground since
the unit was powered on, otherwise certain database update options are disabled.
The GI 275 system uses several databases depending on its configuration. These databases (and database
updates) are available for purchase at flyGarmin.com. Databases are locked to a System ID and cannot be
used in more than one system. The system ID is the same for each GI 275 installed in the system.
Databases are typically updated using a portable electronic device (PED) with the Garmin Pilot
application.
After obtaining the appropriate databases from flyGarmin.com, they can be loaded to the GI 275 system by
USB drive, another Garmin LRU via Database Sync, or through the Database Concierge feature (Wi-Fi).
5.15.1 Automatic Database Updates

The GI 275 will automatically prompt the user to update databases on startup in Normal mode if the
following conditions are met:
• A newer database is detected in the standby queue (refer to GI 275 Pilot’s Guide for details) or on
a connected compatible Garmin LRU.
• The newer database is within its effective dates.
• The aircraft is on the ground.
Follow the on-screen prompts to update a database. A dedicated page will display during this process.
NOTE
The Basemap and Terrain databases will automatically update when the above conditions
are met without user input. In this case, a unit restart is not required.
NOTE
The GI 275 can receive database updates from other compatible LRUs, but it can only
provide database updates to GPS 175, GNX 375, GNC 355, and other GI 275 units.
Load Databases via Database Sync

If Database Sync is enabled on the GI 275 (refer to Section 5.6.5), then databases on each GI 275 in the
system can be synchronized by the following procedure:
5. Power on all GI 275s in the system in Normal mode.
6. Databases will synchronize automatically in the background. A “Database sync transfer in
progress” message will appear.
a. Selecting the Fast Sync button to increases the transfer speed, but disables screen use until the
transfers are complete
7. When the sync is done, a “Database Sync Complete Activate Now?” prompt will appear.
8. Touch the Yes button and then the Update Selected button.
9. When all the database updates are complete, touch the Restart Unit button.
If a GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi with a Flight Stream 510 is installed in the system, then it can also be used
to update all GI 275s in the system using the above procedure.

Rev. 14 Page 5-57
5.15.2 Database Updates via USB
1. Download appropriate databases from flyGarmin.com onto a USB drive.
3. On the display connected to the USB dongle or GSB 15, hold the knob or swipe up from the
bottom of the screen to open the menu.
4. Touch the System button.
5. Touch the Databases (or DB) button.
6. Verify the listed databases that show out-of-date (amber) have updated versions on the USB drive.
7. Touch the Update button.
8. Insert the USB drive into the USB dongle or optional GSB 15 and wait for the GI 275 to recognize
the drive (USB status will change from “Not Connected” to “Connected” at the top of the screen).
9. Touch the USB button.
10. Select the individual databases to update and then touch the Update Selected button or touch the
Update All button.
11. When the databases have finished updating, touch the Restart Unit button and remove the drive.
5.15.3 Transferring Databases via Database Concierge (Wi-Fi)

Database Concierge allows wireless transfer of databases from a PED with the Garmin Pilot application
via Wi-Fi while the aircraft is on the ground using the following procedure:
1. Download the appropriate databases onto a PED with the Garmin Pilot application.
3. Touch the System button, then the Databases (or DB) button.
4. Touch the Update button. The GI 275 internal Wi-Fi will now be available to be connected with a
PED.
5. Connect the PED to the GI 275’s Wi-Fi network. The SSID and password can be set or viewed on
the Wireless page.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
NOTE
New databases with current effective dates will replace expired databases on the GI 275,
and databases with future effective dates will be added to the internal standby queue for
automatic updates in the future.
5.15.4 GI 275 Databases

Table 5-33 Database Summary
Database Update Rate
Navigation Database 28 Days
Basemap Database Periodic (when available)
Obstacle Database with Hotlines 56 Days
Terrain Database Periodic (when available)
SafeTaxi Database 56 Days

Rev. 14 Page 5-58
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT
6.1 Checkout Log....................................................................................................................................6-2

6.2 Configuration Ground Checks ..........................................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 LRU Status Check......................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.2 Device Info.................................................................................................................................6-4
6.2.3 GSB 15 Connection Check ........................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks..............................................................................................6-5
6.4 Multifunction Display (MFD) Ground Checks ................................................................................6-6
6.4.1 GPS Ground Checks...................................................................................................................6-6
6.4.2 NAV Ground Checks .................................................................................................................6-7
6.4.3 Traffic Ground Checks...............................................................................................................6-9
6.4.4 Terrain Checks .........................................................................................................................6-10
6.4.5 Weather Ground Checks ..........................................................................................................6-11
6.4.6 WX-500 Stormscope Interface Check......................................................................................6-12
6.4.7 Radar Altimeter Check (ARINC 429)......................................................................................6-13
6.4.8 Transponder Control Check .....................................................................................................6-13
6.4.9 Flight Databases Check............................................................................................................6-13
6.5 Engine Indication System (EIS) Checks.........................................................................................6-14
6.5.1 Fuel Computer Check (GPS)....................................................................................................6-14
6.5.2 Temperature Sensor Checks.....................................................................................................6-14
6.5.3 EIS Gauge Layout and Marking Checks..................................................................................6-15
6.5.4 EIS Engine Run-up Checks......................................................................................................6-16
6.5.5 EIS Annunciator Light Check ..................................................................................................6-17
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check..............................................................................................6-18
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check....................................................................................6-19
6.8 Flight Checks ..................................................................................................................................6-21
6.8.1 MFD Flight Checks..................................................................................................................6-21
6.8.2 EIS Flight Checks.....................................................................................................................6-21
6.9 Documentation Checks ...................................................................................................................6-22
6.9.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement ........................................................................................6-22
6.9.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness ................................................................................6-22
6.9.3 Return to Service ......................................................................................................................6-22
WARNING

Rev. 14 Page 6-1
6.1 Checkout Log
Refer to GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance Manual/ICA (P/N 190-02246-11) for configuration, serial
number, and LRU location documentation procedures.
Complete all relevant checks as described in the following section using the checkout log as a guide.
GI 275 Checkout Log

Date:_____________Completed by:______________________
Table 6-1 Checkout Log

Check Task Section Reference
Calibration Checkout
 Analog NAV Calibration (if applicable) Section 5.8.1
 EIS Fuel Calibration (if applicable) Section 5.8.3.1
 Backup Battery Test (if applicable) Section 5.8.2
Ground Checkout
Configuration Ground Check
 LRU status check Section 6.2
Device Info
MFD Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
GPS Section 6.4.1
NAV Section 6.4.2
Traffic Section 6.4.3
Weather Section 6.4.5

Stormscope Section 6.4.6
Radar Altimeter Section 6.4.7
Transponder Control Section 6.4.8
Databases Section 6.4.9
MFD-Specific Section 6.4
EIS Ground Check (complete all applicable checks)
EIS-Specific Section 6.5
Temperature sensor Section 6.5.2
EIS gauge layout and markings Section 6.5.3
Manifold pressure Section 6.5.3.1
Oil pressure Section 6.5.3.2
 Fuel pressure Section 6.5.3.3
Tachometer Section 6.5.3.4
Fuel quantity Section 6.5.3.5
Fuel flow Section 6.5.3.6
Shunt/Voltage Section 6.5.3.7
OAT (EIS) Check Section 6.5.3.8
EIS engine run-up Section 6.5.4

Rev. 14 Page 6-2
 Placards, Switches, and Labels Section 6.6
 EMI/RFI Checks Section 6.7
Flight Checkout
 MFD Flight Check Section 6.8.1
 EIS Flight Check Section 6.8.2
Documentation
 AFMS filled in Section 6.9.1
 ICA filled in Section 6.9.2

Rev. 14 Page 6-3
6.2 Configuration Ground Checks
These ground check procedures are intended to verify that each LRU and interface in the GI 275 system
has been properly configured. Complete these checks before continuing with further ground checks.
NOTE
Throughout the configuration ground check section, references are made to particular
functions and screens. If a function or screen is not available, ensure that the system has
been configured correctly.
These ground checks must be performed on every GI 275. Before starting the checkout, ensure:
1. All GI 275 displays in the system are powered on in Configuration mode.
2. All system LRUs are be powered on.
3. All installed LRUs have been configured per Section 5.5.
6.2.1 LRU Status Check

The Devices Online page (System Info → Devices Online) reports the status of installed LRUs. The icon
next to each LRU reports one of three colored symbols to indicate the status of each LRU, as described in
Table 5-32. Verify that all LRUs connected or configured have a green indicator.
6.2.2 Device Info

The Device Info page (System Info → Device Info) provides information for each configured LRU as part
of the system.
1. Touch the Device button and select an interfaced LRU.
2. Verify that all software versions are up-to-date for the interfaced LRU.
3. Repeat for each LRU.
6.2.3 GSB 15 Connection Check

This check is required to test the connection if a GSB 15 is installed.
2. Follow the Export Configuration procedure in Section 5.2.2.4 using the GSB 15.
3. When completed, remove the USB drive.
4. Insert a charging cable into the GSB 15 and connect it to a device. Ensure the device shows
charging.

Rev. 14 Page 6-4
6.3 Interfaced Equipment Ground Checks
Table 6-2 shows all compatible LRUs that can be installed in the GI 275 system and have required ground
checks. Cross-reference each configured LRU with the installed GI 275 indicator type for a list of required
ground checks. Additionally, each indicator type may have specific checks associated with it that must also
be completed (these checks are listed on the bottom row of the table). Not all checks in a section may be
applicable to a particular installation. It is the installer’s responsibility to complete all applicable checks for
the installation.
Table 6-2 Interfaced Equipment Ground Check Section Reference
Interfaced Indicator Type

LRU MFD EIS
GPS source 6.4.1
NAV source 6.4.2 [1]
Traffic source 6.4.3 [2]
Terrain 6.4.4
Weather source 6.4.5 [2]
Stormscope 6.4.6 [2]
Radar altimeter 6.4.7 [2]
Transponder Control 6.4.8
Other Checks
Database checks 6.4.9
Indicator-specific checks 6.4 6.5
Notes:
[1] Only required if the CDI, Standard HSI, or Enhanced HSI pages are configured on the MFD.
[2] Only required if the applicable page is configured on the MFD. Refer to Section 5.6.2 for page
options.

Rev. 14 Page 6-5
6.4 Multifunction Display (MFD) Ground Checks
All applicable MFD checkout procedures must be conducted on each MFD installed in the GI 275 system.
Not all checks in a section may be applicable to a particular installation. It is the installer’s responsibility to
complete all applicable checks for the installation. The following sections must be completed as part of the
MFD checkout process.
6.4.1 GPS Ground Checks

6.4.1.1 GPS Receiver Interface Check
This check is required for units configured as an MFD with the CDI page configured on.
NOTE
GPS satellite reception is required for the following steps.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode.

2. Select GPS (or GPS1) as the CDI source by touching the CDI button until “GPS” is displayed on
the left side of the display.
3. Verify the external GPS1 navigator is powered on and, if dual GPS navigators are installed, ensure
the second GPS navigator (GPS2) is powered off.
a. For a GNS 4XXW/5XXW series, GTN 6XX/7XX series, or GTN Xi series navigator, while
on the Power-up Self-test page, verify that the ADI displays the correct lateral and vertical
deviation information.
b. For a GNS 480 unit, while it is going through its power-up sequence, verify that the ADI
displays the correct lateral and vertical deviation information.
4. Continue in Normal mode after the self-test and wait until the navigator acquires a position before
proceeding.
5. Review the active alerts on the display (if any) and verify that there are no alerts, service soon, or
service required alerts associated with the GPS unit.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigation source.
7. Verify that the magenta deviation bar displays in the center of the display.
8. If the MFD Data page is configured, navigate to it and verify that the waypoint in the Active WPT
field is the same as the one on the GPS navigator.
9. On the GPS navigator, enter OBS mode.
10. Exit OBS mode on the navigator.
11. If dual GPS receivers are installed, power off GPS1 and power on GPS2.
12. Select GPS2 as the CDI source and repeat steps 3 through 10.

Rev. 14 Page 6-6
6.4.1.2 Backup GPS Signal Check
This check is required for units configured as an MFD with the CDI page only if the VFR GPS is enabled
and the antenna installed.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode and verify that the aircraft has an unobstructed view
of the sky (or GPS repeater coverage).
2. Verify GPS1 and GPS2 (if equipped) are powered on.
3. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow GPS1, GPS2, and the VFR GPS to acquire a position.
4. Power off GPS1 and GPS2 (if equipped).
5. Verify message icon is annunciated on the top-left of the display.
6. Open the menu and touch Messages (Msgs). Verify that the message “VFR GPS is being used” is
present.
7. Verify ownship symbol is displayed on the map.
6.4.2 NAV Ground Checks

6.4.2.1 NAV Receiver Check – ARINC 429
This check is required for units configured as an MFD with the CDI page configured.
2. Verify the NAV1 receiver is powered on and, if dual NAV receivers are installed, verify the second
NAV receiver (NAV2) is powered off.
3. Select the NAV receiver as the CDI source by touching the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed
on the left side of the display.
4. Tune the NAV receiver to a localizer frequency (it is not necessary that a valid localizer signal is
being received).
5. Verify that the CDI on the GI 275 displays “LOC” (or “LOC1”/“LOC2” for installations with dual
navigators).
6. If dual navigation receivers are installed, power off NAV 1 and power on NAV 2.
7. Select NAV2 as the CDI source and repeat steps 3 through 5.

Rev. 14 Page 6-7
6.4.2.2 NAV Receiver Check – Analog
This check is required for units configured as an MFD with the CDI page configured. Prior to conducting
this check, ensure the GI 275 has been calibrated to the NAV receiver in accordance with Section 5.8.1.
1. Verify the NAV1 receiver is turned on and, if dual NAV receivers are installed, ensure the second
NAV receiver (NAV2) is powered off.
2. Select the NAV receiver as the CDI source by touching the CDI button until “VOR” is displayed
in green on the left side of the screen.
3. Tune the NAV receiver to a VOR frequency (it is not necessary that a valid VOR signal is being
received).
4. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a 0° FROM radial VOR signal and tune the NAV receiver to
the test frequency.
5. Adjust the course pointer until the deviation is centered and FROM is indicated.
6. Verify that the course pointer setting is 0 ± 4°.
7. Repeat the above steps using VOR FROM signals at 90°, 180°, and 270°. Verify that the course
pointer is within 4° of the simulated VOR bearing.
8. Tune the navigation receiver to a localizer frequency (it is not necessary that a valid localizer
signal is being received).
9. Verify that “LOC” (or “LOC1”/“LOC2” for installations with dual navigators) is displayed.
10. Set the course pointer to the current heading (i.e., straight up on the GI 275 CDI).
11. Using a VOR/ILS test set, generate a localizer and glideslope signal as specified in Table 6-3.
12. Verify that the course pointer deviation bar and glideslope indications are as specified in
Table 6-3.
13. If dual NAV receivers are installed, power off NAV1 and power on NAV2.
14. Select NAV 2 on the CDI. Repeat the NAV receiver check.
Table 6-3 Localizer/Glideslope Checks

Test Set Setting (DDM) PFD Indication
Localizer Glideslope Localizer Glideslope
Centered Centered
0.000 0.000
(within fuselage on aircraft symbol) (covering horizontal white line)
Half-scale right Half-scale down
0.078 Right 0.088 Down
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale right Full-scale down
0.155 Right 0.175 Down
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)
Half-scale left Half-scale up
0.078 Left 0.088 Up
(dev bar inside of first dot) (first dot covered by diamond)
Full-scale left Full-scale up
0.155 Left 0.175 Up
(dev bar inside of second dot) (second dot covered by diamond)

Rev. 14 Page 6-8
6.4.3 Traffic Ground Checks
6.4.3.1 ADS-B In Interface Check
This check is required for units configured as an MFD with the Traffic page configured and an ADS-B
traffic source configured per Section 5.5.13.
If the installed system is configured to receive ADS-B In data through an interface with an ADS-B In
capable unit (e.g., GTX 345, GTS ADS-B, or GNX 375), the interface is verified as follows:
NOTE
The following steps may be performed as a ground check as long as the aircraft is within
range of an FAA ground station with available targets of opportunity. If this is not the
case, it is recommended that these checks be performed in-flight within range of an FAA
ground station.
1. Power on the GI 275 in Normal mode.

2. Navigate to the Traffic page.
3. Turn on the interfacing ADS-B In capable equipment.
a. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, turn on the TAS/TCAS source.
4. Verify an amber “NO DATA” message is not displayed over the ownship icon.
5. Verify there are no “FAIL” annunciations in traffic status window.
6. If the installation includes TAS/TCAS correlated traffic, verify that the TAS/TCAS status is either
“OPER” or “STBY”.
7. Observe targets of opportunity from ADS-B equipped aircraft or an FAA ground station.
6.4.3.2 TAS/TCAS Traffic Interface Check

This check is required for units configured as an MFD with Traffic page configured and a TAS/TCAS
traffic source configured per Section 5.5.13.
NOTE
If the GI 275 system is configured for an external control (i.e., a display other than the MFD is
controlling the traffic system), then the Standby/Operate testing does not have to be completed.
If the interfaced traffic system is any of the following, then verify the interface per the instructions
included in this section:
• L3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch®
• Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 870/KMH 820, KTA 970/KMH 920
• Avidyne TAS 6XX (Ryan 9900BX TCAD)
• GTS 8XX
3. Verify that no TAS/TCAS failure annunciations (e.g., “NO DATA”, “TRFC FAIL”, “NO TRFC
DATA”, “DATA FAILED”, “FAILED”) are shown on the traffic map.
4. In the upper-left corner of the Traffic page, verify that the Traffic Status is either “TAS/TCAS:
OPER” or “TAS/TCAS: STBY” (i.e., “TIS: FAIL” or “TAS/TCAS: FAIL” must not be displayed).
5. Change the Traffic Status mode between Operate and Standby (Menu → Traffic Options).

Rev. 14 Page 6-9
6. Verify that the mode of the traffic system is updated accordingly (“STBY” will be annunciated
above ownship icon when in Standby mode; “TRAFFIC” will be annunciated at the top of the
screen in Operate mode).
7. Put the traffic system in Standby mode and initiate a traffic system self-test by selecting the Test
button (“TEST MODE” will annunciate at the top of the screen for approximately 5 seconds).
8. Verify that the traffic system runs a self-test and the self-test traffic pattern is displayed.
6.4.3.3 TIS-A Traffic Interface Check

This check is required for units configured as an MFD with Traffic page configured only if a Garmin
GTX 33X Transponder is connected to the GI 275 system and no other traffic systems covered in
Section 6.4.3.1 or Section 6.4.3.2 are installed.
3. Power on the GTX 33X by pressing ALT on the GTX 33X.
4. On the GI 275, verify that the Traffic Status is not “TIS Fail” (i.e., no fail annunciations).
5. Verify that the amber “NO DATA” is not displayed over the ownship symbol.
6. Verify that the Traffic Status is in Standby mode (Menu → Traffic Options).
7. Attempt to place the system in Operate mode. If the aircraft is within TIS-A coverage, the system
will display “TRAFFIC”. If the aircraft is not within TIS-A coverage, the unit will display
“Unavailable”.
6.4.4 Terrain Checks

6.4.4.1 External TAWS Check
This check is required if the GI 275 MFD is configured for External TAWS.
2. Power on the External TAWS source (GNS 400W/500W, GTN 6XX/7XX or GTN Xi).
3. Wait for the GPS signal to be acquired and the TAWS system check to report “OK”.
4. From the menu, select TAWS Test and verify that the GI 275 displays “TAWS Test”.
5. Once the test is complete, select TAWS Inhibit and verify that the GI 275 displays “TAWS
Inhibit”.
6. De-select TAWS Inhibit.

Rev. 14 Page 6-10
6.4.4.2 Terrain Display
This check is required for an MFD displaying the Terrain page.
2. Navigate to the Terrain page (Menu → Select Page → Terrain or turn the outer knob).
3. Verify the display shows a red background (indicating surrounding terrain is 100 feet below the
aircraft and above).
4. Touch the radius button on the left side of the screen and adjust the radius wider with the inner
knob until an obstacle (tower figure) is displayed on the screen.
5. Change the view from 360° to Arc (Menu → Terrain Options → View) and verify that the view
on the display changes.
6. Perform a Terrain Test (Menu → Terrain Options → Terrain Test). “TER TEST” will display in
white at the bottom of the screen.
6.4.5 Weather Ground Checks

6.4.5.1 FIS-B Weather (ADS-B In)
This check is required for units intending to display weather on an MFD with FIS-B Weather page only if
a compatible ADS-B traffic source (GTX 345, GTS ADS-B, GNX 375) is configured.
NOTE
The following steps may be performed as a ground check as long as the aircraft is within
range of an FAA ground station. If this is not the case, it is recommended that these checks
be performed in-flight within range of an FAA ground station.

2. Verify the GPS navigator and GDL 69/69A are in Normal mode.
3. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position.
4. Navigate to the FIS-B Weather page (Menu → Select Page → Weather or turn the outer knob).
5. Verify there are no warnings displayed.
6. Press the knob until the menu displays, touch FIS-B WX Options → Layers and then select
several FIS-B weather products to display.
NOTE
It may take up to 10 minutes after power-on for the system to begin receiving FIS-B
weather products.
7. Verify at least one of the selected products displays a valid time stamp by selecting the Time
Stamps button on the bottom of the display.
8. Verify there are no status fail messages regarding FIS-B weather.

Rev. 14 Page 6-11
6.4.5.2 GDL 69 Series Weather
This check is required for units intending to display weather on an MFD with the SXM Weather page only
if a GDL 69/69A is configured and a valid Sirius XM subscription is obtained.
This procedure does not activate the GDL 69 series XM data link radio. The instructions for activating the
GDL 69 series XM data link radio can be found in GDL 69 Series SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (P/N 190-00355-04).
1. Position the aircraft where there is a clear view of the southeastern or southwestern sky (XM
Satellite Radio satellites are located above the equator over the eastern and western coasts of the
continental United States).
3. Verify the GPS navigator and GDL 69/69A are in Normal mode.
4. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position and the GDL 69/69A to obtain
data.
5. Navigate to the SXM Weather page (Menu → Select Page → Weather or turn the outer knob).
7. Hold the knob to display the menu, then touch SXM WX Options, then Datalink Status.
a. Verify the Data ID field has a valid value and is not blank.
b. Verify the Data and Audio signal bars are in the green and that the displayed subscription level
is accurate.
6.4.6 WX-500 Stormscope Interface Check

This check is required for units intending to display Stormscope (lightning) on an MFD.
2. Power on the LRU controlling the Stormscope.
3. Allow up to 5 minutes for the GPS navigator to obtain a position.
4. Navigate to the Lightning page (Menu → Select Page → Lightning or turn the outer knob).
6. Press the knob until the menu displays, then touch the Lightning Opts button.
7. Toggle between Cell and Strike modes and verify that the corresponding mode is displayed on the
bottom of the MFD.
8. Toggle between 360° and Arc views and verify the image switches between a 360° view
surrounding the aircraft icon to an arc placed in front of the aircraft icon.

Rev. 14 Page 6-12
6.4.7 Radar Altimeter Check (ARINC 429)
This check is required for units intending to display radar altitude on an MFD.
NOTE
The GRA 55/5500 and FreeFlight RA4500 radar altimeters provide an automated self-test
during power cycles; therefore, no pilot-initiated self- test is required. After the power-up
sequence, verify that no faults are detected, “RA FAIL” is not displayed, and the RA value
displays “0” after the self-test is complete.

2. Navigate to the Rad Alt page (Menu → Select Page → Rad Alt or turn the outer knob).
3. Initiate a radar test (Menu → Rad Alt Options → Test).
a. Verify that the radar altimeter increases to an altitude of 50 feet before decreasing to 0 feet.
6.4.8 Transponder Control Check

This check is required for units configured as an MFD that is interfaced to a GTX 345R remote
transponder or a GTX 345 configured as a remote transponder.
2. Navigate to the Transponder page (it must be configured as the last page per Section 5.6.2).
3. With the GTX 345 transponder powered on, verify that there is not a yellow “X” over the XPDR
field.
4. Enter a code into the XPDR field using the keypad and touch Enter.
CAUTION
When entering a code to check the transponder, do not enter a code that begins with a “7”
to avoid accidentally triggering an alarm at an ATC facility.
5. Verify that the code that was entered is now displayed in the XPDR field.
6. If dual transponders are installed, select XPDR 2 as the active transponder and repeat steps 3
through 5.
7. If dual transponders are installed, with XPDR 1 set as the active transponder, pull the #1
transponder circuit breaker and verify that XPDR 1 shows a yellow “X”. Select XPDR 2 as the
active transponder and verify that it does not show a yellow “X”. If the behavior above does not
occur, verify that the wiring is correct.
6.4.9 Flight Databases Check

This section verifies that all databases are up-to-date.
2. Navigate to the Database menu (Menu → System → Databases (DB)).
3. Verify that all databases are up-to-date. Outdated databases will be in amber.
4. If any databases are out-of-date, follow the instructions in Section 5.15.
NOTE
The Basemap and Terrain databases do not have expiration dates.

Rev. 14 Page 6-13
6.5 Engine Indication System (EIS) Checks
This section contains procedures to verify proper installation, operation, and gauge markings of the EIS.
Begin with the engine off and at ambient temperature.
6.5.1 Fuel Computer Check (GPS)

This check is required if the Fuel page is intended to be configured on an MFD or EIS display and a GPS
source is configured.
1. Power on the GI 275 system in Normal mode and verify that the aircraft has an unobstructed view
of the sky (or GPS repeater coverage).
2. Verify GPS1 is powered on and, if dual GPS navigators are installed, verify GPS 2 is powered off.
3. Wait approximately 5 minutes to allow the GPS navigator to acquire a position.
4. Navigate to the Fuel page (Menu → Select Page → Fuel or turn the outer knob).
5. Verify that all “Current” information on the display populates.
6. Create/activate a flight plan on the GPS navigator.
7. Verify that all “At Dest” information on the display populates.
6.5.2 Temperature Sensor Checks

This check applies to all temperature sensors interfaced to the EIS.
1. Power on each EIS display in Normal mode.
2. Navigate to the CHT/EGT page (Menu → Select Page → CHT/EGT or turn the outer knob).
3. Verify the temperatures being displayed are within ± 2°C of the ambient temperature.
NOTE
If the engine has not had sufficient time to reach ambient temperature, it is necessary to
verify each temperature source independently.
4. Verify each CHT, EGT, TIT, and TIT2 (if installed) probe is wired to the corresponding cylinder
number by applying heat to each sensor and monitoring the temperature rise on the EIS display.
NOTE
If the temperature decreases when heat is applied, the wire polarity may be reversed.

Rev. 14 Page 6-14
6.5.3 EIS Gauge Layout and Marking Checks
2. Verify that no or marks are present on any EIS gauge.
3. Verify the gauges on each EIS display match the required layout per the POH/AFM. Refer to
Appendix E for details on EIS gauge layouts.
4. Verify that the instrument gauge markings and ranges match the aircraft data gathered in
Section 5.7.4.2, Table 5-27, and Table 5-28.
WARNING
Failure to properly configure the EIS gauges per the POH/AFM and other approved data
could result in serious injury, damage to equipment, or death.
6.5.3.1 Manifold Pressure Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads ambient pressure ±1 inHg (inches of mercury).
NOTE
Estimate the ambient pressure by subtracting 1 inHg for every 1,000 ft of field elevation
from the current barometric pressure.
6.5.3.2 Oil Pressure Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 ±1 psi.
6.5.3.3 Fuel Pressure Sensor Check

1. In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 ±1 psi. It may be necessary to manipulate the
throttle/mixture to reduce residual fuel pressure.
2. If installed, turn on the fuel boost pump and verify the fuel pressure increases. Turn off the boost
pump.
6.5.3.4 Tachometer Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge indicates 0 RPM.
6.5.3.5 Fuel Quantity Check

1. In Normal mode, verify the indicated fuel quantities are accurate for each tank (Main and AUX).
2. Verify that the unusable fuel quantity established by the aircraft manufacturer is the zero reading
and a red line is present at zero.
6.5.3.6 Fuel Flow Sensor Check

In Normal mode, verify that the gauge reads 0 GPH.

Rev. 14 Page 6-15
6.5.3.7 Shunt and Voltage Sensor Checks
1. In Normal mode, verify all intended gauges are available.
2. Verify that the gauge(s) show the correct aircraft voltage and amperage with the engine off.
NOTE
An alternator load meter may indicate a small current if the alternator field is on.
6.5.3.8 OAT (EIS) Check

This check only applies to standalone GI 275 EIS units with an interfaced OAT sensor.
NOTE
If the GI 275 EIS is interfaced to a PFD, the OAT sensor must be interfaced to that PFD
and not to a GEA.
1. In Normal mode, navigate to the AUX EIS page and touch a configurable field button.
2. Select OAT(EIS) and verify that the field displays the correct outside air temperature.
6.5.4 EIS Engine Run-up Checks

An Engine Run-up Check must be performed to ensure proper installation and configuration of the EIS
sensors and gauges. Always follow engine start-up procedures as provided in the aircraft POH.
CAUTION
If the engine indications are not within operating specifications shortly after starting,
IMMEDIATELY shut down the engine and troubleshoot the problem. Failure to do so may
cause engine damage.
1. Obtain an optical tachometer to monitor propeller RPM.

2. Place the aircraft in an open and clear area appropriate for an extended engine run-up.
3. Follow the engine start-up procedure as outlined in the aircraft POH. Adhere to the required
observations immediately following the start, such as oil pressure within 30 seconds.
4. For twin-engine aircraft, verify the appropriate engine gauges respond corresponding to the correct
side (left/right or front/rear).
5. Verify the EIS RPM gauge(s) match the optical tachometer reading ±50 RPM.
6. Allow the engine to warm-up and oil temperature to increase to at least 100°F.
7. Verify the engine oil pressure gauge is reading within the green arc.
8. Verify the EIS RPM gauge matches the optical tachometer reading ±50 RPM during all phases of
the engine run-up.
9. Verify the alternator load meter (if installed) and battery charge/discharge ammeter (if installed)
indicate a positive load.
10. Perform individual magneto checks as specified by the aircraft POH. If the RPM does not drop as
expected when switching from both magnetos to one, the P-lead, ignition switch wiring, or
magneto timing is incorrect. Discontinue the test immediately and repair the ignition system.
11. Perform the engine pre-takeoff run-up checklist in accordance with the aircraft POH.
12. Verify all EIS readings are consistent with normal operation performance.
13. Verify all installed sensors and fittings are free of leaks.

Rev. 14 Page 6-16
6.5.5 EIS Annunciator Light Check
If an EIS annunciator(s) is installed, perform the following procedure:
1. In Configuration mode, navigate to the Discrete Outputs page (Diagnostics → Discrete Outputs).
2. Toggle the discrete labeled as “Engine Warning” (as configured in Section 5.5.12.1) to Active and
verify that the red engine annunciator lamp illuminates. Toggle back to Inactive.
3. Toggle the discrete labeled as “Engine Caution” (as configured in Section 5.5.12.1) to Active and
verify that the yellow engine annunciator lamp illuminates. Toggle back to Inactive.
NOTE
For separate annunciators, if the annunciator lights do not illuminate, verify the lamp
operation by pressing on the lens holder. If the lamp does not illuminate, inspect and/or
replace the lamps and repeat the check.
4. If the annunciators do not illuminate, remove power from the aircraft and inspect the wiring.

Rev. 14 Page 6-17
6.6 Placards and Switch Labeling Check
If any placards were replaced or relocated as a result of a display installation, verify the following:
• The font size of the new placard is the same as the old placard it is replacing.
• The color of the new placard is identical to the color of the placard it is replacing.
• The text on the new placard is identical to the text on the placard it is replacing (it can be arranged
differently as required by space constraints, but the wording must be the same).
• The placard must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight control
positions, or by any other component in the flight deck.
If the new switch labels were added as a result of the GI 275 installation, verify the following:
• The font size and label is legible from the pilot’s seat.
• The labels are legible in all ambient light conditions. In particular, the labels are legible with
ambient flood lighting in darkness.
• The switch label must be legible and not obscured to the pilot by the glareshield, in all flight
control positions, or by any other component to include the switch position.
If the GI 275 installation is limited to VFR operation only, and the criteria in Section 2.2 determined a
placard is required, verify the following:
• The text on the placard reads: “AIRCRAFT LIMITED TO VFR”.
• The font is at least 0.25 inches high.
• The placard is legible from the pilot’s seat.
If separate EIS annunciators were installed, a placard or label is required. Verify the following:
• The text on the placard reads: “ENGINE”.
• The font is at least 0.125 inches high and easily readable with sufficient contrast from the
surroundings.
• The text must be displayed in a conspicuous place so that it cannot be obscured to the pilot by the
glareshield or any other component and remains visible in all flight control positions.
• The text is legible in all ambient light conditions, particularly with ambient floodlighting in
darkness.

Rev. 14 Page 6-18
6.7 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Check
An EMC check must be conducted once the GI 275 system is installed and all interfaces to external
equipment are verified to be working correctly. The EMC check verifies that the GI 275 is not producing
unacceptable interference in other avionics systems and other avionics systems are not producing
unacceptable interference in the unit.
1. Enter equipment installed in the aircraft into the Source row and Victim column of the form.
2. Apply power to all avionics systems except for the components that are considered to be part of the
GI 275 system.
3. Verify all existing avionics systems are functioning properly.
4. Apply power to the GI 275 system components.
5. Remove power from all other avionics systems.
6. Before applying power to the next system, wait for the current system start-up sequence to finish.
7. Apply power and/or operate the systems listed on the fillable form, one system at a time.
8. Verify the GI 275 system functions properly. Verify there are no related messages displayed.
9. Verify each radio is functioning properly by completing the following:
a. For each VHF COM radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
a. Verify no unintended squelch breaks or audio tones interfere with communications.
b. For each VHF NAV radio, monitor one local frequency, one remote (far field) frequency, and
one unused frequency.
c. Verify there are no guidance errors.
d. Verify no audio tones interfere with the station ID.
10. If an EI FT-60 or an EI FT-90 fuel flow sensor is installed, verify the fuel flow indication is
accurate and the indication does not fluctuate or invalidate the display.
a. Transmit various modulating tones on each COM radio (e.g., whistling).
b. Refer to Section 4.6.5.1 for details if the fuel flow indication fluctuates.
11. Verify all other avionic systems are functioning properly.

Rev. 14 Page 6-19
‫‪VICTIM‬‬
‫)‪Communication Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Power Plant Instruments‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank Indicator‬‬
‫‪Vertical Speed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr / Decr‬‬

‫)‪Navigation Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Magnetic Compass‬‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬
‫‪Generator‬‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬
‫‪G,‬‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬
‫‪Attitude Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Airspeed Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Vertical Speed‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Turn and Bank‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Indicator‬‬
‫‪Heading Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Magnetic‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Compass‬‬
‫‪Clock‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪OAT Indicator‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Power Plant‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Instruments‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫‪Autopilot / SAS‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Navigation‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Communication‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫)‪Radio(s‬‬
‫‪Engine Relight‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Fuel Valve‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pitot Heat‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pulse Light‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Generator‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Pos Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Anti Coll Lt‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Ldg Lts‬‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Gov RPM Incr /‬‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬
‫‪Decr‬‬
‫‪Eng Deicing‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Hyd System‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Radar Altimeter‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪TAS/TCAS‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Transponder‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Audio Panel‬‬ ‫܆܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪G,‬‬ ‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆ ܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬ ‫܆‬
‫‪Figure 6-1 EMI Victim/Source Matrix‬‬
‫‪190-02246-14‬‬ ‫‪GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual‬‬

‫‪Rev. 14‬‬ ‫‪Page 6-20‬‬
6.8 Flight Checks
All checks contained in the previous sections must be completed prior to performing the following flight
checks.
6.8.1 MFD Flight Checks

The following items (applicable to the installation) must be verified during flight:
• Navigation using each GPS and VLOC source on the MFD CDI. For navigation receivers, both
VOR and ILS must be verified.
• Display of radar altitude. The radar altitude display must be verified at several heights AGL
throughout the operating range of the radar altimeter.
• Display of traffic from any interfaced traffic system.
• Display of weather from the GDL 69/69A SXM or FIS-B source.
• All applicable EIS flight checks in Section 6.8.2.
6.8.2 EIS Flight Checks

The following items (applicable to the installation) must be verified during flight:
• All gauges/markings clearly convey the respective engine parameters.
• All EIS gauges are within their normal operating range.
• No “Caution” or “Warning” indications are present.
• Gauge indications are appropriate for all flight regimes.
• Values on the Fuel page populate when a GPS destination is active.
• Post-flight check of installed sensors and fittings for leaks.
If the AFM/POH has an operating limitation based only on fuel flow, the fuel flow must be accurate within
10% to ensure the limitation is maintained. If the recorded fuel flow and measured fuel flow are out of
tolerance, the K-factor must be adjusted in Configuration mode. Perform the following:
1. Ensure the fuel lines are purged of air.
2. Record the displayed fuel flow and the measured fuel flow at the same engine settings.
• Example: Displayed value is 20 GPH, measured value is 24 GPH
3. Determine the offset ratio: Measured / Displayed.
• Example: Measured / Displayed = 24 / 20 = 1.2
4. Inverse the ratio.
• Example: 1 / 1.2 = 0.8333
5. Multiply the inverse by the currently used K-factor in Configuration mode.
• Example: Current K-factor 68000, adjusted K-factor is 68000 * 0.8333 = 56667
6. Enter the adjusted K-factor and reload the sensor.

Rev. 14 Page 6-21
6.9 Documentation Checks
All checks contained in the previous sections must be completed prior to performing the following checks.
6.9.1 Airplane Flight Manual Supplement

Ensure that the AFMS is completed and inserted in the AFM or POH.
1. Fill in the specific airplane information on the AFMS cover sheet.
2. In the AFMS Section 1.7, fill in all applicable check boxes. More than one box may be checked,
depending upon the installation.
6.9.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness

Ensure that the appropriate aircraft information in Appendix A of GI 275 Part 23 AML STC Maintenance
Manual/ICA (P/N 190-02246-11) is filled in completely and inserted into the aircraft permanent records.
6.9.3 Return to Service

Complete the return-to-service in a means acceptable to the cognizant aviation authority. An example
would be compliance with 14 CFR 43.9, 14 CFR 91.417 and submission of an FAA Form 337 “Major
Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance” completed in accordance with
advisory circular AC43.9-1F, Instructions for Completion of FAA Form 337.
If a GEA 24 P/N 011-02848-01 is connected to resistive fuel quantity probe(s), verify the interface is
installed in accordance with revision 7 or later of this installation manual (refer to Section 3.4.2,
Figure B-6, and Appendix Section C.12). If the interface does not comply, refer to Garmin Service Bulletin
SB2135 for additional information. Once complete, make the following entry in the aircraft maintenance
record (i.e. airframe logbook):
The GI 275 installation in this aircraft complies with Garmin Service Bulletin SB2135,
Modification of GEA 24 Resistive Fuel Probe Interface.

Rev. 14 Page 6-22
7 TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts .............................................................................................................7-2

Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-2
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting ......................................................................7-4
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................................7-8
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting .........................................................................7-9
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................7-10
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting ....................................................................7-11
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting ................................................7-13
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting .......................................................................7-14
Figure 7-9 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting ............................................7-15
Figure 7-10 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting .........................................................7-16
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting............................................................................................................7-17
7.3 Interpreting Flight Data Logs .........................................................................................................7-18
This section provides troubleshooting flow charts for most system failures and alert messages. It is
recommended that system troubleshooting and repair only be completed by a Garmin authorized repair
facility. If a specific alert or fault condition is not listed, or the fault still exists after completing the given
corrective action, contact Garmin Aviation Technical Support at the number listed for your specific region
on the “Support” tab of the flyGarmin.com website.

Rev. 14 Page 7-1
7.1 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
GI 275 Alert Messages
Demo mode, Main touch screen Key stuck: Key knob Main board system
Backlight Service error is stuck fault
do not use in
calibration lost required
flight
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Main Board Touch System detects Main Board SFD Corrupt

Unit in demo mode GDU software mismatch Screen Error stuck unit knob
Main Board Boot Block Corrupt
Main Board Key Region Corrupt
Main Board Key Region Missing
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
One or more GI 275 Touch screen is not The display knob has been
Unit is in demo mode LRU in the system have responding pushed for more than
different software 30 seconds Corrupt software
versions image
Display knob is stuck in the
pushed position
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action
Set unit to normal mode by Return GI 275 to Garmin Ensure all GI 275 units Return GI 275 to Release display knob Reload GI 275
deselecting “Simulate Inputs” for service are loaded with the Garmin for service software
from the main menu in same software version
configuration mode Free display knob from the
pushed position
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 7-2
GI 275 Alert
Messages Cont’d
LRU replacement Expansion board: Internal comm. fault Expansion board Max temperature LCD board system
error Invalid config. system fault exceeded fault

LRU replacement Expansion board Expansion Board Expansion Board LCD Board System
error configuration error System Error Temp Error
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Error between Incorrect expansion Internal hardware Bad expansion Expansion Board Missing LCD
GI 275 config board configuration failure system data has exceeded software region
module and temperature
installed GI 275 Failed expansion threshold LCD Board software
calibration CRC failure

Verify system
Verify accuracy of Verify expansion Reload expansion Remove GI 275 from Reload LCD
configuration
configuration settings on board configuration board software extreme temperature software
GI 275 environment
Return GI 275 to
Garmin for service
Clear configuration and
Return GI 275 to Shut down GI 275
reconfigure
Garmin for service for at least 30 min
Replace configuration
module
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-1 GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 7-3
Battery Alert
Messages
Invalid battery Battery operation Battery unavailable: Battery unavailable: Battery unavailable: Non-Garmin battery
detected warning Capacity test Capacity test Communication lost detected
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Battery is not sealed Battery charge FET

permanent fail fault
Battery discharge FET Battery capacity test Battery capacity test Communication was Battery
permanent fail failed failed lost with the battery authentication failed
Battery safety cell

overvoltage permanent fail
GI 275's battery Battery has Battery capacity test Battery capacity test Battery not properly seated Non-Garmin battery
internal permanently failed failed has not been run for is installed
configuration is 392 days Battery is configured but not
corrupted installed

Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Run battery Ensure battery is Replace battery with
capacity test properly installed authentic Garmin
battery
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-2 Battery Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 14 Page 7-4
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery warning: Battery warning:

warning warning Charge inhibited Charge inhibited
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
Battery overcurrent Battery overcurrent Battery cell Battery cell

during charge during discharge overvoltage undervoltage
protection fault protection fault protection fault protection fault
Cause Cause Cause Cause
Battery circuitry Battery short circuit Battery circuitry Battery charge was
failure failure failure low and left to
discharge further
GI 275 charging GI 275 charging GI 275 charging
circuitry failure circuitry failure circuitry failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action
If error self clears, perform If error self clears, perform If error self clears, perform Ensure battery warmed to
battery rundown test, then battery rundown test, then battery rundown test, then room temperature
fully charge battery, ensure fully charge battery, ensure fully charge battery, ensure environment, attempt
alert does not reoccur alert does not reoccur alert does not reoccur charging
Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to

Garmin for service Garmin for service Garmin for service
If fault still exists,
contact Garmin.

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 14 Page 7-5
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery warning: Battery warning: Battery operation
warning warning Charge inhibited Charge inhibited warning

Battery Battery Battery Battery Battery overload

overtemperature undertemperature overtemperature undertemperature during discharge
during discharge during discharge during charge during discharge protection fault
protection fault protection fault protection fault protection fault
Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery internal temperature Battery current overdraw
exceeds 80°C during below -20°C during exceeds 80°C during below -20°C during
Partial short in battery circuitry
discharge discharge discharge discharge
Partial short in GI 275 circuitry
Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor Battery temperature sensor
has failed has failed has failed has failed External LRU excessive current
draw with GI 275 overcurrent
circuitry failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action
Allow battery to cool, remove Allow battery to warm up, Allow battery to cool, remove Allow battery to warm up, Replace battery
exposure to extreme remove exposure to extreme exposure to extreme remove exposure to extreme
temperature environment temperature environment temperature environment temperature environment
Return GI 275 to
Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Replace battery Garmin for service
If fault still exists,
contact Garmin.

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 14 Page 7-6
Battery Alert
Messages Cont’d
Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation Battery operation
warning warning warning warning warning

Battery short circuit Battery short circuit Battery pre-charge Battery fast-charge Battery pack voltage
during discharge during charge timeout fault timeout fault out of range
protection fault protection fault
Battery circuitry failure Battery circuitry failure Battery charge extremely low; Too much time spent in fast Battery voltage is
led to additional time in charge mode before reaching full below 1.0V or
GI 275 charger circuitry GI 275 charger circuitry pre-charge mode charge above 3.9V
failure failure
Battery / GI 275 circuitry Battery / GI 275 circuitry
failure failure

Replace battery Replace battery Ensure GI 275 is at room Perform battery rundown Perform battery
temperature, re-attempt test; recharge fully rundown test;
charging (may take several recharge fully
attempts)
Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Return GI 275 to Replace battery
Garmin for service Garmin for service Perform battery rundown
test; recharge fully Return GI 275 to Garmin for
service
Replace battery
Return GI 275 to Garmin for

service
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 14 Page 7-7
AHRS Fault
Messages
AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3>: AHRS <1/2/3> not AHRS <1/2/3> Service required Magnetic variance Magnetic variance
MISSING MISCOMPARE Magnetic model receiving GPS reports service inaccurate unavailable
-or- -or- AHRS outdated aiding required
AHRS MISSING MISCOMPARE
Maintenance Maintenance
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Log Message Log Message
AHRS <1/2/3> data is AHRS <1/2/3> does not

AHRS <1/2/3> AHRS <1/2/3> not <AHRS>
missing and cannot be match other senosrs ADB and IOP ADB is unavailable
compared Magnetic Model receiving GPS configuration does
packet magnetic for magnetic
All AHRS sensors do not out of date aiding not match what the
variances differ variance
Not enough AHRS sensors match unit expected
to perform a comparison
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Multiple AHRS are Multiple AHRS are configured, a Magnetic model is Not receiving GPS Bad AHRS calibration AHRS LRU is not
configured in the reported AHRS heading out of date data from a configured correctly
difference of 6 degrees or more No data from ADC Aviation database Aviation database is missing
system and the configured GPS out-of-date on
reported AHRS is not is detected
source GI 275 / Navigator Navigator / GPS source
detected unavailable
Multiple AHRS are configured, a
reported AHRS pitch or roll of
5 degrees or more is detected
Corrective Corrective
Action Action
Ensure the missing Determine if pitch, Update the IGRF Verify GPS Ensure ADC is Ensure aviation Ensure aviation
AHRS is powered roll or heading is out Magnetic Field configurations powered on database is up-to- database is loaded
of tolerance Model date on GI 275 and and up-to-date
Verify AHRS configured navigator
Ensure the missing Verify GPS antenna has a Perform AHRS configuration
AHRS configuration clear view of the sky and calibration settings
Heading out of Pitch or roll out of GPS source has a valid fix Verify GPS source
is correct
tolerance: perform tolerance: perform online
magnetic calibration pitch-roll offset Verify connections
Verify wiring is on all configured calibration on all Verify connections and wiring
correct heading sources configured sources and wiring
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-3 AHRS Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-8
ADC Fault Messages
ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> ADC <1/2/3> Service required
MISSING MISCOMPARE reports service reports service
-or- -or- ADC required required
ADC MISSING MISCOMPARE

ADC <1/2/3> data is ADC <1/2/3> does not ADC <1/2/3> <AHRS>
missing and cannot be match other senosrs
reports configuration does
compared
All ADC sensors do not configuration error not match what the
Not enough ADC sensors to match unit expected
perform a comparison
Multiple ADCs are Multiple ADCs are configured, a ADC internal ADC is reporting a
configured in the reported ADC pressure altitude calibration configuration error AHRS LRU is not
system and the difference of 200ft or more is mismatch configured correctly
reported ADC is not detected
detected
Multiple ADCs are configured, a
reported ADC airspeed
difference of 7kts or more is
detected

Ensure the missing Ensure the altitude Perform ADC Verify ADC Verify AHRS
ADC is powered and airspeed units calibration configuration configuration
of measure are the procedure settings settings
same for all
Ensure the missing configured ADCs
ADC configuration
is correct
Ensure there are no

Verify wiring is leaks in the pitot
correct static system
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-4 ADC Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-9
Terrain/TAWS
Alert Messages
SVT could not be Obstacle database Obstacle database SVT not available Terrain not available Service TAWS.
TER FAIL TER N/A
enabled not yet effective expired due to databases due to databases Invalid Config

SVT could not be Obstacle database Obstacle database SafeTaxi database Terrain database Terrain/TAWS
enabled not yet effective expired unavailable unavailable alerting
configuration not
selected
Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause Cause
Terrain database Preloaded database Obstacle database Database Database No valid GPS position
Database corrupted
missing or is not yet activated has expired out-of-date or out-of-date or
or missing Terrain data not available TAWS not properly
out-of-date on the system corrupted corrupted (out of coverage area)
configured
Bad feature GPS vertical position error
Internal failure
enablement estimate over max allowed
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action Action Action
Verify Terrain Activate databases: Update to the Reload or update Reload or update Verify Terrain Verify GPS is
Check TAWS/Terrain
database is installed follow system current database database database database is loaded powered and has a
config settings
and up-to-date prompts version and current clear view of sky
Re-download and Reload Terrain Verify Terrain Verify External

install SVT feature database database coverage TAWS and
enablement GI 275 have the
Inspect GPS antenna same aircraft type
and wiring configured
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-5 Terrain/TAWS Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-10
ADS‐B Traffic
Alert Messages
UAT traffic/data 1090ES traffic ADS traffic alerting ADS-B In traffic TAS/TCAS function ADS traffic function
UAT fault
receiver fault receiver fault inoperative source mismatch inoperative inoperative
Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance Maintenance

Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message Log Message
ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B In traffic ADS-B LRU reports ADS-B LRU reports
ADS-B LRU reports UAT LRU reports
1090ES traffic CSA/TSAA failure source does not TAS/TCAS ADS-B Traffic In
UAT traffic/data low WAAS battery
receiver fault match configuration inoperative or has failed
receiver fault fault
connection lost
Cause Cause
ADS-B In external ADS-B traffic format

LRU traffic receiver does not match the
has failed external LRU
configuration
Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action Action Action Action Action
Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device Refer to ADS-B Refer to ADS-B Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device
LRU manual for LRU manual for Verify configuration
in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with in accordance with
ADS-B LRU UAT LRU troubleshooting troubleshooting ADS-B LRU ADS-B LRU
maintenance maintenance maintenance maintenance
manual manual manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 7-11
Traffic
Alert Messages
Traffic/FIS-B TAS/TCAS function Traffic function

inoperative inoperative inoperative
Log Message Log Message
Traffic device Transponder device

reported failure reported failure
Corrective Corrective Corrective

Action Action Action
Troubleshoot device Troubleshoot device

Troubleshoot device
in accordance with in accordance with
in accordance with
TAS/TCAS LRU TIS-A LRU
LRU maintenance
maintenance maintenance
manual
manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-6 Traffic Alert Message Troubleshooting

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page 7-12
Audio & Weather
Alert Messages
SiriusXM receiver Stormscope

Audio inoperative Service Soon
inoperative inoperative

Audio clip failed to SiriusXM receiver Stormscope is Communication lost Stormscope is not
Audio device failed
play has failed reporting invalid with Stormscope configured or
heading operating properly
Audio clip failed to GDL 69/69A has Stormscope’s The GI 275 has lost Stormscope is
Audio device failed
play lost communication heading source is communication with reporting failed
with GI 275 or is missing the Stormscope
reporting a failed
condition

Verify audio device Verify audio device Ensure all LRUs in Verify control Verify power to Verify Stormscope
is online is online the system are source heading is Stormscope configuration
online valid settings
Inspect audio Inspect audio Inspect Stormscope
device connection device connection Verify configuration wiring and Inspect Stormscope
and wiring and wiring settings connections wiring and
connections
Troubleshoot in Troubleshoot in Inspect GDL 69/69A
accordance with accordance with wiring and
audio device audio device connectors
maintenance maintenance
manual manual
If fault persists,
contact Garmin
Figure 7-7 Audio and Weather Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-13
NAV/GPS Alert
Messages
NAV <1/2> Navigation Navigation database not Navigation GPS <1/2>

inoperative database mismatch yet effective database expired inoperative

NAV <1/2> interface/unit Navigation Navigation Navigation GPS <1/2> interface

failed. Check NAV unit or database mismatch database not yet database expired failed
wiring. effective
NAV source has lost NAV source is Multiple GI 275 units Preloaded database Navigation GPS source has
communication reporting failed have different NAV is not activated on database has lost communication
database expirations the system expired
GPS source is
reporting failed

Verify NAV source Troubleshoot in Update databases Activate databases: Update to the Verify GPS source is ON and
is on and not accordance with across all units to Follow system current database has a clear view of the sky
reporting failed NAV unit the same date prompts version
maintenance
manual Verify configuration settings
Verify configuration
settings Verify configuration Inspect GPS antenna, wiring
settings and connections
Inspect NAV wiring Inspect NAV wiring

and connections and connections
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-8 NAV Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-14
Miscellaneous Alert
Messages
SafeTaxi database SafeTaxi database

expired not yet effective
Log Message Log Message
SafeTaxi database SafeTaxi database

expired is not yet effective
Cause Cause
SafeTaxi database Preloaded database

has expired is not activated on
the system
Corrective Corrective
Action Action
Update database to Activate databases:

the current version follow system
prompts
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-9 Miscellaneous GI 275 Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-15
External LRU
Alert Messages
Crosstalk error <External LRU> Service required Service soon Service soon
service required

GEA <1/2/3/4> did not GTX 345 reports System configuration module
Crosstalk Error
accept configuration config module has failed or is missing
needs service
Cause Cause Cause Cause
Interfacing LRU is not powered System ID set on GI 275 GEA configuration Configuration module
is different from that on settings were not not installed correctly
Interfacing LRU not configured
the external LRU accepted
properly Configuration module
Interfacing LRU does not have has failed
compatible software version
Incorrect wiring

Verify power to unit Ensure configured Verify GEA Troubleshoot in Verify configuration
System ID on GI 275 configuration accordance with the module wiring
and external LRU are settings GTX 3X5
Verify configuration settings the same maintenance
manual Replace
configuration
module
Verify proper software version
Verify wiring
If fault persists,
contact Garmin.
Figure 7-10 External LRU Alert Message Troubleshooting

Rev. 14 Page 7-16
7.2 Additional Troubleshooting
If necessary, perform the following troubleshooting steps:
1. The GI 275 air/ground logic must be on-ground when making any configuration changes or
attempting to load software. If the system is in-air while attempting system configuration changes
or software loads, system failures will occur. For example, an air data test set can trigger an
unexpected in-air state. Ensure:
a. GPS ground speed must be less than 30kts. Using a GPS repeater can create issues with the
GPS system switching between satellite acquisition from an outside signal and the repeater
signal causing false GPS ground speed readings.
b. For units with EIS, the RPM readings must be 0 RPM while entering Configuration mode.
2. Ensure every GI 275 is in Configuration mode prior to making any configuration change.
3. Ensure every unit in the system has matching software.

Rev. 14 Page 7-17
7.3 Interpreting Flight Data Logs
Table 7-1 Flight Data Log Descriptions
Logged
Parameter Units Definition
Name
Local Date Lcl Date #yyy-mm-dd
Local Time Lcl Time hh:mm:ss
UTC Offset (Lcl Time = UTC Time +
UTC Offset UTCOfst hh:mm
UTC Offset)
Active Waypoint AtvWpt ident Text identifier for FMS waypoint
From selected GPS source or
Latitude Position Latitude DEG backup GPS (backup is used if 1 and
2 are invalid)
Longitude Position Longitude DEG backup GPS (backup is used if 1 and
2 are invalid)
Indicated Barometric Altitude AltB ft Displayed value
Selected Barometric Pressure
BaroA inHg Displayed value
Setting
GPS Altitude Relative To
AltMSL ft Selected GPS
Mean Sea Level
Outside Air Temperature OAT C Selected ADC
Indicated Airspeed IAS kts Selected ADC
Ground Speed GndSpd kts backup GPS (backup is used if 1 and
2 are invalid)
Vertical Speed VSpd ft/min Selected ADC
Attitude Pitch Angle Pitch DEG Selected AHRS
Attitude Roll Angle Roll DEG Selected AHRS
Selected AHRS, relative to aircraft
Lateral (Y) Acceleration LatAc g's
body, right is positive
Selected AHRS, relative to aircraft
Vertical (Z) Acceleration NormAc g's
body, up is positive
Magnetic or True Heading depending
Heading HDG DEG
on pilot selection
Magnetic or True Track depending
Track TRK DEG
on pilot selection
Battery #1 Volts volt1 V Measurement taken from GEA
Battery #2 Volts volt2 V Measurement taken from GEA
Battery #1 Amps amp1 A Measurement taken from GEA
Battery #2 Amps amp2 A Measurement taken from GEA
DC Bus #1 Volts bus1volts V Measurement taken from GEA
DC Bus #2 Volts bus2volts V Measurement taken from GEA
Alternator #1 Amps alt1amps A Measurement taken from GEA
Alternator #2 Amps alt2amps A Measurement taken from GEA
Fuel quantity in gallons.
Left Fuel Quantity FQtyL gl
Measurement taken from GEA

Rev. 14 Page 7-18
Center Fuel Quantity FQtyC gl
Right Fuel Quantity FQtyR gl
Left Fuel Quantity FQtyLlbs lb Measurement taken from GEA
Center Fuel Quantity FQtyClbs lb Measurement taken from GEA
Right Fuel Quantity FQtyRlbs lb Measurement taken from GEA
Aux #1 Fuel Quantity FQtyAux1 gl
Aux #2 Fuel Quantity FQtyAux2 gl
Aux #1 Fuel Quantity FQtyA1lbs lbs Measurement taken from GEA
Aux #2 Fuel Quantity FQtyA2lbs lbs Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Fuel Flow E1 FFlow gl/h Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Fuel Pressure E1 FPres PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Oil Temperature E1 OilT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Oil Pressure E1 OilP PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Manifold Pressure E1 MAP inHg Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 Revolutions Per
E1 RPM RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Minute
May be calculated depending on
Engine #1 Power Percent E1 %Pwr %
aircraft configuration
Engine #1, Cylinder Head
E1 CHT1 DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature #1
Temperature #2
Temperature #3
Temperature #4
Temperature #5
Temperature #6
E1 CHT CLD DEG F/min Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature Cooling Rate
Engine #1, Exhaust Gas
E1 EGT1 DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature #1
Temperature #2
Temperature #3
Temperature #4
Temperature #5

Rev. 14 Page 7-19
Temperature #6
Engine #1 Carburetor
E1 CarbT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
Engine #2 Carburetor
E2 CarbT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
Engine #1 Turbine #1 Inlet
E1 TIT1 DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
Engine #2 Turbine #1 Inlet
E2 TIT1 DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
Engine #1 Compressor Inlet
E1 IAT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Air Temperature
Engine #1 Compressor
E1 CDT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Discharge Temperature
Engine #1 Primary Exhaust
E1 PEGT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Gas Temperature
Engine #1 Torque E1 Torq PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #1 RPM Power
E1 NP RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Turbine
Engine #1 RPM % Generator
E1 NG RPM RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Turbine (Compressor Turbine)
Engine #1 Inter Turbine
E1 ITT DEG C Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
Engine #1 Outside Air Engine #1 Outside Air Temperature.
E1 OAT DEG C
Temperature Measurement from GEA
Engine #2 Outside Air Engine #2 Outside Air Temperature.
E2 OAT DEG C
Temperature Measurement from GEA
Engine #2 Fuel Flow E2 FFlow gl/h Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 Fuel Pressure E2 FPres PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 Oil Temperature E2 OilT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 Oil Pressure E2 OilP PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 Manifold Pressure E2 MAP inHg Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 Revolutions Per
E2 RPM RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Minute
May be calculated depending on
Engine #2 Power Percent E2 %Pwr %
aircraft configuration
Temperature #1
Temperature #2
Temperature #3
Temperature #4
Temperature #5

Rev. 14 Page 7-20
Temperature #6
E2 CHT CLD DEG F/min Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature Cooling Rate
Temperature #1
Temperature #2
Temperature #3
Temperature #4
Temperature #5
Temperature #6
Engine #2 Compressor Inlet
E2 IAT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Air Temperature
Engine #2 Compressor
E2 CDT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Discharge Temperature
Engine #2 Primary Exhaust
E2 PEGT DEG F Measurement taken from GEA
Gas Temperature
Engine #2 Torque E2 Torq PSI Measurement taken from GEA
Engine #2 RPM Power
E2 NP RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Turbine
Engine #2 RPM % Generator
E2 NG RPM RPM Measurement taken from GEA
Turbine (Compressor Turbine)
Engine #2 Inter Turbine
E2 ITT DEG C Measurement taken from GEA
Temperature
WGS84 GPS Altitude AltGPS ft Selected GPS source
True Airspeed TAS kts Selected ADC
Active navigation source on the HSI
HSI Source HSIS enum
page: NAV1, NAV2, GPS1, GPS2
Magnetic or True Selected Course
Selected Course CRS DEG
depending on pilot selection
#1 Navigation Radio
NAV1 MHz
Frequency
#2 Navigation Radio
NAV2 MHz
Frequency
Horizontal CDI HCDI fsd Active VOR/LOC full scale deflection
Vertical CDI VCDI fsd GS vertical full scale deflection
Wind Speed WndSpd kts
Wind Direction WndDr DEG Relative to true north
Distance to Next Waypoint WptDst nm
Magnetic or True Bearing to Next
Bearing to Next Waypoint WptBrg DEG Waypoint depending on pilot
selection

Rev. 14 Page 7-21
Magnetic Variation MagVar DEG
0: Autopilot not engaged
Autopilot is engaged? AfcsOn boolean
1: Autopilot engaged
Abbreviated text of autopilot roll
Autopilot Roll Mode RollM enum
mode
Abbreviated text of autopilot pitch
Autopilot Pitch Mode PitchM enum
mode
Autopilot Flight Director Roll Relative or absolute based on
FDRollC DEG
Command autopilot mode
Autopilot Flight Director Pitch Relative or absolute based on
FDPitchC DEG
Command autopilot mode
GPS Vertical Speed VSpdG ft/min Selected GPS
Selected GPS
ForcNO: Selected GPS must be
re-initialized
NoSoln: No GPS solution
2D: 2D solution
3D: 3D solution
GPS Fix GPSfix enum
2DDiff: 2D differential solution
3DDiff: 3D differential solution
DRGPS: Dead Reckoning based on
last known GPS position
DRWAAS: Dead Reckoning based
on last known WAAS position
GPS Horizontal Alert Limit HAL mt Selected GPS
GPS Vertical Alert Limit VAL mt Selected GPS
WAAS GPS Horizontal
HPLwas mt Selected GPS
Protection Level
GPS Horizontal Protection
HPLfd mt Selected GPS
Level
WAAS GPS Vertical
VPLwas mt Selected GPS
Protection Level
Pressure Altitude AltPress ft Selected ADC
GPS Sattelites Used GPSSat # Configured GPS 1
GPS Vertical Dilution of
GPSVdop # Configured GPS 1
Precision
GPS Velocity (East) GPSVelE ft/min Configured GPS 1
GPS Velocity (North) GPSVelN ft/min Configured GPS 1
GPS Velocity (Up) GPSVelU ft/min Configured GPS 1
GPS Horizontal Dilution of
GPSHdop # Configured GPS 1
Precision
Turn Rate TurnRate DEG/second
Slip Skid SlipSkid DEG Positive is right of center
Magnetic or True Selected Heading
Selected Heading SelHDG DEG

Rev. 14 Page 7-22
Magnetic or True Selected Track
Selected Track SelTrk DEG
Selected Altitude SelAlt ft
Selected Vertical Speed SelVspd ft/min
Selected Airspeed SelAspd kt
Activenavigation source on the CDI:
Navigation Source NavSource enum GPS1, GPS2, VLOC1, VLOC2,
INVLD
Vertical Navigation Deviation VnavDev ft Deviation from VNAV path
Vertical Navigation Path Angle VnavPAng DEG
Vertical Navigation Altitude VnavAlt ft
AP_off: Autopilot is off
AP_eng: Autopilot is engaged
Autopilot State ApState enum
AP_fail: Autopilot is failed
AP_inv: Autopilot is unknown state
YD_off: Yaw Damper is off
YD_eng: Yaw Damper is engaged
Yaw Damper State YdState enum YD_fail: Yaw Damper is failed
YD_inv: Yaw Damper is unknown
state
Flight Director Target Altitude FdTrgtAlt ft
Relative or absolute based on
Autopilot Roll Command ApRollCmd DEG
autopilot mode
Relative or absolute based on
Autopilot Pitch Command ApPitCmd DEG
autopilot mode
Autopilot Vertical Speed
ApVsCmd ft/min
Command
Autopilot Roll Torque where 100% is
Autopilot Roll Torque ApRollTrq %
60 in-lb for a GFC 500 system
Autopilot Pitch Torque where 100%
Autopilot Pitch Torque ApPitTrq %
is 60 in-lb for a GFC 500 system
Autopilot Roll Trim Torque where
ApRollTrimTr
Autopilot Roll Trim Torque % 100% is 60 in-lb for a GFC 500
q
system
Autopilot Pitch Trim Torque where
Autopilot Pitch Trim Torque ApPitTrimTrq % 100% is 60 in-lb for a GFC 500
system
Autopilot Yaw Torque where 100% is
Autopilot Yaw Torque ApYawTrq %
60 in-lb for a GFC 500 system
LCD Temperature LCDTemp DEG C LCD Temperature
Aircraft Power AcftPower V Aircraft Power measured at GI 275
Battery Status BattStatus enum Internal Garmin use
Battery Charge BattCharge % GI 275 Battery Charge
Autopilot Monitor and Fault
ApFlags # Internal Garmin use
Flags
Autopilot Disengage Cause ApDisCause enum Various

Rev. 14 Page 7-23
Yaw Damper Monitor and
YdFlags # Internal Garmin use
Fault Flags
Yaw Damper Disengage
YdDisCause enum Various
Cause
See Pilot’s Guide Section 6.5 AFCS
Flight Director Lat Mode FdLatMode enum
System Architecture
See Pilot’s Guide Section 6.5 AFCS
Flight Director Vert Mode FdVertMode enum
System Architecture
Autopilot Altitude Command ApAltCmd ft Internal Garmin use
Envelope Protection Status EpStatus enum Roll, Pitch, IAS, Mach
CAN Status CanStatus # Internal Garmin use

Rev. 14 Page 7-24
APPENDIX A CONNECTORS AND PIN FUNCTION
A.1 GI 275 ..............................................................................................................................................A-2

A.2 GEA 24/GEA 24B ........................................................................................................................... A-4
A.3 GTP 59............................................................................................................................................. A-8
A.4 GSB 15............................................................................................................................................. A-8
This appendix contains connector information and a description of pin functions for all LRUs installed as
part of this manual and the GI 275 STC, with exception of the EIS sensors.
Refer to the LRU TSO installation manuals listed in Table 1-1 for more detailed signal information on each
LRU and manufacturer documentation for EIS sensor information.
All D-sub connectors follow a similar pin numbering scheme. Numbered layouts (as seen while looking at
the LRU) are provided for each connector in the orientation that it appears on the unit. Because
installations can vary, ensure the correct orientation of the connector and pins.

Rev. 14 Page A-1
A.1 GI 275
The GI 275 Base has a D-sub connector and a BNC connector. The mating designators, part numbers, and
associated connector kits are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 GI 275 Unit Connectors

Ref. Des. Description Connector P/N Kit P/N
J2751 Conn, Female, HD D-Sub, 78 Ckt 330-00366-78 011-04809-00
GPS BNC, Male Supplied with antenna
Figure A-1 GI 275 Connector

Rev. 14 Page A-2
60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Figure A-2 GI 275 J2751/P2751 Connector (Looking at Unit)
Table A-2 J2751/P2751 Connector

Pin Function I/O Pin Function I/O
1 CONFIG MODULE GROUND -- 40 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
2 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN 41 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
3 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN 42 LIGHTING BUS LO IN
4 DISCRETE OUT 1 LO OUT 43 DISCRETE OUT 2* OUT
5 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE LO IN 44 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE HI IN
6 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION +UP IN 45 GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN IN
7 LATERAL -FLAG IN 46 ETHERNET OUT 1A OUT
8 ETHERNET OUT 2A OUT 47 ETHERNET OUT 1B OUT
9 ETHERNET OUT 2B OUT 48 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO OUT
10 OBS STATOR F OUT 49 RS-485 A I/O
11 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG IN 50 TO/FROM +FLAG IN IN
12 DISCRETE IN 4 LO IN 51 SPARE GROUND --
13 OBS ROTOR H IN 52 ARINC 429 IN 1A IN
14 ARINC 429 IN 2B IN 53 ARINC 429 IN 3A IN
15 ARINC 429 IN 4B IN 54 SPARE GROUND --
16 ARINC 429 OUT 1A OUT 55 ARINC 429 OUT 1B OUT
17 SPARE GROUND -- 56 SPARE GROUND --
18 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 57 RS-232 IN 1 IN
19 LRU GROUND -- 58 USB DATA HI I/O
20 LRU POWER OUT 59 USB GROUND --
21 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT 60 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
22 LIGHTING BUS HI IN 61 AIRCRAFT GROUND --
23 DISCRETE IN 1 LO IN 62 DISCRETE IN 2 LO IN
24 DISCRETE OUT 3 LO OUT 63 DISCRETE IN 3 LO IN
25 LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT IN 64 LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT IN
26 LATERAL +FLAG IN 65 ETHERNET IN 1A IN
27 ETHERNET IN 2A IN 66 ETHERNET IN 1B IN
28 ETHERNET IN 2B IN 67 OBS STATOR G IN
29 OBS STATOR D OUT 68 OBS STATOR E OUT
30 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI OUT 69 RS-485 B I/O
31 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG IN 70 SPARE GROUND --
32 TO/FROM -FLAG IN 71 OBS ROTOR C IN
35 ARINC 429 OUT 2A OUT 74 ARINC 429 OUT 2B OUT
36 SPARE GROUND -- 75 SPARE GROUND --
37 RS-232 IN 2 IN 76 RS-232 2 GROUND --
38 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT 77 RS-232 1 GROUND --
39 USB DATA LO I/O 78 USB VBUS POWER OUT

Rev. 14 Page A-3
A.2 GEA 24/GEA 24B
The GEA 24(B) has four connectors. The mating designators, part numbers, and associated connector kits
are listed in Table A-3.
Table A-3 GI 275 - GEA 24/GEA 24B

Ref. Des. Description Connector P/N Kit P/N
J241 Conn, Male, D-Sub, 9 Ckt 330-00625-09 011-01855-00
J242 Conn, Female, D-Sub, 25 Ckt 330-00624-25 011-01855-02
GEA 24 UNIT
011-02848-00
J243
J242
J244
J241
Figure A-3 GEA 24/GEA 24B Connectors

Rev. 14 Page A-4
Figure A-4 GEA 24/GEA 24B J241/P241 Connector (Looking at Unit)

Pin Function I/O
1 CAN HI I/O
2 CAN LO I/O
3 RESERVED --
4 RS-232 RX IN
5 RS-232 TX OUT
6 GROUND --
7 AIRCRAFT POWER 1 IN
8 AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IN
9 GROUND --

1 RESERVED -- 14 CHT 6 HI / CHT 2 RESIST HI IN
2 CHT 6 LO / CHT 2 RESIST LO IN 15 EGT 6 HI IN
3 EGT 6 LO IN 16 CHT 5 / CHT 1 RESISTIVE HI IN
4 CHT 5 LO / CHT 1 RESIST LO IN 17 EGT 5 HI IN
5 EGT 5 LO IN 18 CHT 4 HI IN
6 CHT 4 LO IN 19 EGT 4 HI IN
13 EGT 1 LO IN

Rev. 14 Page A-5

1 FUEL PRESS GROUND -- 20 FUEL XDCR GROUND_1 --
FUEL RETURN (shared w/Pin 37,
2 FUEL PRESS IN 21 IN
J244 connector)
3 FUEL PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 22 FUEL XDCR GROUND_2
FUEL FLOW (shared w/Pin 36, J244
4 FUEL PRESS XDCR +5V OUT 23 IN
connector)
5 RPM XDCR GROUND_2 -- 24 FUEL XDCR +12V_1 OUT
6 RPM 2 IN 25 FUEL XDCR +12V_2 OUT
7 RPM XDCR GROUND_1 -- 26 GP +5V_1 OUT
8 RPM 1 IN 27 GP GROUND_1 --
9 RPM XDCR +12V_1 OUT 28 POS 7 / MISC TEMP 2 LO IN
10 RPM XDCR +12V_2 OUT 29 POS 7 / MISC TEMP 2 HI IN
11 RESERVED / SPARE IN 30 POS 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO IN
12 MANIFOLD PRESS GROUND -- 31 POS 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI IN
13 MANIFOLD PRESS IN 32 OIL TEMP LO IN
14 MANIFOLD PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 33 OIL TEMP HI IN
SHUNT 2 LO (shared w/Pin 47, J244
15 MANIFOLD PRESS XDCR +5V OUT 34 IN
connector)
SHUNT 2 HI (shared w/Pin 46, J244
16 OIL PRESS GROUND -- 35 IN
connector)
17 OIL PRESS HI IN 36 SHUNT 1 LO IN
18 OIL PRESS XDCR +12V OUT 37 SHUNT 1 HI IN
19 OIL PRESS XDCR +5V OUT

Rev. 14 Page A-6

1 SYSTEM ID 1A* IN 26 GP GROUND_2 --
2 SYSTEM ID 1B / GROUND -- 27 GP +5V_3 OUT
3 RESERVED -- 28 VOLTS 2 IN
4 RESERVED -- 29 GP GROUND 3 --
5 FUEL QTY +5V_1 OUT 30 POS 5 HI / +5V OUT
6 FUEL QTY 1 IN 31 POS 5 / MISC PRESS IN
7 FUEL QTY 1 GROUND -- 32 POS 5 LO / GROUND --
8 FUEL QTY +5V_2 OUT 33 CAN2_L I/O
9 FUEL QTY 2 IN 34 FUEL QTY +12V 1 OUT
10 FUEL QTY 2 GROUND -- 35 FUEL QTY +12V 2 OUT
11 POS 3 HI / +5V_3 OUT 36 RESERVED IN
12 POS 3 / GP 3 / FUEL QTY 3 IN 37 RESERVED IN
13 POS 3 LO / GROUND -- 38 RESERVED --
14 POS 4 HI / +5V_4 OUT 39 RESERVED --
15 POS 4 / GP 4 / FUEL QTY 4 IN 40 DISCRETE IN 1** IN
16 POS 4 LO / GROUND -- 41 DISCRETE IN 2** IN
17 CAN2_H I/O 42 DISCRETE IN 3** IN
18 GP1 HI / +5V OUT 43 DISCRETE IN 4** IN
DISCRETE OUT 1* /
19 GP1 / POS 1 IN 44 IN
MASTER WARNING
DISCRETE OUT 2* /
20 GP1 LO / GROUND -- 45 IN
MASTER CAUTION
SHUNT 2 HI (shared w/Pin 35,
21 GP2 HI / +5V OUT 46 IN
J243 connector)
SHUNT 2 LO (shared w/Pin 34,
22 GP2 / POS 2 IN 47 IN
J243 connector)
23 GP2 LO / GOURND -- 48 RESERVED / SPARE 1 IN
24 GP +5V_2 OUT 49 RESERVED / SPARE 2 IN
25 VOLTS 1 IN 50 GP +12V OUT
*Indicates Active-Low
**Can be configured as Active-High or Active-Low

Rev. 14 Page A-7
A.3 GTP 59
The GTP 59 Temperature Probe does not have a connector. Rather, a 3-conductor shielded cable extends
from the sensor for interface with the GEA.
Table A-8 3-Conductor Shielded Cable

Conductor Color Name I/O
WHITE PROBE POWER LEAD IN
BLUE RESISTIVE ELEMENT HI OUT
ORANGE RESISTIVE ELEMENT LO OUT
A.4 GSB 15
The GSB 15 has a 6-pin connector in either a rear or side position. The connector designation (P201 or
P202) is dependent on the part number but the pin numbers and functions are identical (refer to Table A-9).
P201, GSB 15 Rear Unit P202, GSB 15 Side Unit

P/N 011-04937-00, -20, -40 P/N 011-04937-01, -30, -50
Figure A-8 GSB 15 Connectors
Table A-9 J201/P201 & J202/P202

Pin Function I/O
1 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
2 USB DN I/O
3 USB DP I/O
4 USB GND --
5 BACKLIGHT ENABLE IN
6 POWER GROUND --

Rev. 14 Page A-8
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect ................. B-3
Figure B-2 GPS Interconnect ............................................................................................................... B-5
Figure B-3 NAV Interconnect.............................................................................................................. B-6
Figure B-4 Analog CDI Interconnect................................................................................................... B-8
Figure B-5 GEA 24(B) Power Interconnect......................................................................................... B-9
Figure B-6 GEA 24(B) Sensor Interconnect ...................................................................................... B-10
Figure B-7 Audio Interconnect .......................................................................................................... B-19
Figure B-8 Annunciators.................................................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-9 GDL 69 Series Interconnect ............................................................................................ B-21
Figure B-10 Radar Altimeter Interconnect .......................................................................................... B-22
Figure B-11 Stormscope Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-23
Figure B-12 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect............................................................................. B-24
Figure B-13 GSB 15 Interconnect........................................................................................................ B-27
Figure B-14 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect.......................................................................... B-28
Figure B-15 GDL 60 Remote Aircraft Status Interconnect ................................................................. B-29

Rev. 14 Page B-1
GENERAL NOTES
[1] ALL WIRES 24 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
[2] AT GI 275, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE
SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS
GOING TO AIRCRAFT GROUND MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
[3] USE APPROVED ETHERNET CABLES LISTED IN SECTION 3.1.2 FOR ALL HSDB
CONNECTIONS.
[4] PINS OR PORTS THAT ARE MARKED WITH “x” OR “X” INDICATE THERE IS NO
SINGLE RECOMMENDED CONNECTION, FIND AN AVAILABLE PORT/PIN TO USE.
PIN/PORT CONNECTIONS WILL VARY DEPENDING ON INSTALLATION.
[5] THE UNSHIELDED PORTION OF ALL SHIELDED WIRES AT THE CONNECTORS
MUST BE 2.5 INCHES OR LESS IN TOTAL LENGTH, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED.
LEGEND
~ REPRESENTS INTERCHANGEABLE PIN OR PORT WITH SIMILAR FUNCTIONING PIN OR
PORT. SEE APPENDIX A FOR PIN DESCRIPTION. PINS OR PORTS WITHOUT ~ MUST BE
CONNECTED AS SHOWN.
EXAMPLES INCLUDE:
~ DISCRETE IN 7* → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE ‘DISCRETE IN’ CAN BE USED.
~ RS-232 6 → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT CAN BE USED.
~ GEN PURP → INDICATES ANY AVAILABLE GENERAL PURPOSE PORT CAN BE USED.
* REPRESENTS ACTIVE-LOW PIN.
s SHIELD GROUND BLOCK DESIGNATOR.
AIRFRAME GROUND DESIGNATOR.

Rev. 14 Page B-2
GI 275
P2751 1
CONFIG MODULE PWR 21 28 AWG RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 1 28 AWG BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 40 28 AWG YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 60 28 AWG WHT 2
LIGHTING BUS HI 22
LIGHTING BUS LO 42 2
OUT A 46
OUT B 47
~ETHERNET 1 IN A 65 5
IN B 66
s 3
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 3 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT POWER 1 2 22 AWG 4
3
AIRCRAFT GND 41 22 AWG
AIRCRAFT GND 61 22 AWG
DATA HI 58 GRN
DATA LO 39 WHT
USB USB
VBUS POWER 78 RED
GROUND 59 BLK 6 7
s
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect
Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page B-3
NOTES
CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1 CONNECTOR USING 28 AWG
1 WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH THE CONFIGURATION MODULE MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS TO P1.
2 OPTIONAL LIGHTING BUS CONNECTION (28 VDC, 14 VDC, 5 VDC, OR 5 VAC).
WIRE GAUGE SHOWN FOR POWER AND GROUND LENGTH LESS THAN 20 FEET. FOR POWER AND
3 GROUNDS GREATER THAN 20 FEET, REFER TO AC 43.13-1B, CHAPTER 11 TO DETERMINE THE
APPROPRIATE WIRE GAUGE.
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 IS FOR WIRING WITH INDEPENDENT POWER BUSSES AND IS NOT REQUIRED. REFER
4 TO SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
5 REFER TO SECTION 3.2.5 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE.
P/N 325-00238-02 CABLE ASSY, USB-A RECPT TO PIGTAIL, 48” INCLUDED WITH GI 275 CONNECTOR KIT.
THE USB CONNECTOR IS FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES ONLY AND MUST BE CAPPED AND STOWED
6 PRIOR TO RETURNING THE AIRCRAFT TO SERVICE. PROTECT THE USB CONNECTOR SUCH THAT THE
USB CONNECTOR OPENING IS COMPLETELY COVERED. THEN SECURE THE USB CONNECTOR FOR
FUTURE MAINTENANCE ACCESS.
A GSB 15 USB DATABASE AND CHARGING HUB CAN BE INSTALLED IN PLACE OF THE USB PIGTAIL. REFER
7 TO FIGURE B-13.
Figure B-1 GI 275 - Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB, USB Interconnect
Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page B-4
GPS SOURCE
GARMIN 4
GI 275
GPS 400W
GNX 375 GPS 175 GTX GTN 6XX/7XX GNS 480 GNC 420W GPS 500W
GNC 355 3X5 GTN Xi GNS 430W GNS 530W
P2751 2 P3751 P3752 PXX51 P3251 P1001 P1002 P1 P5 P4001 P5001
OUT A 46 - 4 11 - - 15 - - - - ETHERNET IN A
OUT B 47 - 19 33 - - 16 - - - - ETHERNET IN B
~ETHERNET 1 IN A 65 - 3 10 - - 17 - - - - ETHERNET OUT A
IN B 66 - 18 32 - - 18 - - - - ETHERNET OUT B
s s
IN 57 - - - 7 - - 5 - 56 56 RS232 OUT (MAPMX)

~RS-232 1 GROUND 1
GND 77 - - - 50 - - 23 - GND GND
s
3
A 52 - - - - - - - 4 46 46 GPS 429 OUT A (GAMA 429/
~ARINC 429 IN 1 GPS 429 OUT B 429 NO FP)
B 33 - - - - - - - 24 47 47
s
A 16 - - - - - - - 8 48 48 GPS 429 IN A (GARMIN

~ARINC 429 OUT 1 GPS 429 IN B
B 55 - - - - - - - 28 49 49 GDU)
s
BACKUP
BNC CONNECTOR GPS ANTENNA
NOTES
1 FOR PINS IDENTIFIED WITH “GND”, CONNECT WIRE TO GROUND AT THE REAR OF THE UNIT.
3 SPLICES AT THE NAVIGATOR MAY BE REQUIRED FOR RS-232 AND ARINC 429 LINES.
IF NOT ENOUGH ARINC 429 CONNECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE SYSTEM, THE GENERIC MAPMX FORMAT MAY BE USED WITH ONLY THE RS-232 CONNECTION FROM THE
4 GNS 4XXW/5XXW OR GNS 480. REFER TO SECTION 5.5.5.
Figure B-2 GPS Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-5
GI 275 NAVIGATOR
GARMIN HONEYWELL (BENDIX/KING) COLLINS
GTN 6XX/7XX GNS 480 GNS 430W GNS 530W SL30 KN 53 KX 170B KX 155A/165A KX 155/165 VIR-32/33
GTN Xi GNC 255() KX 175B
P2751
P1002 P5 P4006 P5006 P2001 37-Pin P532 P171 P155A1 P155A2 P401 P901 P1 P2
P165A1 P165A2
1
A 72 - 6 5 24 24 - - - - - - - - - - VOR/ILS 429 OUT A
~ARINC 429 IN 2
B 14 - 25 23 23 - - - - - - - - - - VOR/ILS 429 OUT B
s
OUT 18 - - - - 16 4 - - - - - - - - RXD1
~RS-232 2 IN 37 - - - - 1 5 - - - - - - - - TXD1
GND 76 - - - - 31 3 - - - - - - - - SERIAL GROUND
s
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE HI 44 - - - - - - B 3 H - H - - 24 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE LO 5 - - - - - - 15 GND GND - GND - - 26 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT LO
s
2 2 2
GLIDESLOPE DEV +UP 6 - - - - - - P - - 15 / S - 15 / S 5 - GS DEVIATION +UP
5 GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN 45 - - - - - - 14 - - 16 / T - 16 / T 1 - GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
3
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 11 - - - - - - 13 - - 17 / U - 17 / U 17 - GS +FLAG
5 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 31 - - - - - - R - - 14 / R - 14 / R - - GS -FLAG
s
4 4
DISCRETE IN 4 LO 12 - - - - - - 12 4 8 - 8 - - 40 ILS ENERGIZE
- - - - - - - 19 - - - - - - ILS COMMON
Figure B-3 NAV Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 14 Page B-6
NOTES
1 FOR GNC NAVIGATORS, CONNECT ALL SHIELDS TO SHIELD BLOCK GROUND, NOT AIRFRAME GROUND.
THE NAV RECEIVER DOES NOT PROVIDE A VLOC COMPOSITE LO PIN. CONNECT THE VLOC COMPOSITE
2 LO WIRE FROM THE GDU TO GROUND AT THE NAV RECEIVER.
KX 170B / KX 175B DO NOT HAVE A GLIDESLOPE OUTPUT. USE A SEPARATE GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER TO
3 DRIVE THESE INPUTS ON THE GDU.
KX155/165 NAV UNITS HAVE DUAL GLIDESLOPE OUTPUTS. USE “NUMBERED” OR LETTERED PINS, NOT
4 BOTH. WHENEVER POSSIBLE, USE AN UNUSED SET OF PINS.
GLIDESLOPE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED IF THE NAV RECEIVER CONTAINS THE OPTIONAL
5 GLIDESLOPE RECEIVER.
THE GTN 6XX/7XX AND GTN Xi UTILIZE THE SAME INTERFACE SHOWN IN THE GPS INTERCONNECT;
6 THEREFORE, NOT SHOWN IN THE NAV INTERCONNECT.
Figure B-3 NAV Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 14 Page B-7
GI 275 Garmin
NAVIGATOR
1
GTN 6XX/7XX GNS GNS
GTN Xi 5XX 4XX
P2751 P1004 P5006 P4006
LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT 25 5 5 5 LATERAL +LEFT

LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT 64 6 6 6 LATERAL +RIGHT
s
LATERAL +FLAG 26 3 3 3 LATERAL +FLAG
LATERAL -FLAG 7 4 4 4 LATERAL -FLAG
s
TO/FROM +FLAG 50 1 1 1 +TO
TO/FROM -FLAG 32 2 2 2 +FROM
s
GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION +UP 6 34 32 32 GS DEVIATION +UP
GLIDESLOPE DEV +DOWN 45 55 31 31 GS DEVIATION + DOWN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 11 32 30 30 GS +FLAG
GLIDESLOPE -FLAG 31 53 31 31 GS -FLAG
s
OBS STATOR D 29 13 13 13 OBS RESOLVER D
OBS STATOR E 68 11 11 11 OBS RESOLVER E
s
OBS STATOR F 10 12 12 12 OBS RESOLVER F
OBS STATOR G 67 14 11 11 OBS RESOLVER G
s
OBS ROTOR C 71 9 9 9 OBS RESOLVER C
OBS ROTOR H 13 10 10 10 OBS RESOLVER H
s
NOTES
THIS INTERCONNECT SHOWS ANALOG NAVIGATION CONNECTIONS. THIS ANALOG INTERCONNECT IS NOT USED IF THE NAVIGATOR IS WIRED USING COMPOSITE OR
1 DIGITAL NAV AS SHOWN IN FIGURE B-3.
Figure B-4 Analog CDI Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-8
GI 275 GEA 24/GEA 24B
P2751 P241
OUT 38 4 IN
RS-232 1 IN 57 5 OUT RS-232 1
GND 77 9 GND
s s
1 7 POWER IN 1
6 GROUND
NOTES
1 REFER TO SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
Figure B-5 GEA 24(B) Power Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-9
(494-70008-00)
GEA 24/GEA 24B
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
K TYPE
J TYPE
ALCOR
86252
3 3 4
P242
2 CHT 1 HI 24 YEL YEL WHT
CHT 1 LO 12 RED RED RED
(494-70001-00)
NIST ITS-90
K TYPE
ALCOR
86255
3 3
EGT 1 HI 25 YEL YEL

2 EGT 1 LO 13 RED RED
(494-30029-03) or
(011-04202-20 /
(011-04202-10 /
(494-30029-01)
011-05783-20)
011-05783-10)
T1EU70D-CS
T1EU70G-CS
T1EU35G-CS
GARMIN
GARMIN
UMA
UMA
P243
7 12
FUEL PRESS XCDR +5V 4 - - RED RED
FUEL PRESS XCDR +12V 3 RED RED - -
FUEL PRESS RX 2 WHT WHT GRN GRN
FUEL PRESS GND 1 BLK BLK BLK BLK
s
(011-04202-00 /
(494-30029-02)
011-05783-00)
T1EU50A-CS
GARMIN
UMA
MAN PRESS XCDR +5V 15 - RED

MAN PRESS XCDR +12V 14 RED -
MANIFOLD PRESS RX 13 WHT GRN
MAN PRESS GND 12 BLK BLK
s
(011-04202-30 /
(494-30029-04)
T1EU150G-CS
011-05783-30)
102-389017-3
GARMIN
BEECH
UMA
OIL PRESS XCDR +5V 19 - RED -

OIL PRESS XCDR +12V 18 RED - -
OIL PRESS RX 17 WHT GRN HI
OIL PRESS GND 16 BLK BLK LO
s
11
Figure B-6 GEA 24(B) Sensor Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-10
CARB
GEA 24/GEA 24B TEMP
TIT 1 CDT IAT PRIMARY EGT
(494-70002-00)
(494-70001-00)
(494-70010-00)
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
NIST ITS-90
T3B10-SG
ALCOR
ALCOR
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
K TYPE
K-TYPE
J TYPE
86245
86255
MS28034
UMA
3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3
14 P243
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI 31 YEL A YEL YEL YEL YEL YEL WHT YEL WHT
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO 30 RED B RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED
~GP GROUND 1 27
5
OAT 21
Garmin
GTP 59
18
14
GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 HI 31 BLU

GP 6 / MISC TEMP 1 LO 30 ORG
s
CAP AND WHT
STOW
(494-70009-00)
NIST ITS-90
T3B3-2.5G
K-TYPE
MS28034
UMA
3 3
OIL TEMP HI 33 YEL YEL A

OIL TEMP LO 32 RED RED B
~GP GROUND 1 27
5
102-389012-11
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
~FUEL XDCR +12V 1 24 RED RED RED RED A
~FUEL FLOW RX 23 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
~FUEL XDCR GND 1 20 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
(494-10001-00)
(494-10001-01)
102-389012-11
FLOSCAN
FLOSCAN
BEECH
201B-6
FT-60
FT-90
231
EI
EI
12
~FUEL XDCR +12V 2 25 RED RED RED RED A
~FUEL RETURN RX 21 WHT WHT WHT WHT B
~FUEL XDCR GND 2 22 BLK BLK BLK BLK C
s
T1A9-1
T1A9-2
UMA
UMA
1
12
~RPM XDCR +12V 1 9 ORG/WHT ORG/WHT
~RPM 1 RX 8 WHT WHT
~RPM XDCR GND 1 7 BLU/WHT BLU/WHT
s
OR
RPM 1 RX 8 10 (LEFT MAG P-LEAD)
s
9
8
RPM 2 RX 6 10 (RIGHT MAG P-LEAD)

s
9
8

Sheet 2 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-11
GEA 24/GEA 24B
P243 ALT
1A B G
ALT LOAD - SHUNT 1 HI 37
13
1A
ALT LOAD - SHUNT 1 LO 36 AIRCRAFT BUS
OR
MASTER
SOLENOID
1A + -
BATT - SHUNT 2 LO 34
13
1A
BATT - SHUNT 2 HI 35 BATTERY BUS
P244
1A
VOLTS 1 25 BUS VOLTS
1A
VOLTS 2 28 BATT VOLTS
AT TANK MASTER
SENDER
20
0-5V ANALOG
CC284022
CC284022
DIGITAL
CiES
CiES
2 FUEL QTY 1 6 BLUE GREEN

FUEL QTY 1 GND 7 BLK BLK
s

Sheet 3 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-12
GEA 24 AND GEA 24B USING EXISTING WIRING (REPLACING A GEA 24)
GEA 24/GEA 24B
22 P244
LEFT MAIN /
19 SINGLE MAIN
15 FUEL +12V 1 34 RESISTIVE
FLOAT
16 6
FUEL QTY 1 HI (0-5 VOLT) 6 HI
s
FUEL QTY 1 LO 7 LO
s
RIGHT MAIN
FUEL +12V 2 35 RESISTIVE

FLOAT
16 6
s
FUEL QTY 2 LO 10 LO
s
LEFT AUX /
SINGLE AUX
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
16 6
s
FUEL QTY 3 LO 13 LO
s
RIGHT AUX
GP +12V 50 17
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
16 6
s
FUEL QTY 4 LO 16 LO
s

Sheet 4 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-13
GEA 24B NEW INSTALLATIONS
GEA 24B
P244
LEFT MAIN /
SINGLE MAIN
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
6
FUEL QTY 1 HI ( 0-620 OHM) 6 HI
s
FUEL QTY 1 LO 7 LO
s
RIGHT MAIN
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
6
s
FUEL QTY 2 LO 10 LO
s
LEFT AUX /
SINGLE AUX
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
6
s
FUEL QTY 3 LO 13 LO
s
RIGHT AUX
RESISTIVE
FLOAT
6
s
FUEL QTY 4 LO 16 LO
s

Sheet 5 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-14
NOTES
THERE ARE LIMITED PINS AVAILABLE FOR +5V, +10V, AND +12V TRANSDUCER EXCITATION. DEPENDING
ON HOW MANY SENSORS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GEA, SPLICING SENSORS TO THE SAME EXCITATION
1
VOLTAGE PIN MAY BE REQUIRED. USE ALL IDENTICAL FUNCTIONING PINS BEFORE SPLICING.
SINGLE CHANNEL SHOWN. IDENTICAL WIRING FOR CHANNELS 2-6.

2
USE K-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.

3
USE J-TYPE THERMOCOUPLE WIRE FOR EXTENSIONS.

4
GEA GROUND PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR MS28034 TEMP SENSOR..

5
EXISTING FUEL QTY WIRING MAY BE RE-USED. USE A STANDARD ENVIRONMENTAL CRIMP SPLICE TO
EXTEND THE SIGNAL TO THE GEA, IF REQUIRED. ALL ADDITIONAL WIRING MUST BE SHEILDED AND BOTH
6
SHEILD ENDS TERMINATED. THE SHEILD DRAIN LENGTH MUST BE AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL.
MATCH SHIELDING AS SHOWN. SELECT WIRE BASED ON CONDUCTORS REQUIRED AT TRANSDUCER.

7
USE TWO 820 KΩ, 1/4 WATT, -55 C TO +125 C RESISTORS. TWIST PARALLEL RESISTOR LEADS TOGETHER,
SPLICE TO WIRES WITH ENVIRONMENTAL SPLICES, AND ENCAPSULATE SPLICES AND RESISTORS WITH
8
ADHESIVE LINED POLYOLEFIN HEAT-SHRINKABLE TUBING.
DO NOT EXCEED 6-INCH LENGTH BETWEEN END OF RESISTOR AND CONNECTION TO MAGNETO OR
9 IGNITION SWITCH.
CONNECT TO THE MAGNETO P-LEAD LUG. PERMISSIBLE TO USE IGNITION SWITCH INPUTS IF MAGNETO
10 USES COMPRESSION TYPE CONNECTORS.
AIRCRAFT GROUND --- PIN ONLY REQUIRED FOR BEECH 102-389017-3.

11
DO NOT EXCEED 6-INCH LENGTH OF EXPOSED CORE WIRES BETWEEN END OF SHIELD AND
TRANSDUCER. THE LENGTH OF NON-METALLIC TRANSDUCER DISCONNECTS, IF INSTALLED, MUST BE
12
INCLUDED IN THIS LENGTH.
BOTH FUSES MUST BE THE SAME TYPE AND RATING.

13
USE EITHER GP 6/MISC TEMP 1 OR GP 7/MISC TEMP 2 PORTS FOR TIT, CDT, IAT, OAT, AND PRIMARY EGT
14 SENSORS. CARB TEMP SENSOR MUST BE CONNECTED TO GP 6/MISC TEMP 1.
WHEN USING THE DUAL 2.2K RESISTOR WIRING CONFIGURATION SHOWN IN THIS FIGURE, THE RESISTIVE
FUEL PROBE MUST BE CONFIGURED AS A 0-5 VOLT SENSOR. THE RESISTIVE SENSOR CONFIGURATION
15
MUST NOT BE USED FOR GEA 24. REFER TO APPENDIX C.

Sheet 6 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-15
NOTES CONTINUED
RE
WI
OF
EN
D
N CH
)I CH
/-0 IN
. 25 .5)
+0 (±0
CONTACT 0 0( 3.5
2.
(P/O GEA24 CONNECTOR KIT)
JUMPER (22 AWG)

RESISTOR 1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
16
SOLDER SLEEVE (REF SECTION 4)
RING TERMINAL
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
HARNESS BUILDUP PROCEDURE

1. BUILD RESISTOR ASSEMBLIES AS SHOWN IN NOTE 18.
2. COMPLETE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE (I.E. CRIMP CONTACTS TO WIRES, TERMINATE SHIELD, ETC.).
2.1. REFERENCE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4 FOR COMPLETE FUEL QUANTITY WIRING CONNECTIONS.
3. SEE NOTE 18 FOR CABLE TIE PLACEMENT TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN.
SPLICE OF THE +12V OUTPUT IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATIONS INTERFACING TO TWO AUX TANKS
WITH RESISTIVE PROBES.
RE
WI
OF
EN
D
N CH
)I NCH
/-0 )I
0 .25 ± 0.5
0(+
3.5(
2.0
CONTACT
(P/O GEA24 CONNECTOR KIT)
JUMPER (22 AWG)
1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
JUMPER (22 AWG)

RESISTOR 1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH

JUMPER (22 AWG)
17 RESISTOR
1.75(+0.25/-0) INCH
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
RING TERMINAL
RING TERMINAL
BRAID MAX 4 INCH
HARNESS BUILDUP PROCEDURE

1. BUILD RESISTOR ASSEMBLIES AS SHOWN IN NOTE 18.
2. COMPLETE RESISTOR ASSEMBLY AS SHOWN IN ABOVE FIGURE (I.E. CRIMP CONTACTS TO WIRES, TERMINATE SHIELD, ETC.).
2.1. REFERENCE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4 FOR COMPLETE FUEL QUANTITY WIRING CONNECTIONS.
3. SEE NOTE 18 FOR CABLE TIE PLACEMENT TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN.
THE WIRING SUPPLIED WITH THE GTP 59 MAY BE EXTENDED IF THE SUPPLIED WIRE LENGTH IS NOT
18 SUFFICIENT FOR A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION.

Sheet 7 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-16
NOTES CONTINUED
FUEL QUANTITY RESISTOR BUILDUP PROCEDURE
STEP 1-2
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
PREPARE IAW STEP 3
NOTE 1: FOR POTENTIAL FUEL QUANTITY RESISTORS P/N REFERENCE SECTION 3.1.2. ALL RESISTORS ARE REQUIRED TO BE THE SAME PART NUMBER.
NOTE 2: SAE AS4461 REVISION C OR A LATER APPROVED VERSION IS TO BE USED IN THIS PROCEDURE.
1. TRIM RESISTOR LEADS TO 0.25±(0.063) INCH.

2. CREATE A HOOK IN THE REMAINING LEAD ON THE RESISTOR. REFERENCE FIGURE 9 IN AS4461 FOR HOOK CREATION.
3. PREPARE RESISTOR LEAD AND STRANDED WIRE IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.8.
STEP 4-6
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
4. USE PROCEDURE IN AS4461 SECTION 5.1.6.1 ALONG WITH FIGURE 8 AND 9 GUIDANCE TO SOLDER RESISTOR LEAD TO STRANDED WIRE(S) AS
SHOWN ABOVE. ACCEPTABLE SOLDER TYPES ARE Sn60 OR Sn63.
5. CLEAN FLUX RESIDUES IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.11.2.
6. INSPECT SOLDER JOINT IAW AS4461 SECTION 5.1, JOINT CAN BE REWORKED IAW AS4461 SECTION 4.11.1. IF REWORK IS REQUIRED, INSPECT
JOINT AGAIN IAW AS4461 SECTION 5.1.
STEP 7
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
0.5(±0.1) 0.5(±0.1)
INCH INCH
19 NOTE: DURING THE HEAT SHRINKING PROCESS ENSURE THE RESISTOR IS MINIMALLY EXPOSED TO DIRECT HEAT.
7. COVER SOLDER JOINTS IN 0.5(±0.1) INCH STANDARD HEAT SHRINK, REFERENCE SECTION 3.1.2 FOR P/N OF HEAT SHRINK. ENSURE THE HEAT
SHRINK CONSTRICTS AROUND THE SOLDER JOINT AND CONNECTING WIRE.
STEP 8
WIRE(S) WIRE(S)
1.25(+0.25/-0.00) INCH
NOTE: DURING THE HEAT SHRINKING PROCESS ENSURE THE RESISTOR IS MINIMALLY EXPOSED TO DIRECT HEAT.
8. COVER ASSEMBLY IN 1.25(+0.25/-0.00) INCH STANDARD HEAT SHRINK, CENTER HEAT SHRINK ON RESISTOR PRIOR TO SHRINKING. REFERENCE
SECTION 3.1.2 FOR P/N OF STANDARD HEAT SHRINK. ENSURE THE HEAT SHRINK CONSTRICTS AROUND THE HEAT SHRINK INSTALLED ON THE
SOLDER JOINTS.
GEA24 P244 CABLE TIE PLACEMENT
4.5(±0.50)
2.00(±0.50) INCH
INCH
ROUTE WITH EXISTING WIRING IN

ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 4.1
INSTALL CABLE TIES AS SHOWN

TO AVOID COMPONENT STRAIN BACK OF P244 CONNECTOR (REF)
CABLE CLAMP (REF)

RESISTOR BUILDUPS
(TOTAL NUMBER OF RESISTORS MAY VARY BACK OF P244 BACKSHELL (REF)
PER INSTALLATION, SEE FIGURE B-8 SHEET 4)
IN TANKS WHERE TWO OR MORE SENSORS ARE REQUIRED, THE MOST INBOARD SENSOR IS THE
MASTER, AND THE OTHER SENDERS ARE SLAVES. SEE APPLICABLE CiES STC FOR MULTI-PROBE AND
20
PWR/GND WIRING.

Sheet 8 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-17
NOTES CONTINUED
RESERVED.
21
FUEL QUANTITY WIRING USING THE DUAL 2.2K RESISTORS SHOWN ON SHEET 4 IS OPTIONAL FOR
GEA 24B AND REQUIRED FOR GEA 24. FUEL QUANTITY WIRING SHOWN ON SHEET 5 IS ONLY APPROVED
22 FOR GEA 24B. REFER TO SECTION 3.2.2 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON FUEL QUANTITY SENSOR
INTERFACE WITH THE GEA 24 AND GEA 24B.

Sheet 9 of 9

Rev. 14 Page B-18
GI 275 AUDIO PANEL
1
6 P2751
AUDIO INHIBIT IN X 2 GARMIN PS Engineering Bendix/King
(~DISCRETE IN X*)
AUDIO ACTIVE OUT X GMA 342 GMA 35(c) SL15 PAR PMA6000 PMA KMA 24
(~DISCRETE OUT X*)
3 GMA 345 GMA 350(c) SL15M GMA 340 GMA 347 200 PMA7000 8000 KMA 28 KMA 26 KMA 30
P3401 P3501 Bottom J1 J3471 J1 Bottom J1 Bottom P261 J1
HI 30 31 31 T 31 54 31 T 31 T 14 31 HI UNSWITCHED
AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
LO 48 32 32 Gnd Lug 32 55 32 Gnd Lug 32 Gnd Lug 31 32 LO
s
4 5
NOTES
FOR MULTIPLE GI 275 INSTALLATIONS, ONLY CONNECT THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND ASSOCIATED DISCRETE FROM ONE GI 275. LEAVE THE AUDIO OUTPUT AND DISCRETES
1 FROM OTHER GI UNITS UNCONNECTED.
2 USE THE AUDIO INHIBIT IN DISCRETE INPUT TO INHIBIT GDU GI 275 AURAL ALERTS WHEN A HIGHER PRIORITY SYSTEM IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
3 USE THE AUDIO ACTIVE OUT DISCRETE OUTPUT TO INHIBIT AURAL ALERTS FROM LOWER PRIORITY SYSTEMS WHENEVER THE GI 275 IS PLAYING AUDIO MESSAGES.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED PORTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM GI 275
4 MUST BE MIXED WITH AN EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS
390Ω 1/4 W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
5 SHIELDING BETWEEN THE GI 275 AND AUDIO PANEL SHOULD ONLY BE GROUNDED AT THE GI 275. DO NOT GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE AUDIO PANEL.
6 NOT USED.
Figure B-7 Audio Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-19
ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR (14 VDC)
GI 275 95-40-17-B4-E1WPN
EIS #1
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO
4 B ENGINE WARN 1
(ENGINE WARNING)
C ENGINE WARN 1
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO
43 A ENGINE CAUTION 1
(ENGINE CAUTION)
D ENGINE CAUTION 1
TO EIS DISPLAY
G POWER
BREAKER
GI 275 EIS #1 TO EIS DISPLAY

P2751 BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-2 (RED)
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO WITH LAMP
4 22 AWG 2
(ENGINE WARNING) MS25237-330 or -8918
22 AWG 3
TO EIS DISPLAY
BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-4 (YEL)
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO 22 AWG 2 WITH LAMP
43
(ENGINE CAUTION) MS25237-330 or -8918
22 AWG 3
ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR (28 VDC)

GI 275 LED-40-17-BA2-E1WP6
EIS #1
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO
4 B ENGINE WARN 1
(ENGINE WARNING)
1
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO
43 A ENGINE CAUTION 1
(ENGINE CAUTION)
TO EIS DISPLAY
G POWER
BREAKER
GI 275 EIS #1 TO EIS DISPLAY

P2751 BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-2 (RED)
~DISCRETE OUT 1 LO WITH LAMP
4 22 AWG 2
(ENGINE WARNING) MS25237-327
22 AWG 3
TO EIS DISPLAY
BREAKER 22 AWG 1 MS25041-4 (YEL)
~DISCRETE OUT 2 LO 22 AWG 2 WITH LAMP
43
(ENGINE CAUTION) MS25237-327
22 AWG 3
NOTES
1 USE 47Ω, 1/4 WATT RESISTOR.
IF AN ENGINE ANNUNCIATOR IS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION IN A MULTI-ENGINE AIRCRAFT, MAKE THE

2 CONNECTIONS TO EIS #1 ONLY. THE LEFT-MOST ENGINE (FROM THE PILOT’S POINT-OF-VIEW) SHOULD BE
CONFIGURED AS EIS #1.
Figure B-8 Annunciators

Rev. 14 Page B-20
GI 275 P2751 P691 GDL 69 SERIES
2
OUT A 46 25 OUT A
OUT B 47 24 OUT B
~ETHERNET 1 1 ETHERNET 1
IN A 65 23 IN A
IN B 66 22 IN B
s s
29 OUT A
28 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 2
27 IN A
26 IN B
s
33 OUT A
32 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 3
31 IN A
30 IN B
s
59 OUT A
58 OUT B
1 ETHERNET 4
57 IN A
56 IN B
s
NOTES
1 REFERENCE SECTION 3.2.5 FOR HSDB ARCHITECTURE.
2 ONLY THE SECOND GENERATION GDL 69/69A SXM MODELS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE GI 275.
Figure B-9 GDL 69 Series Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-21
GI 275 RADAR
FREE
ALTIMETER
GARMIN COLLINS HONEYWELL
FLIGHT
GRA 55/ RA-4500 RAC 870 KRA 405B
5500
P1 P1 P1 P4051
P2751
~DISCRETE OUT 2*
43 - - 40 U PUSH-TO-TEST IN
(RAD ALT SELF TEST OUT)
A 73 52 12 2 B ARINC 429 OUT A
~ARINC 429 IN 4
B 15 55 11 3 C ARINC 429 OUT B
s
Figure B-10 Radar Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-22
DISPLAY ONLY
WX-500
GI 275
P2751 P2 STORMSCOPE
GND 76 5 RS-232 GND
~RS-232 2 IN 37
OUT 18 s
P3
20 RS-232 TX
8 RS-232 RX
TO STORMSCOPE
CONTROL AND DISPLAY
Figure B-11 Stormscope Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-23
GI 275 TRAFFIC SYSTEM
12 12 13 12 12
P2751 L3 COMM HONEYWELL
18 GARMIN GARMIN AVIDYNE
~DISCRETE OUT 2*
(TAS TEST) 43
2 GTX 33 TAS 6xx KTA 810 KTA 910
~DISCRETE OUT 1* GNX 375 GTX 345 GTX 335 GTX 330 GTS 8XX 9900BX TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH 820 KMH 920
(TIS/TAS STANDBY) 4
P3752 P3252 P3251 P3301 P8001 P8002 P1 P1 P1 J10 J10
3 6 - - 52 - - - - - - ETHERNET OUT A
GI 275 18 1 - - 53 - - - - - - ETHERNET OUT B
4 4 7 - - 54 - - - - - - ETHERNET IN A
19 2 - - 55 - - - - - - ETHERNET IN B
P2751 s
~DISCRETE OUT 2*
(TAS TEST) 43 - - - - - 74 - 85 19 2 2 FUNCTIONAL TEST
2 ~DISCRETE OUT 1* 1
(TIS/TAS STANDBY) 4 - - 15 46 - 75 - 82 21 23 23 STANDBY / OPERATE
A 73 - - 5 30 14 - 8 34 42 54 54 A
~ARINC 429 IN 4 11 11 15 15 ARINC 429 OUT
B 15 - - 6 28 - 9 33 43 55 55 B
s 3
(OPTIONAL)
A 35 - - 27 32 16 - 10 45 54 60 60 A ARINC 429 IN
~ARINC 429 OUT 2 9 9 3 11 7 8
B 74 - - 28 35 17 - 44 55 61 61 B (ALTITUDE/HEADING)
s
17 - - - - - - - 69 - - - STEPPER IN
16 - - - - - - - 70 - - - SYNCRO IN
(OPTIONAL) - - - - - - - 13 - - - CONFIG GND
AHRS SOURCE
5
GDU 700/1060
GI275
GRS 77 GRS 79 GSU 75 INTEGRATED
ADAHRS
ADAHRS
P771 P791 P751 P4 P1
(OPTIONAL)
A 13 49 49 77 16 - - 48 - - - - - - 62 62 A ARINC 429 IN
~ ARINC 429 OUT 8
B 28 50 50 78 55 - - 49 - - - - - - 63 63 B (ATTITUDE/HEADING)
s
14
ADC SOURCE
6
GDC 74 GDC 72 GSU 75
P771 P791 P751

(OPTIONAL)
A 29 21 21 - - 48 33 - - - - - - - A ARINC 429 IN
~ ARINC 429 OUT 10 49 10 36
B 30 22 22 - - - - - - - - - B (ALTITUDE)
s
Figure B-12 Traffic Advisory System Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-24
NOTES
1 FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS, DO NOT SPLICE “TAS TEST” OR “TIS/TAS STANDBY”.
TAS TEST AND TIS/TAS STANDBY DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE ONLY REQUIRED IF THE GI 275 IS
2 INTERFACED USING ARINC 429 AND CONFIGURED FOR “CONTROL TRAFFIC”. DISCRETE CONNECTIONS
ARE NOT REQUIRED FOR HSDB CONNECTION.
FOR THE TCAD TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 HEADING AND ALTITUDE, PROCESSOR P/N 70-2420-5 OR LATER IS
3 REQUIRED. THE BUS SPEED MUST BE THE SAME FOR ARINC 429 RX 1 AND RX 2.
5 USE ONLY AHRS OR ADAHRS OUTPUT OF GSU 75.
6 USE ONLY ADC OUTPUT OF THE GSU 75.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE SKYWATCH SYSTEM. ANY
AVAILABLE ARINC 429 INPUTS ON THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MAY BE USED IF THOSE SHOWN ARE
7 ALREADY USED. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MAY HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ALTITUDE AND
HEADING VIA ARINC 429 (LOW-SPEED). REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, ATTITUDE, AND HEADING MAY BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE HONEYWELL
TRAFFIC SYSTEM. THE HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEM WILL NOT ACCEPT HEADING/ATTITUDE AND
ALTITUDE ON A SINGLE ARINC 429 INPUT. CONSEQUENTLY, HEADING/ATTITUDE (HIGH-SPEED) AND
8 ALTITUDE (LOW-SPEED) MUST BE PROVIDED TO SEPARATE INPUTS. THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MUST BE
CONFIGURED TO ACCEPT ARINC 429 ALTITUDE, HEADING, AND ATTITUDE. REFER TO THE
MANUFACTURER’S INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
IF DESIRED, ALTITUDE, TEMPERATURE, HEADING, SPEED, AND SELECTED COURSE INFORMATION MAY
9 BE PROVIDED BY THE GI 275 TO THE TRANSPONDER.
IF THE GI 275 IS THE ONLY ALTITUDE SOURCE FOR THE GTX, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE GTX ALSO
10 BE CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO AN EXTERNAL AIR DATA SOURCE SO THAT THE TRANSPONDER WILL
CONTINUE REPORTING ALTITUDE IN THE EVENT OF A GI 275 FAILURE.
IF ANOTHER TRAFFIC SOURCE IS WIRED TO THE GI 275, DO NOT WIRE THE GTX ARINC OUTPUT TO THE
11 GI 275.
DO NOT WIRE TO THE GI 275 IF A GTX 345 IS INSTALLED. THESE TRAFFIC SYSTEMS MUST BE WIRED IN
12 ACCORDANCE WITH THE GTX 345 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR PROPER CORRELATION AND DISPLAY.
13 TRC 497 SOFTWARE v1.6 OR HIGHER IS REQUIRED.

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-25
NOTES CONTINUED
14 SPLICE WITH WEATHER RADAR STABILIZATION OUTPUT (IF INSTALLED) IS ALLOWED.
15 ARINC OUT TO THE GI 275 IS NOT USED IF CONNECTED VIA ETHERNET.
THESE STRAPS SET THE HEADING INPUT SOURCE TO ARINC 429. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S
16 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL STRAPPING INFORMATION.
17 SPLICE WITH GPS NAVIGATOR ARINC OUTPUT (IF INSTALLED) IS ALLOWED.
THE HSDB CONNECTION TO THE GTX 345 SHOWN HERE ALSO PROVIDES THE TRANSPONDER CONTROL
18 INTERFACE, IF APPLICABLE.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-26
P201/
GI 275 P202
GSB 15
P2751
USB DATA HI 58 3 USB DP

USB DATA LO 39 5 2 USB DN
USB GROUND 59 4 USB GND
4 s
6
1 AIRCRAFT POWER
2
1 5 BACKLIGHT ENABLE 3
6 POWER GROUND
NOTES
• GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-A UNITS (P/NS 011-04937-00, -01) USE 20 OR 22 AWG FOR POWER AND POWER
GROUND WIRES, 25 FT MAX.
• GSB 15 TYPE-A & TYPE-C (P/NS 011-04937-20, -30) AND GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-C (P/NS 011-04937-40, -50)
UNITS INSTALLED IN 28V AIRCRAFT, USE 20 OR 22 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND POWER GROUND
WIRES, 25FT MAX.
1
• GSB 15 TYPE-A & TYPE-C (P/NS 011-04937-20, -30) AND GSB 15 DUAL TYPE-C (P/NS 011-04937-40, -50)
UNITS INSTALLED IN 14V AIRCRAFT, USE 20 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND POWER GROUND
WIRES, 8FT MAX. IF LONGER WIRE LENGTH IS NEEDED, USE 16 AWG FOR AIRCRAFT POWER AND
GROUND WIRES, 13FT MAX, SPLICED TO 2FT MAX 20 AWG POWER AND GROUND WIRES AT GSB 15
CONNECTOR.
THE GSB 15 IS APPROVED TO UTILIZE A 5 AMP FUSE OR CIRCUIT BREAKER OR A 7.5 AMP FUSE OR
2 CIRCUIT BREAKER. REFER TO SECTION 3.2.1 FOR BREAKER AND FUSE SIZING, BUSSING, AND LABELING.
3 TO DISABLE BACKLIGHT, GROUND THE BACKLIGHT ENABLE PIN. USE 22 AWG WIRE.
PIN 78 ON CONNECTOR P2751 SHOULD NOT BE CONNECTED. WHEN REPLACING A USB PIGTAIL WITH THE
4 GSB 15, LEAVE THE PIN NOT CONNECTED.
5 MUST USE ETHERNET CABLE. REFER TO TABLE 3-5 FOR APPROVED CABLES.
TERMINATE SHIELDING 2.5 INCHES FROM THE GSB 15 CONNECTOR. GROUND GSB 15 SIDE TO RING
6 TERMINAL PER SECTION 4.4.2.
7 USB DATA CABLES MUST BE 10 FEET LONG OR LESS.
Figure B-13 GSB 15 Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-27
EFIS
GI 275 Garmin Sandel Sandel Avidyne Bendix/King
GDU 620 SN3308 SN3500/4500 EXP5000 EFS 40/50
P2751 P6202 P3 P2 J732 P4652B
A 72
~ARINC 429 IN 2 3 11 30 22 47 A
B 14 ~ARINC 429 OUT
s 20 29 15 21 20 B
NOTES
ARINC 429 COURSE SELECT INTERFACE ALLOWS THE GI 275 TO SLAVE THE SELECTED COURSE FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE WHEN COURSE SELECTION IS DISABLED.
1 REFER TO SECTION 5.5.7 FOR CONFIGURING COURSE SELECTION.
Figure B-14 ARINC 429 Course Select Interconnect

Rev. 14 Page B-28
Fuel Quantity Probe Relay Options – Remote Aircraft Status (RAS)
Multiple Breaker Multiple Load Single Breaker Multiple Load Single Breaker Single Load
RAS X RAS X RAS X
Sensor
A3 CB A A3 CB A/B A3 CB A
A2
A1
Sensor A2 Sensor A2
A A A1
RAS 1 A2 A A1
RAS 1 A2
B3 CB B B3 B3
Sensor B2 Sensor B2 B2
B1
B B B1
RAS 1 B2
B1
RAS 1 B2
X1 X1 X1
X2 X2 X2
Inline Fuse Example

RAS X
Sensor
A3 CB A
A2
A1
A
B3 CB B
Sensor B2
B1
B
X1
X2
Figure B-15 GDL 60 Remote Aircraft Status Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-29
GDL 60 Single Engine RAS
GI 275 EIS P2751 P6001 GDL 60
IN A 65 25 OUT A
IN B 66 24 OUT B
~HSDB 1 ~HSDB 1
OUT A 46 3 IN A
OUT B 47 2 IN B
s s
RAS 2
RAS 1
A3 2 1
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 3 22 AWG 20 AWG A2
A1
20 AWG A2
A3
A1
Battery
AWG
B3 2
20
20 AWG B2
B1
20 AWG B2
B3
B1
X1
22 AWG
EIS Adapter GEA 24
X1
X2
X2
P241 50 ANNUNCIATOR OUT 3
AIRCRAFT PWR 2 8
3
GDL 60 Twin Engine RAS

GI 275 EIS #1 P2751 P6001 GDL 60
IN A 65 25 OUT A
IN B 66 24 OUT B
~HSDB 1 ~HSDB 1
OUT A 46 3 IN A
OUT B 47 2 IN B
s s
RAS 2
RAS 1
A3 2 1
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 3 20 AWG A2
A1
20 AWG A2
A3
Battery
A1
2 #1
AWG
B3
20
20 AWG B2
B1
20 AWG B2
B3
B1
X1
22 AWG
EIS Adapter #1 GEA 24

X1
X2
X2
P241 50 ANNUNCIATOR OUT 3
AIRCRAFT PWR 2 8 3
GI 275 EIS #2
P2751 RAS 4
RAS 3
A3 2 1
AIRCRAFT POWER 2 3 20 AWG A2
A1 A2
A3
Battery
A1
#2
AWG
B3 2
20
20 AWG B2
B1
20 AWG B2
B3
B1
X1
22 AWG
EIS Adapter #2 GEA 24

X1
X2
X2
P241
AIRCRAFT PWR 2 8
3
Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-30
NOTES
1 INSTALL 5 AMP FUSE AS CLOSE AS PRACTICAL TO THE BATTERY.
EXISTING POWER IN 2 WIRING MAY BE RE-USED. IF NO POWER IN 2 WIRING EXISTS FOR THE GI 275 OR
2 THE GEA, CONNECT TO THE UNITS EXISTING POWER IN 1 CIRCUIT BREAKER.
ADDITIONAL LOADS FOR FUEL QUANTITY SENSORS MAY BE ADDED USING THE SECOND TIER RELAY
3 WIRING SHOWN ON SHEET 1.
4 SPLICES WITHIN 6 INCHES OF RELAY/LRU PIN.
THE GDL 60 MUST BE DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO A GI 275 EIS UNIT VIA HSDB FOR REMOTE AIRCRAFT
5 STATUS FUNCTIONALITY.
6 EXISTING SENSOR WIRING SHOWN IN GRAY DASHED LINES.
SENSOR A/B AND CB A/B REPRESENT ANY GIVEN CIRCUIT FROM BREAKER TO THE FUEL QUANTITY
7 SENSOR. THE LOAD CAN BE ANY FUEL QUANTITY PROBE THAT IS NOT POWERED DIRECTLY FROM THE
GEA.
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED, USE A MINIMUM OF 22 AWG WIRE GAUGE FOR NEW WIRING. FOR WIRE
8 LENGTHS LONGER THAN 20 FEET, REFER TO AC 43.13-1B CHAPTER 11 TO DETERMINE APPROPRIATE
WIRE GAUGE.
WHEN UTILIZING EXISTING SENSOR/LRU WIRING OF LESS THAN 22 AWG, PLACE AN INLINE FUSE
9 UPSTREAM OF THE RELAY THAT IS THE SAME RATING AS THE ORIGINAL CIRCUIT. SEE INLINE FUSE
EXAMPLE.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 14 Page B-31
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
C.1 GPS Source .................................................................................................................................... C-3

C.2 VHF Navigation Receiver .............................................................................................................. C-5
C.3 Analog Navigation Receiver .......................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 Radar Altimeter .............................................................................................................................. C-8
C.5 EIS .................................................................................................................................................. C-9
C.6 Transponder Control ...................................................................................................................... C-9
C.7 Traffic Source ............................................................................................................................... C-10
C.8 Weather Source ............................................................................................................................ C-12
C.9 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source ........................................................................................ C-12
C.10 External TAWS ............................................................................................................................ C-13
C.11 Audio Panel .................................................................................................................................. C-14
C.12 EIS Sensors .................................................................................................................................. C-15
CAUTION
This manual only approves the installation of the GI 275 Base (including backup battery and
backup GPS antenna), GSB 15, and GEA 24(B) (including EIS annunciator(s) and engine
sensors). Other compatible LRUs listed in Appendix C must use other installation approvals
and may require installation and/or configuration by an authorized Garmin dealer.
The equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GI 275 system when configured as described
in the following sections. For GI 275 configuration information, refer to Section 5.5.

Rev. 14 Page C-1
Table C-1 LRU Interface Summary
Min. Software
Interfaced LRU Primary Functions
Needed
GDL 69/69A SXM v5.51 • Weather data
• ADS-B GPS position
GPS 175 v2.02
• GPS NAV source
GNX 375 v2.02 • Traffic and weather data
• GPS NAV source
GNC 355 v3.01
• GPS NAV source
GTN 6XX/7XX v6.70
• GPS/VHF NAV source
GTN Xi v20.10 [2]
• GPS/VHF NAV source
GTS 8X5 v3.13
• TAS traffic source
GTS 8X0 v4.13
• TAS traffic source
GTX 33X v2.52 • TIS-A traffic source
• Serial altitude
Main: v2.52
GTX 3X5 • ADS-B traffic source
ADS-B: v3.12
• Weather data (GTX 345 only)
• Mode 3 transponder control (GTX 345 only) [1]
L-3 Communications
v1.6 • TAS traffic source
SKY 497
GEA 24 v3.60 • EIS
GEA 24B v2.10 • EIS
Notes:
[1] GTX 345 Main v2.60 and ADS-B v3.21 software versions are required for Transponder
Control functionality.
[2] GI 275 software v2.60 or later requires GTN Xi software v20.30 or later.

Rev. 14 Page C-2
C.1 GPS Source
The GPS position sources listed in Table C-2 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-2 Compatible GPS Position Source

Mfr Model Data Format Interfacing Equipment Configuration Information Notes
Crossfills data from a different GI 275
Other GI 275 HSDB
interfaced to a GPS source.
Internal Internal VFR GPS must install antenna
Interfaces page VFR GPS: Internal
VFR GPS per Section 4.5.1. [1]
IN 1: Low, Garmin GDU
OUT: High, GAMA 429 If a GNS 500W TAWS unit is installed,
Main ARINC 429 Config page SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1) it must be connected as GPS 1.
ARINC 429 LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
GNS 4XXW Main CDI/OBS Config page is only
VNAV: Enable Labels
GNS 5XXW RS-232 available on GNS 430W/430AW and
CHNL 1: INPUT: Off GNS 530W/530AW.
Main RS-232 Config page
OUTPUT: MapMX Main software v3.30 or later is required.
Main CDI/OBS Config page Menu key > Ignore CDI Key? > Yes
CH 1: RX: MapMX
Serial Setup page
TX: MapMX
Garmin
CH 2 IN: SEL: Garmin GDU
ARINC 429 SPEED: Low GNS 480 can only be connected to
GNS 480
RS-232 ARINC 429 Setup page SDI: Sys 1 (for GPS 1) RS-232 ports 1 or 2 on the GI 275.
Sys 2 (for GPS 2)
CH 1 OUT: SEL: GAMA 429
Miscellaneous Setup page CDI SELECT: IGNORE
Set GDU to Present. Set the format to Software v6.70 or later required.
Interfaced Equipment page
GTN 6XX GI 275 for each installed GI 275.
HSDB For GI 275 software v2.60 or later,
GTN 7XX Main Indicator (Analog) Database Sync is only supported with
CDI Key: Disabled GTN 6XX/7XX software v6.73 or later.
Configuration page
Set GDU to Present. Set the format to
Interfaced Equipment page
GI 275 for each installed GI 275.
GTN Xi HSDB Software v20.10 or later required.
Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI Key: Disabled
Configuration page

Rev. 14 Page C-3
Main SW v2.52 or later required.
GTX 3X5 RS-232 RS-232 Interface page ADS-B + FORMAT2
ADS-B SW v3.12 or later required. [1]
Garmin GPS 175 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v2.02 or later required.
GNX 375 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v2.02 or later required.
GNC 355 HSDB Interfaced Equipment page Set GDU to Present. Software v3.01 or later required.
Notes:
[1] Does not provide precision GPS approach guidance.

Rev. 14 Page C-4
C.2 VHF Navigation Receiver
The VHF navigation receivers listed in Table C-3 are compatible with the GI 275. For a list of analog navigation receivers compatible with the GI 275, refer to
Appendix Section C.3.
Table C-3 Compatible VHF Navigation Receiver

Crossfills data from a different
Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a NAV
source.
Serial Port page IO MODE: NMEA
When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be driven by
a “standard CDI” connected to the GNC 255, set
TYPE: RESOLVER.
GNC 255 RS-232 When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be set via the Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
CDI Indicator page
GI 275 interface, set TYPE: SERIAL.
When GI 275 NAV CDI is desired to be set via the
GI 275 interface and/or the GNC 255 display, set
TYPE: NONE.
Garmin
VOR/LOC/GS SPEED: TX: Low
GNS 430W/430AW
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 Config SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1) Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
GNS 530W/530AW
page VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
CH OUT 2: SEL: VOR/ILS
ARINC 429 Setup SPEED: Low
GNS 480 (CNX80) ARINC 429 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
page SDI: Sys 1 (for NAV 1)
Sys 2 (for NAV 2)
GTN 650 HSDB Port Software v6.70 or later required.

HSDB Ethernet Port ( ): Connected
GTN 750 Utilization page Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
Software v20.10 or later
HSDB Port required.
GTN Xi HSDB Ethernet Port ( ): Connected
Utilization page
Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.

Rev. 14 Page C-5
With no external CDI connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD TYPE:
SERIAL.
With external “standard CDI” connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
Garmin SL30 RS-232
TYPE: RESOLVER. Software v1.3 or later required.
With external “composite CDI” connected to SL30, set INDICATOR HEAD
TYPE: SERIAL.

Rev. 14 Page C-6
C.3 Analog Navigation Receiver
Interface to analog navigation receivers not listed in Table C-4 can still be approved under the GI 275 if all of the following conditions are met:
• The navigation receiver is approved to TSO C36( ) (Localizer), TSO C40( ) (VOR), and optionally TSO C34( ) (Glideslope) if the glideslope is used.
• If the glideslope is being used, the navigation receiver has a glideslope low-level flag output.
• The installation of the navigation receiver was previously FAA-approved.
• The calibration procedure for the analog navigation receiver described in Section 5.8.1 and the ground check in Section 6.4.2.2 have successfully been
completed.
NOTE
The GI 275 is an EZ zeroed resolver at 0 degrees.
Table C-4 Compatible Analog Navigation Receiver

Composite
Collins VIR-32/33 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
Analog
GNS 4XX/5XX Composite
GNS 4XXW/5XXW Analog Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
This interface only supports
Garmin Composite
GTN 6XX/7XX NAV, not GPS. It is
Analog
recommended to connect and
Composite configure per Table C-3.
GTN Xi
Analog
Composite
KX 155/155A/165/165A
Analog
Honeywell Composite
KN 53 Can be NAV 1, NAV 2, or both.
(Bendix/King) Analog
Composite
KX 170B/175B
Analog

Rev. 14 Page C-7
C.4 Radar Altimeter
The radar altimeter transceivers listed in Table C-5 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-5 Compatible Radar Altimeter

This is an analog to digital
Collins RAC-870 ARINC 429 converter specifically for use
with the ALT-55B rad-alt.
FreeFlight RA-4500 ARINC 429
Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a radar
Garmin altimeter.
GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429
Honeywell
KRA 405B ARINC 429
(Bendix/King)

Rev. 14 Page C-8
C.5 EIS
The engine adapters listed in Table C-6 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-6 Compatible Engine Adapters

GEA 24(B) RS-232 [1]
Garmin Crossfills data from a different GI 275
Other GI 275 HSDB For twin-engine aircraft, configure EIS 2 as Other GI 275.
interfaced to a GEA 24(B). [1]
Notes:
[1] An external annunciator(s) is required to be configured if the GI 275 EIS is installed outside of 35° of the centerline and is installed as a Primary EIS
display. Refer to Section 4.3.3.
C.6 Transponder Control

The transponders listed in Table C-7 are compatible with the GI 275 for remote transponder control.
Table C-7 Compatible Transponders
GTX 345 Main software v2.60 or
GTX 345R HSDB INTERFACE: SFD later required.
Garmin HSDB HSDB Interface page
GTX 345D PRESENT: YES ADS-B software v3.21 or
GTX 345DR later required.

Rev. 14 Page C-9
C.7 Traffic Source
The traffic sources listed in Table C-8 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-8 Compatible Traffic Source

Avidyne (Ryan) TAS 6XX / TCAD ARINC 429 TAS
Crossfills data from a
Other GI 275 HSDB different GI 275 interfaced
to a traffic source.
HSDB TCAS I, ADS-B
GTS 800/820/825/ TAS/TCAS I
850/855 (GTS 8XX) The GTS 8XX can receive heading and altitude from the display or
ARINC 429 This interface only displays
directly from the AHRS and ADC.
TAS/TCAS targets. [5]
Garmin GTX 33/330
CHANNEL 2: GARMIN W/TIS TIS-A
ARINC 429 Output page
GTX 3X5 Main software
If GTX 33/330 will receive ARINC 429 v2.52 or later required.
GTX 33/330 data from the GI 275: The display can control the
GTX 33X ARINC 429
ARINC 429 Input page SEL: EFIS w/ALT TIS state; however, it does
SPEED: LOW not provide control of the
GTX 33.
GTX 335
A429 OUTPUT: FORMAT 8 [1]
A429 Output page
ADS-B/TIS-B
Main software v2.52 or
later required.
HSDB INTERFACE: SFD ADS-B software v3.12 or
GTX 345 HSDB HSDB Interface page
PRESENT: YES later required.
The GTX 345 can provide
Garmin TAS/TCAS.
[3] [4]
ADS-B
Software v2.02 or later
GNX 375 HSDB
required.
[3] [4]

Rev. 14 Page C-10
Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
KTA870 / KMH820 ARINC 429 TAS [2]
Honeywell Controller Type: Discrete
(Bendix/King) Intruder File Protocol: ARINC 735
KTA970 / KMH920 ARINC 429 TCAS I [2]
Controller Type: Discrete
TAS
For SKY 497, ARINC 735 Alternate Display type must be set to
L-3 Communications SKY497 ARINC 429 SKY 497 software v1.6 or
“ARINC735 Type 1” (P1-80 must be grounded).
(Goodrich) later required.
SKY899 ARINC 429 TAS/TCAS I
Notes:
[1] The GI 275 provides altitude as part of the data transmitted to the GTX 33( )/330( ); however, it is recommended that a direct connection from the
ADC also be provided so that the GTX 33( )/330( ) will still receive altitude in the event of a GI 275 failure.
[2] Controller type is only required if GI 275 is used to control the traffic system.
[3] Only one ADS-B In source can be configured at a time.
[4] This interface will provide FIS-B weather as well as SXM weather if a GDL 69/69A is also installed.
[5] If the GTS is connected via HSDB, the ARINC 429 interface is not required.

Rev. 14 Page C-11
C.8 Weather Source
The weather transceivers listed in Table C-9 are compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-9 Compatible Weather Radar Sources
GDL 69/69A SXM requires
GDL 69A SXM HSDB Ethernet port that is connected to GI 275 must be enabled.
minimum software v5.51. [2]
Garmin
GTX 345 HSDB Refer to the GTX 345 configuration information in Table C-8. [1]
GNX 375 HSDB Refer to the GNX 375 configuration information in Table C-8. [1]
Notes:
[1] Configuring the Traffic Type to ADS-B on the GI 275 automatically enables weather information.
[2] Only the second generation GDL 69/69A SXM models are compatible with the GI 275.
C.9 Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source

The lightning/electrical discharge system listed in Table C-10 is compatible with the GI 275.
Table C-10 Compatible Lightning/Electrical Discharge Source

The GI 275 cannot control the
WX-500 Stormscope. A
controlling unit (e.g., GDU 620,
L-3 Communications WX-500 RS-232 GDU 700/1060, GTN 6XX/7XX)
must be present in the system for
the GI 275 to display Stormscope
data.
Garmin Other GI 275 HSDB GI 275 interfaced to a
Stormscope.

Rev. 14 Page C-12
C.10 External TAWS
The External TAWS sources listed in Table C-11 are compatible with the GI 275. Refer to Section 3.3.9 for additional details regarding the external TAWS options
and configuration.
Table C-11 Compatible External TAWS Sources

HSDB Port Configuration page Ethernet Port ( ): Connected Software v6.70 or later
GTN 6XX/7XX HSDB
Terrain Configuration page Enable Terrain Alerting required.
HSDB Port Configuration page Ethernet Port ( ): Connected Software v20.10 or later
GTN Xi HSDB
Garmin Terrain Configuration page Enable Terrain Alerting required.
Main RS-232 Config page Out: MapMX

GNS 400W/500W RS-232 Configure: Terrain
Main System Config page
Terrain Type: TAWS

Rev. 14 Page C-13
C.11 Audio Panel
Interfacing the GI 275 to an audio panel is recommended but not required unless TAWS B is enabled.
The audio panels listed in Table C-12 are compatible with the GI 275. However, audio panels not listed below can still be approved under the GI 275 AML STC if
all of the following conditions are met:
• The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved
• The GI 275 audio must be verified as described in Section 5.6.3
NOTE
Audio alerts must be loud, attention-getting, and clearly intelligible under all cockpit noise conditions. Audio alerts should be slightly louder than
the normal volume of COM and intercom transmissions.
Table C-12 Compatible Audio Panels

GMA 340
GMA 342
GMA 345
GMA 347
Garmin Analog GMA 35(c) requires a control panel, such as a GTN 7XX.
GMA 35(c)
GMA 350(c)
SL 15
SL 15M
KMA 24
Honeywell KMA 26
Analog
(Bendix/King) KMA 28
KMA 30
PMA 6000
PMA 7000 Series
PS Engineering Analog
PMA 8000 Series
PAR 200

Rev. 14 Page C-14
C.12 EIS Sensors
GI 275 EIS gauges display data from the GEA 24(B) when approved sensors are configured in accordance with Table C-13. EIS sensors that are authorized as
“Interface only” require a separate installation approval.
Table C-13 Compatible EIS Sensors
Function Mfr Garmin P/N Description Sensor Configuration Authorization
Mag P-Lead (v1) or
Dual Mag P-Lead (v1) or
Geared 0.642:1 P-Lead (v1) or
N/A N/A P-lead (w/resistors) Geared 0.667:1 P-Lead (v1) or Interface and installation
RPM Geared 0.750:1 P-Lead (v1) or
Geared 16:25 P-Lead (v1) or
Geared 77:120 P-Lead (v1) [3]
UMA N/A T1A9-1 UMA T1A9-1 Slick (v1)
Interface only
UMA N/A T1A9-2 UMA T1A9-2 Bendix (v1)
Garmin 011-04202-00 Garmin 30 PSIA (Brass) Garmin 011-04202-00 (v1)
Interface and installation
Garmin 011-05783-00 GPT 30PSIA (SS) Garmin 011-05783-00 (v2)
Manifold Press
UMA N/A T1EU50A (Absolute) UMA T1EU50A (v1)
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU50A-CS (Absolute) UMA T1EU50A (v1)
Garmin 011-04202-30 150 PSIG (Brass) Garmin 011-04202-30 (v1)
Garmin 011-05783-30 GPT 150PSIG (SS) Garmin 011-05783-30 (v1)
Beech N/A 102-389017-1 Beech 102-389017 (v1) [1]
Oil Press
Beech N/A 102-389017-3 Beech 102-389017 (v1) [1]
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU150G (Gauge) UMA T1EU150G (v1)
UMA N/A T1EU150G-CS (Gauge) UMA T1EU150G (v1)
UMA 494-70009-00 T3B3-2.5G (K Type) UMA T3B3 (v1) Interface and installation
UMA N/A T3B3 UMA T3B3 (v1)
UMA N/A T3B3A UMA T3B3 (v1)
Oil Temp
UMA N/A T3B3-2.5 UMA T3B3 (v1) Interface only
Mil-Spec N/A MS28034 MilSpec MS28034 (v1)
Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1)
Alcor 86252 (v1) or
Alcor 494-70008-00 Alcor 86252 (K Type)
Garmin 494-70008-00 (v1)
CHT Interface only
Varies N/A J Type NIST ITS-90 J Type (v1)

Rev. 14 Page C-15
Alcor 86255 (v1) or
EGT Garmin 494-70001-00 (v1) Interface only
Alcor 86255 (v1) [1] or
Alcor 494-70001-00 86255 (K Type)
Primary EGT Garmin 494-70001-00 (v1) [1] Interface only
Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1) [1]
Alcor 86245 (v1) [1] or
TIT & TIT 2 Garmin 494-70002-00 (v1) [1] Interface only
UMA T3B10-SG (v1) [1] or
UMA 494-70010-00 T3B10-SG (K Type) Interface and installation
Garmin 494-70010-00 (v1) [1]
Carb Temp
Mil-Spec N/A MS28034 Mil-Spec MS28034 (v1)
Interface only
Fuel Press
Interface only
UMA N/A T1EU70D (Differential) UMA T1EU70D (v1)
UMA N/A T1EU70D-CS (Differential) UMA T1EU70D (v1)

Rev. 14 Page C-16
EI FT-60 Hi (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-00 Hi (v1) [2]
Electronics Intl 494-10001-00 EI FT-60
EI FT-60 Low (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-00 Low (v1) [2]
EI FT-90 Hi (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-01 Hi (v1) [2]
Electronics Intl 494-10001-01 EI FT-90
EI FT-90 Low (v1) or
Garmin 494-10001-01 Low (v1) [2]
Fuel Flow & Beech 102-389012-11 Low (v1) or
Beech N/A 102-389012-11
Return Fuel Flow Beech 103-389012-11 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 201 B-6 Low (v1) or
Floscan N/A 201 B-6
Floscan 201B-6 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 231 Low (v1) or
Floscan N/A 231 Interface only
Floscan 231 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 201 B-6 Low (v1) or
JPI N/A 700900-1 (201)
Floscan 201B-6 Hi (v1) [2]
Floscan 231 Low (v1) or
JPI N/A 700900-2 (231)
Floscan 231 Hi (v1) [2]
Varies N/A 30Amps 50mV 30Amps 50mV (v1)
Shunt - Varies N/A 75Amps 50mV 75Amps 50mV (v1)
Alternator Load & Varies N/A 75Amps 100mV 75Amps 100mV (v1)
Interface only
Battery Charge/ Varies N/A 80Amps 50mV 80Amps 50mV (v1)
Discharge Varies N/A 85Amps 50mV 85Amps 50mV (v1)
Bus Volts Varies N/A Aircraft Bus (80V Max) Bus Max 80 Volts DC (v1) Interface only
Batt Volts Varies N/A Aircraft Battery (80V Max) Batt Max 80 Volts DC (v1) Interface only

Rev. 14 Page C-17
0-5 Volt Left Main (v1) or
Resistive Floats [4] N/A
0-5 Volt Single Main (v1)
Resistive Floats [4] 0-620Ohm Left Main (v1) or
N/A Left/Single Tank
(GEA 24B Only) 0-620Ohm Single Main (v1)
CiES CC284022-
N/A Digital or 0-5Volt (v1)
XXXX-XXX
Resistive Floats [4] N/A 0-5 Volt Right Main (v1)
Resistive Floats [4]
N/A 0-620Ohm Right Main (v1)
(GEA 24B Only) Right Tank
CiES CC284022-
Fuel Quantity XXXX-XXX
Interface only
(Main & Aux) 0-5 Volt Left Aux (v1) or
Resistive Floats [4] N/A
0-5 Volt Single Aux (v1)
Resistive Floats [4] 0-620Ohm Left Aux (v1) or
N/A AUX Left/Single Tank
(GEA 24B Only) 0-620Ohm Single Aux (v1)
CiES CC284022-
XXXX-XXX
Resistive Floats [4] N/A 0-5 Volt Right Aux (v1)
Resistive Floats [4]
N/A 0-620Ohm Right Aux (v1)
(GEA 24B Only) AUX Right Tank
CiES CC284022-
XXXX-XXX
CDT Varies N/A K Type NIST ITS-90 K Type (v1) [1] Interface only
IAT Interface only
Varies N/A J Type NIST ITS-90 J Type (v1) [1]
OAT Garmin 011-00978-00 GTP 59 Garmin GTP 59 (v1) [1] Interface and installation
Notes:
[1] Select the GEA 24(B) port that the sensor is connected to in order to access the sensor configuration.
[2] Refer to Section 5.7.2 for fuel flow gauge smoothing filter and K-factor selection.
[3] Refer to Section 5.7.2 for P-lead magneto type and propeller-to-engine gear ratio selection.
[4] Resistive fuel probes interfaced to a GEA 24 or a GEA 24B that is wired with parallel resistors must have the sensor configuration set to 0-5 Volt.
Resistive fuel probes interfaced to a GEA 24B that is wired without parallel resistors must have the sensor configuration set to 0-620 Ohm.

Rev. 14 Page C-18
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC DATA
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data ...............................................................................................D-2
This appendix provides the following information for every model listed on the AML:
• Fuel Pressure Check Required: An “X” in this column necessitates a Fuel Pressure Check be
performed per Section 3.4.2, item 7. The Fuel Pressure Check only applies to piston aircraft with
fuel flow transducers installed per this STC.
• Lightning Zone Wing, Fuselage, and Empennage: Each column references the lightning zoning
figures from Appendix F that are applicable to a particular aircraft model.
• GTP 59: Each column references the suitable lightning zones for installation of the GTP 59
Temperature Probe in a particular aircraft model. For additional information, refer to Section 4.5.2.
• Notes: This column includes any notes related to a particular aircraft model.
NOTE
Any aircraft model listed in Table D-1 and not explicitly called out as nonmetallic by an
end note should be considered an all-metal aircraft.

Rev. 14 Page D-1
Table D-1 Aircraft Model-Specific Data
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
AERMACCHI S.p.A F.260, F.260B, F.260C, F.260D, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A10EU Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(AERMACCHI S.p.A) F.260E, F.260F Figure F-5 Zone 3
S.205-18/F, S.205-18/R, S.205-
AERMACCHI S.p.A Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A9EU 20/F, S.205-20/R, S.205-22/R, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(AERMACCHI S.p.A) Figure F-5 Zone 3
S.208, S.208A
AERO COMMANDER
(Dynac Aerospace Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
1A21 10, 10A, 100, 100A, 100-180 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Corp) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Volaire]
PA-60-600 (Aerostar 600), PA-60-
Aerostar 601 (Aerostar 601), PA-60-601P [1] [2]
Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A17WE (Aerostar Aircraft (Aerostar 601P), PA-60-602P Figure F-10 Figure F-18
Figure F-5 Zone 3 Ensure compliance with AD 74-
Corporation) (Aerostar 602P), PA-60-700P 25-02 if applicable.
(Aerostar 700P)
[1] [2]
Figure F-3, Aircraft may be IFR or limited to
Air Tractor Zone 2A, VFR per prior certification. For
A17SW AT-401 Figure F-4, Figure F-6 Figure F-18
(Air Tractor, Inc.) Zone 3 IFR aircraft, use Wing Figure F-
Figure F-5
3. For VFR only aircraft, use
Wing Figure F-4.
ALEXANDRIA
AIRCRAFT
A18CE (Alexandria Aircraft 17-30A, 17-31A, 17-31ATC Not Allowed Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 2A [1] [3] [8]
LLC)
[Bellanca, Inc.]

Rev. 14 Page D-2
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
ALEXANDRIA
AIRCRAFT
14-19, 14-19-2, 14-19-3, 14-19-
1A3 (Alexandria Aircraft Not Allowed Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 2A [1] [3] [8]
3A, 17-30, 17-31, 17-31TC
LLC)
[Bellanca, Inc.]
ALPHA AVIATION
CONCEPT LTD
(Alpha Aviation Figure F-4, Zone 2A,
A48EU R2160 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Concept Limited) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Alpha Aviation Design
Limited]
American Champion
(American Champion Zone 2A,
A3CE 402 X Figure F-3 Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8] [12]
Aircraft Corp.) Zone 3
[Champion]
American Champion
A21CE 8KCAB, 8GCBC Figure F-3 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8] [12]
[FRA Enterprises, Inc.]
American Champion
7EC, 7ECA, 7FC, 7GC, 7GCA,
A-759 7GCAA, 7GCB, 7GCBA, 7GCBC, Figure F-3 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8] [12]
7KCAB
[FRA Enterprises, Inc.]
APEX Aircraft
(APEX Aircraft) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A66EU R 3000/160 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[AVIONS PIERRE Figure F-5 Zone 3
ROBIN]
Aviat Aircraft, Inc.
A-1, A-1A, A-1B, A-1C-180, A-1C- Zone 2A,
A22NM (Aviat Aircraft Inc.) Figure F-3 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
200 Zone 3
[Sky International, Inc.]

Rev. 14 Page D-3
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Aviat Aircraft, Inc.
S-1S, S-1T, S-2A, S-2S, S-2B, S- Zone 2A,
A8SO (Aviat Aircraft, Inc.) Not Allowed Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
2C Zone 3
[Sky International, Inc.]
Bellanca
Zone 2A,
A-773 (Bellanca Aircraft 14-13, 14-13-2, 14-13-3 Not Allowed Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
Zone 3
Corporation)
BN-2, BN-2A, BN-2A-2, BN-2A-3,
B-N GROUP LTD.
BN-2A-6, BN-2A-8, BN-2A-9, BN-
(B-N Group Ltd.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A17EU 2A-20, BN-2A-21, BN-2A-26, BN- Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Pilatus Britten-Norman Figure F-5 Zone 3
2A-27, BN-2B-20, BN-2B-21, BN-
Limited]
2B-26, BN-2B-27
BC-1A, AT-6 (SNJ-2), AT-6A
BOEING
(SNJ-3), AT-6B, AT-6C (SNJ-4), Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-2-575 (The Boeing Company) Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
AT-6D (SNJ-5), AT-6F (SNJ-6), Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Rockwell International]
SNJ-7, T-6G
[1] [3] [8]
CESSNA
T-50 (Army AT-17, and UC-78
A-722 (Cessna Aircraft N/A Not Allowed Figure F-10 Not Allowed Zone 2A Installation using Figure F-10
series, and Navy JRC-1) only allowed for tube and fabric;
Company)
otherwise, Not Allowed
CESSNA 305A (USAF 0-1A), 305C (USAF Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
5A5 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Regal Air, Inc.) 0-1E), 305D (USAF 0-1G), 305F Figure F-5 Zone 3
CESSNA 305B, 305E (Military TO-1D, 0-1D Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
(Regal Air, Inc.) or 0-1F) Figure F-5 Zone 3
Cirrus Design
A00009C Corporation Figure F-3,
SR20, SR22, SR22T Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 [4] [8] [11] [13]
H (Cirrus Design Figure F-5
Corporation)

Rev. 14 Page D-4
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
COMMANDER
(Commander Aircraft 112, 112TC, 112B, 112TCA, 114, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A12SO Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Corporation) 114A, 114B, 114TC Figure F-5 Zone 3
[CPAC, Inc.]
Costruzioni
Aeronautiche Tecnam
S.P.A.
(Costruzioni
A62CE Aeronautiche Tecnam P2006T N/A Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
S.P.A.)
[Costruzioni
Aeronautiche Tecnam
srl]
Cougar [1] [2]

(Cougar Aircraft Figure F-3, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110 for interface
A17SO GA-7 Figure F-10 Figure F-18
Corporation) Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
[SOCATA, S.A.] sensors.
CUB CRAFTERS Figure F-4, Zone 2A,
A00053SE CC19-180 Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
(Cub Crafters, Inc.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
De Havilland Support
Limited
(De Havilland Support Beagle B.121 Series 1,
A22EU Limited) Beagle B.121 Series 2, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[British Aerospace, Beagle B.121 Series 3
Aircraft Group Scottish
Division]

Rev. 14 Page D-5
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
[4] [8] [11]
Installation approved for VFR
DIAMOND
Figure F-4, operation only.
TA4CH (Diamond Aircraft DA20-A1, DA20-C1 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3
Figure F-5 Interface to resistive fuel
Industries Inc.)
quantity sensors is not
approved in this aircraft.
[4] [8] [11] [13]
Diamond SB OSB 40-004/3
DIAMOND
incorporated: use Figure F-3
(Diamond Aircraft Figure F-3,
A47CE Industries Inc.) DA 40, DA 40 F Figure F-4, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 Absent Diamond SB OSB 40-
[Diamond Aircraft Figure F-5 004/3: use Figure F-4; install
Industries GmbH] limited to VFR ONLY; CANNOT
interface to resistive fuel
quantity sensors
DIAMOND
(Diamond Aircraft [4] [8] [11] [13]
Figure F-3,
A47CE Industries Inc.) DA 40 NG N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 Must have Diamond SB OSB
Figure F-5
[Diamond Aircraft 40-004/3 incorporated.
Industries GmbH]
DISCOVERY
A00008D (Discovery Aviation, Figure F-3,
XL-2 X Not Allowed Figure F-18 Zone 3 [4] [8] [11]
E Inc.) Figure F-5
[Liberty Holdings, LLC]
EADS-PZL "Warszawa-
Okecie"
(EADS-PZL PZL-104 WILGA 80, PZL-104M
A55EU "Warszawa-Okecie" WILGA 2000, PZL-104MA WILGA X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
S.A.) 2000
[Panstwowe Zaklady
Lotnicze]

Rev. 14 Page D-6
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
EADS-PZL "Warszawa-
Okecie"
(EADS-PZL
PZL-KOLIBER 150A, PZL- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A69EU "Warszawa-Okecie" X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
KOLIBER 160A Figure F-5 Zone 3
S.A.)
[Panstwowe Zaklady
Lotnicze]
EXTRA
(Extra [1] [3] [8]
Flugzeugproduktions- EA 300, EA 300/L, EA 300/S, EA Zone 2A, Interface to resistive fuel
A67EU Not Allowed Figure F-6 Figure F-18
und Vertriebs - GmbH) 300/200 Zone 3 quantity sensors is not
[Extra Flugzeugbau approved in this aircraft.
GmbH]
Extra
(Extra [1] [3] [8]
Flugzeugproduktions- Zone 2A, Interface to resistive fuel
A67EU EA 300/LC X Not Allowed Figure F-6 Figure F-18
und Vertriebs - GmbH) Zone 3 quantity sensors is not
[Extra Flugzeugbau approved in this aircraft.
GmbH]
FFT-GmbH [4]
(FFT Gesellschaft fur Installation approved for VFR
SC01 B-160 Gyroflug Speed Figure F-4,
A58EU Flugzeug - & X Figure F-7 Not Allowed Zone 3 operation only. Interface to
Canard Figure F-5
Faserverbund- resistive fuel quantity sensors is
Technologie mbH) not approved in this aircraft.
FOUND BROTHERS
A13EA (Found Brothers FBA Centennial "100" X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Aviation Limited)

Rev. 14 Page D-7
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Frakes Aviation
(Frakes Aviation) F-44 (Army OA-14 Navy J4F-2), Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-734 Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Gulfstream American F-44A, SCAN Type 30 Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
FS2003 Corp.
(FS 2003 Corporation) Zone 2A,
A-780 PA-12, PA-12S Not Allowed Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, Zone 3
Inc]
FUJI
FA-200-160 , FA-200-180 , FA- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A4PC (Fuji Heavy Industries, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
200-180AO Figure F-5 Zone 3
Ltd.)
GA8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd
(GA 8 Airvan (Pty) Ltd) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A00011LA GA8, GA8-TC320 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Gippsland Aeronautics Figure F-5 Zone 3
Pty. Ltd.]
Gomolzig FlugzeuF-
und Maschinenbau
GmbH AS 202/15 "BRAVO" , AS 202/18A
A34EU (Gomolzig FlugzeuF- "BRAVO" , AS 202/18A4 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
und Maschinenbau "BRAVO"
GmbH)
[FFA Aircraft Bravo AG]
[4] [8] [11]
GROB Aircraft AG
(GROB Aircraft AG) G115, G115A, G115B, G115C, Figure F-4, Installation approved for VFR
A57EU Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 operation only. Interface to
[GROB Aerospace G115C2, G115D, G115D2 Figure F-5
GmbH i.l.] resistive fuel quantity sensors is
not approved in this aircraft.

Rev. 14 Page D-8
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Helio
(Helio Aircraft Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
3A3 15A , 20 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3]
Corporation) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Taylorcraft]
HELIO H-250, H-295 (USAF U-10D), HT-
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) 295, H-391 (USAF YL-24), H- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Alliance Aircraft Group, 391B, H-395 (USAF L-28A or U- Figure F-5 Zone 3
LLC] 10B), H-395A, H-700
HELIO [1] [2]
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
1A8 H-800 Figure F-6 Figure F-18
[Alliance Aircraft Group, Figure F-5 Zone 3 GTP 59 cannot be mounted on
LLC] aircraft wing.
HELIO
(Helio Aircraft, LLC) HST-550, HST-550A (USAF AU- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A4EA N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Alliance Aircraft Group, 24A) Figure F-5 Zone 3
LLC]
HOWARD
DGA-15P (Army UC-70, Navy GH-
(Howard Aircraft Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-717 1, GH-2, GH-3, NH-1), DGA-15J Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
Foundation) Figure F-5 Zone 3
(Army UC-70B), DGA-15W
[Jobmaster Co.]
Interceptor
(Interceptor Aviation
3A18 Inc.) 200, 200A, 200B, 200C, 200D Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Interceptor Aircraft
Corporation]
Interceptor
(Interceptor Aviation
3A18 Inc.) 400 N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Interceptor Aircraft
Corporation]

Rev. 14 Page D-9
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
JET SET AVIATION
HOLDINGS
7A3 (Jet Set Aviation M.S. 760, M.S. 760 A, M.S. 760 B N/A Figure F-14 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Holdings SAS)
[SOCATA]
King's Engineering
Fellowship
(The King’s Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A17CE 4500-300 , 4500-300 Series II X Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Engineering Figure F-5 Zone 3
Fellowship)
[Evangel-Air]
Legend Aviation &
Marine
(Legend Aviation & Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A6EA UC-1 (Twin-Bee) Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Marine, LLC) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[STOL Aircraft
Corporation]
Lovaux Ltd
A64EU (FLS Aerospace OA7 Optica Series 300 X Not Allowed Not Allowed [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
(Lovaux) Ltd.)
LUSCOMBE
(Good Earthkeeping Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-694 8, 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F, T-8F Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Organization, Inc.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Team Luscombe, LLC]

Rev. 14 Page D-10
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Bee Dee M-4, M-4, M-4C, M-4S,
M-4T, M-4-210, M-4-210C, M-4-
210S, M-4-210T, M-4-220, M-4-
220C, M-4-220S, M-4-220T, M-4-
180C, M-4-180S, M-4-180T, M-5-
Maule 210C, M-5-220C, M-5-235C, M-5-
(Maule Aerospace 180C, M-5-210TC, M-6-235, M-6-
3A23 Technology, Inc.) 180, M-5-200, M-7-235, MX-7- Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Maule Aircraft 235, MX-7-180, MXT-7-180, MT-
Corporation] 7-235, M-8-235, MX-7-160, MXT-
7-160, MX-7-180A, MXT-7-180A,
MX-7-180B, M-7-235B, M-7-235A,
M-7-235C, MX-7-180C, M-7-260,
MT-7-260, M-7-260C, MX-7-160C,
MX-7-180AC, M-4-180V, M-9-235
Maule
(Maule Aerospace
MX-7-420, M-7-420AC, M-7-420A, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
3A23 Technology, Inc.) X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
MT-7-420 Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Maule Aircraft
Corporation]
MICCO Aircraft Co.,
Inc.
(MICCO Aircraft MAC-125C, MAC-145, MAC- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
3A1 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company, Inc.) 145A, MAC-145B Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Aero Acquisitions,
LLC]
Mooney
A6SW (Mooney Aircraft M22 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation)

Rev. 14 Page D-11
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Mooney
M20, M20A, M20B, M20C, M20D,
(Mooney International
M20E, M20F, M20G, M20J, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
2A3 Corporation) Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
M20K, M20L, M20M, M20R, Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Mooney Aviation
M20S, M20TN
Company, Inc.]
Nardi Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
7A5 FN-333 X Figure F-8 Not Allowed [1] [2]
(Nardi S.A.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
Navion (L-17A), Navion A (L-17B,
Navion
L-17C), Navion B, Navion D, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-782 (Sierra Hotel Aero, Inc.) Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Navion E, Navion F, Navion G, Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Navion Aircraft LLC]
Navion H
Pacific Aerospace
Limited.
FBA-2C, FBA-2C1, FBA-2C2, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A7EA (Pacific Aerospace Ltd.) X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
FBA-2C3 Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Found Aircraft Canada,
Inc.]
Piaggio Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-813 P.136-L, P.136-L1, P.136-L2 Figure F-11 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Piaggio & C.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
Pilatus PC-6, PC-6-H1, PC-6-H2, PC- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) 6/350, PC-6/350-H1, PC-6/350-H2 Figure F-5 Zone 3
PC-6/A, PC-6/A-H1, PC-6/A-H2,
PILATUS PC-6/B-H2, PC-6/B1-H2, PC- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
7A15 N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Pilatus Aircraft Ltd.) 6/B2-H2, PC-6/B2-H4, Figure F-5 Zone 3
PC-6/C-H2, PC-6/C1-H2
PILATUS Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A50EU PC-7 N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(PILATUS Aircraft Ltd.) Figure F-5 Zone 3

Rev. 14 Page D-12
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
PA-18, PA-18S, PA-18 "105"
(Special), PA-18S "105" (Special),
Piper Aircraft, Inc. PA-18A, PA-18 "125" (Army L-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 21A), PA-18S "125", PA-18AS Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
1A2 Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, "125", PA-18 "135" (Army L-21B), Figure F-5 Zone 3
Inc] PA-18A "135", PA-18S "135", PA-
18 "150", PA-18A "150", PA-18S
"150", PA-19 (Army L-18C)
Piper Aircraft, Inc.
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
1A4 PA-20, PA-20 "135" Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
[The New Piper Aircraft, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Inc]
PA-22, PA-22-108, PA-22-135,
1A6 PA-22S-135, PA-22-150, PA-22S- Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [3] [8]
150, PA-22-160
Inc]
PA-23, PA-23-160, PA-23-235,
1A10 PA-23-250, PA-23-250 (Navy UO- Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
1), PA-E23-250
Inc]
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-24, PA-24-250, PA-24-260, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[The New Piper Aircraft, PA-24-400 Figure F-5 Zone 3
Inc]

Rev. 14 Page D-13
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
PA-28-160 (Cherokee), PA-28-
150 (Cherokee), PA-28-180
(Cherokee), PA-28S-160
(Cherokee), PA-28S-180
(Cherokee), PA-28-235 (Cherokee
Pathfinder), PA-28-140 (Cherokee
Cruiser), PA-28R-180 (Arrow),
PA-28R-200 (Arrow), PA-28R-200
(Arrow II), PA-28S-180 (Archer),
2A13 PA-28-235 (Cherokee Pathfinder), Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
PA-28-151 (Cherokee Warrior),
Inc]
PA-28-181 (Archer II), PA-28-181
(Archer III), PA-28-161 (Warrior
II), PA-28-161 (Warrior III), PA-
28R-201 (Arrow III), PA-28R-201T
(Turbo Arrow III), PA-28-236
(Dakota), PA-28RT-201 (Arrow
IV), PA-28RT-201T (Turbo Arrow
IV), PA-28-201T (Turbo Dakota)
A18SO PA-38-112 (Tomahawk) Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Inc]
Piper Aircraft, Inc. [1] [2]

(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) PA-44-180 (Seminole), PA-44- Figure F-3, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110 for interface
A19SO Figure F-10 Figure F-18
[The New Piper Aircraft, 180T Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
Inc] sensors.
A1EA PA-30, PA-39, PA-40 Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Inc]

Rev. 14 Page D-14
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
PA-32-260 (Cherokee Six 260),
PA-32-300 (Cherokee Six 300),
PA-32S-300 (Cherokee Six
Seaplane), PA-32R-300 (Lance),
PA-32RT-300 (Lance II), PA-
Piper Aircraft, Inc. 32RT-300T (Turbo Lance II), PA-
(Piper Aircraft, Inc.) 32R-301 (Saratoga SP), PA-32R- Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A3SO Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[The New Piper Aircraft, 301 (Saratoga II HP), PA-32R- Figure F-5 Zone 3
Inc] 301T (Turbo Saratoga SP), PA-
32-301 (Saratoga), PA-32-301T
(Turbo Saratoga), PA-32R-301T
(Saratoga II TC), PA-32-301FT
(Piper 6X), PA-32-301XTC (Piper
6XT)
PA-34-200 (Seneca), PA-34-200T
A7SO (Seneca II), PA-34-220T (Seneca Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
III, IV, V)
Inc]
Piper
PA-46-310P (Malibu), PA-46-
A25SO 350P (Malibu Mirage), PA-46R- Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
350T (Malibu Matrix)
Inc]
Piper
A25SO PA-46-500TP (Malibu Meridian) N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Inc]
Polskie Zaklady
Lotnicze Spolka zo.o
A44CE (Polskie Zaklady PZL M26 01 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Lotnicze Spolka zo.o)
[PZL MIELEC]

Rev. 14 Page D-15
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Revo, Inc.
(Revo, Incorporated) Lake LA-4, Lake LA-4-200, Lake Zone 2A,
1A13 Figure F-3 Figure F-9 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Global Amphibians Model 250 Zone 3
LLC]
RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH
(RUAG Aerospace Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
7A13 Do 28 A-1, Do 28 B-1 Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Services GmbH) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Fairchild Dornier
GmbH]
RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH
(RUAG Aerospace
Services GmbH) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A8IN Do 27 Q-6 Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Fairchild Dornier Figure F-5 Zone 3
GmbH]
DORNIER
LUFTFAHRT GmbH]
Rust (de Havilland) DHC-1 Chipmunk Mk 21, DHC-1
A44EU (Robert E. Rust, Jr.) Chipmunk Mk 22, DHC-1 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Robert E. Rust] Chipmunk Mk 22A
[4] [8] [11]
Installation approved for VFR
Slingsby Aviation Ltd. operation only.
A73EU T67M260 X Figure F-4 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3
(Slingsby Aviation Ltd.) Interface to resistive fuel
quantity sensors is not
approved in this aircraft.

Rev. 14 Page D-16
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
MS 880B (Rallye, Ralley Club),
MS 885 (Super Rallye), MS 894A,
MS 894E (Rallye Minerva 220),
SOCATA
MS 892A-150 (Commodore), MS
(SOCATA) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
7A14 892E-150 (Rallye 150GT), MS Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[S O C A T A - Groupe Figure F-5 Zone 3
893A (Rallye Commodore), MS
AEROSPATIALE]
893E (Rallye 180 GT), Rallye
100S, Rallye 150 ST, Rallye 150
T, Rallye 235 E, Rallye 235C
SOCATA
(SOCATA) TB 9, TB 10, TB 20, TB 21, TB Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[S O C A T A - Groupe 200 Figure F-5 Zone 3
AEROSPATIALE]
STOL Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-769 RC-3 (Sea-Bee) Figure F-8 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Sky Enterprises, Inc.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
SWIFT
(Swift Museum
A-766 Foundation, Inc) GC-1A, GC-1B Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Univair Aircraft
Corporation]
SYMPHONY
AIRCRAFT
INDUSTRIES INC.
A46CE (Symphony Aircraft OMF-100-160, SA 160 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2] [8] [11]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Industries Inc.)
[Ostmecklenburgische
Flugzeugbau GmbH]

Rev. 14 Page D-17
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation Inc
F172D, F172E, F172F, F172G,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A4EU F172H, F172K, F172L, F172M, X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Cessna Aircraft Figure F-5 Zone 3
F172N, F172P, FP172D
Company]
210, 210A, 210B, 210C, 210D,
210E, 210F, T210F, 210G,
Textron Aviation Inc T210G, 210H, T210H, 210J,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) T210J, 210K, T210K, 210L, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft T210L, 210M, T210M, 210N, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] P210N, T210N, 210R, P210R,
T210R, 210-5 (205), 210-5A
(205A)
Textron Aviation Inc.
A-768 120, 140 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
5A2 140A X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
Textron Aviation Inc. 150, 150A, 150B, 150C, 150D,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 150E, 150F, 150G, 150H, 150J, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft 150K, 150L, 150M, A150K, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] A150L, A150M, 152, A152
A-799 170, 170A, 170B Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]

Rev. 14 Page D-18
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
172, 172A, 172B, 172C, 172D,
172E, 172F (USAF T-41A), 172G,
3A12 172H (USAF T-41A), 172I, 172K, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
172L, 172M, 172N, 172P, 172Q,
Company]
172R, 172S
Textron Aviation Inc. 175, 175A, 175B, 175C, P172D,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) R172E (USAF T-41B,C,D), Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft R172G (USAF T-41C,D), R172J, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] R172K, 172RG
A13CE 177, 177A, 177B Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
A20CE 177RG Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
180, 180A, 180B, 180C, 180D,
5A6 180E, 180F, 180G, 180H, 180J, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
180K
Company]
182, 182A, 182B, 182C, 182D,
182E, 182F, 182G, 182H, 182J,
3A13 182K, 182L, 182M, 182N, 182P, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
182Q, 182R, 182S, 182T, R182,
Company]
T182, TR182, T182T
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 185, 185A, 185B, 185C, 185D, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft 185E, A185E, A185F Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company]

Rev. 14 Page D-19
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 190, 195 (LC-126A,B,C), 195A, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-790 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Cessna Aircraft 195B Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company]
206, P206, P206A, P206B,
P206C, P206D, P206E, U206,
Textron Aviation Inc. U206A, U206B, U206C, U206D,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) U206E, U206F, U206G, TP206A, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A4CE Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Cessna Aircraft TP206B, TP206C, TP206D, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] TP206E, TU206A, TU206B,
TU206C, TU206D, TU206E,
TU206F, TU206G, 206H, T206H
A16CE 207, 207A, T207, T207A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
Textron Aviation Inc. [1] [2]

(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110 for interface
A34CE T303 (Crusader) Figure F-10 Figure F-18
[Cessna Aircraft Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
Company] sensors.
310, 310A (USAF U-3A), 310B,
Textron Aviation Inc. 310C, 310D, 310E (USAF U-3B),
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 310F, 310G, 310H, E310H, 310I, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft 310J, 310J-1, E310J, 310K, 310L, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] 310N, 310P, T310P, 310Q,
T310Q, 310R, T310R
320, 320-1, 320A, 320B, 320C,
3A25 320D, 320E, 320F, 335, 340, Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
340A
Company]

Rev. 14 Page D-20
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
A2CE 336 Figure F-12 Not Allowed [1] [2]
Company]
337, 337A (USAF 02B), 337B,
Textron Aviation Inc. T337B, M337B (USAF 02A),
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 337C, T337C, 337D, T337D, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A6CE Figure F-12 Not Allowed [1] [2]
[Cessna Aircraft 337E, T337E, 337F, T337F, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] 337G, T337G, 337H, P337H,
T337H, T337H-SP
(Textron Aviation Inc.) LC40-550FG, LC41-550FG, Figure F-3,
A00003SE Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 [4] [8]
[Cessna Aircraft LC42-550FG Figure F-5
Company]
(Textron Aviation Inc.) Figure F-3,
A00003SE T240 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 Zone 3 [4] [8]
[Cessna Aircraft Figure F-5
Company]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 45 (YT-34), A45 (T-34A, B-45), Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Beechcraft D45 (T-34B) Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
Textron Aviation 50 (L-23A), B50 (L-23B), C50,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) D50 (L-23E), D50A, D50B, D50C, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Beechcraft D50E, D50E-5990, E50 (L-23D, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation] RL-23D), F50, G50, H50, J50

Rev. 14 Page D-21
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation [1] [2]
A23CE 58P, 58PA, 58TC, 58TCA Figure F-10 Figure F-18
[Beechcraft Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
Corporation] sensors.
Textron Aviation
TC 779 G17S Figure F-16 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
[Beechcraft Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
19A, B19, M19A, 23, A23, A23A,
A1CE A23-19, A23-24, B23, C23, A24, Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
A24R, B24R, C24R
Corporation]
Textron Aviation [1] [2]

A29CE 76 Figure F-10 Figure F-18
[Beechcraft Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
Corporation] sensors.
Textron Aviation
A30CE 77 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) D17S (Army UC-43, UC*43B, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-649 Figure F-16 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
[Beechcraft Navy GB-1, GB-2), SD17S Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 35, A35, B35, C35, D35, E35, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-777 Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [2]
[Beechcraft F35, G35, 35R Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]

Rev. 14 Page D-22
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation
A26CE T-34C (T-34C-1) (34C) N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Corporation]
Textron Aviation 35-33, 35-A33, 35-B33, 35-C33,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) 35-C33A, E33, E33A, E33C, F33, Figure F-3, Zone 2A, [1] [2]
3A15 Figure F-6 Figure F-18
[Beechcraft F33A, F33C, G33, G36, 36, A36, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation] A36TC, B36TC
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) H35, J35, K35, M35, N35, P35, Figure F-3, Zone 2A, [1] [2]
3A15 Figure F-6 Not Allowed
[Beechcraft S35, V35, V35A, V35B Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
D55, D55A, E55, E55A, 56TC,
Textron Aviation
A56TC, 58, 58A, G58, 95, B95,
3A16 B95A, D95A, E95, 95-55, 95-A55, Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
95-B55, 95-B55A, 95-B55B (T-
Corporation]
42), 95-C55, 95-C55A
Textron Aviation F150F, F150G, F150H, F150J,
(Textron Aviation Inc.) F150K, F150L, F150M, F152, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft FA150K, FA150L, FA150M, Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company] FA152, FRA150L, FRA150M
Textron Aviation
(Textron Aviation Inc.) FR172E, FR172G, FR172H, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
[Cessna Aircraft FR172J, FR172K Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company]
Textron Aviation
A26EU F177RG Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]

Rev. 14 Page D-23
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Textron Aviation
A42EU F182P, F182Q, FR182 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Company]
Textron Aviation
F337E, FT337E, F337F, FT337F,
A23EU F337G, FT337GP, F337H, Figure F-12 Not Allowed [1] [2]
FT337HP
Company]
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
INC. 600 S-2D, S2R, S2R-R3S, S2R- Zone 2A,
A3SW Figure F-4 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) R1340 Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace]
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
INC. Zone 2A,
A3SW S2R-T34, S2R-T15, S2R-T11 N/A Figure F-4 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace]
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
INC. 600 S-2D, S2R-R1340, S2R, S2R- Zone 2A,
A4SW Figure F-4 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) R1820, S2R-R3S Zone 3
[Quality Aerospace]
THRUSH AIRCRAFT,
S2R-G10, S2R-G5, S2R-T34,
INC. Zone 2A,
A4SW S2R-T65, S2R-G1, S2R-T15, N/A Figure F-4 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Thrush Aircraft, Inc.) Zone 3
S2R-T45, S2R-T11, S2R-G6
[Quality Aerospace]
TKEF [1] [2]

(The King’s Figure F-3, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110 for interface
A2WI 44 Figure F-11 Figure F-18
Engineering Fellowship Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
(TKEF)) sensors.

Rev. 14 Page D-24
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
TOPCUB AIRCRAFT,
A00006SE INC. CC18-180, CC18-180A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
(Topcub Aircraft, Inc.)
TRIDENT Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A19EA TR-1 X Figure F-8 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Viking Air, Ltd) Figure F-5 Zone 3
True Flight Holdings
LLC
A11EA (True Flight Holdings AA-1, AA-1A, AA-1B, AA-1C Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
LLC)
[Tiger Aircraft LLC]
True Flight Holdings
LLC
A16EA (True Flight Holdings AA-5, AA-5A, AA-5B, AF-5B Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
LLC)
[Tiger Aircraft LLC]
Twin Commander
(Twin Commander
6A1 Aircraft LLC) 500, 500A, 520, 560, 560A Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Twin Commander
Aircraft Corporation]
Univair
415-D, 415-E, 415-G, F-1, F-1A, Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-787 (Univair Aircraft Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [2]
A-2, A2-A, M10 Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation)
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-718 415-C, 415-CD Figure F-6 Not Allowed [1] [2]
[Mooney]

Rev. 14 Page D-25
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
Univair
(Univair Aircraft Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-767 108, 108-1, 108-2, 108-3 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
[Stinson]
Viking Air Limited
A-806 (Viking Air Limited) DHC-2 Mark I, DHC-2 Mark II Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Bombardier Inc.]
Viking Air Limited
A-806 (Viking Air Limited) DHC-2 Mark III N/A Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[Bombardier Inc.]
[1] [2] [3] [8]
A00075C Vulcanair S.p.A. Figure F-3, Zone 2A, For main cabin tube structure,
Vulcanair V1.0 X Figure F-6 Figure F-18
E (Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure F-5 Zone 3 [3] applies; for other areas, [2]
applies.
Vulcanair S.p.A. P.68, P.68B, P.68C, P.68C-TC, [1] [2]

(Vulcanair S.p.A.) P.68 "OBSERVER", P.68TC Figure F-3, Zone 2A, Requires GEA 110 for interface
A31EU Figure F-10 Figure F-18
[Partenavia Costruzioni "OBSERVER", P.68 "OBSERVER Figure F-5 Zone 3 to resistive fuel quantity
Aeronautiche S.p.A] 2", P.68R sensors.
Vulcanair S.p.A.
(Vulcanair S.p.A.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A31EU AP68TP-300 "SPARTACUS" N/A Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
[Partenavia Costruzioni Figure F-5 Zone 3
Aeronautiche S.p.A]
W.Z.D Enterprises Inc.
(W.Z.D Enterprises Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A-804 11A, 11E X Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Inc.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
[JGS Properties, LLC]

Rev. 14 Page D-26
[common name or
GTP 59 Location
Check Required
Type Certificate
previous make]
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
Lightning Zone
(TCDS Holder)
Aircraft Model
Fuel Pressure
Aircraft Make
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Appendix F)
Designation
Empennage
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Type (Ref.
Fuselage
Number
Notes
Wing
WACO Classic Aircraft
Corporation
(WACO Classic Figure F-4, Figure F-6, Zone 2A,
A18EA 2T-1A , 2T-1A-1 , 2T-1A-2 Figure F-18 [1] [3]
Aircraft Corporation) Figure F-5 Figure F-16 Zone 3
[Great Lakes Aircraft
Company]
WACO
ATC 542 (The WACO Aircraft YMF N/A Figure F-16 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
Company)
WSK "PZL-MIELEC"
OBR
A68EU (WSK PZL MIELEC PZL M20 03 X Figure F-10 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
and OBR SK MIELEC)
[PZL]
Zenair Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
TA5CH CH2000 Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
(Zenair Ltd.) Figure F-5 Zone 3
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
A76EU (ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Z-242L, Z-143L Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [2]
Figure F-5 Zone 3
[MORAVAN a.s.]
ZLIN Aircraft a.s.
(ZLIN Aircraft a.s.) Figure F-3, Zone 2A,
A30EU ZLIN 526L Figure F-6 Figure F-18 [1] [3] [8]
[Moravan National Figure F-5 Zone 3
Corporation]
Notes:
[1] The GTP 59 cannot be installed on Zone 2A composite areas.
[2] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the aluminum skin. For details, refer to Section 4.5.2.
[3] The GTP 59 must be bonded to the metallic tube structure. For details, refer to Section 4.5.2.
[4] The GTP 59 must be isolated from the aircraft ground plane. For details, refer to Section 4.5.2.
[5] Reserved.
[6] Reserved.

Rev. 14 Page D-27
[7] Reserved.
[8] Nonmetallic aircraft.
[9] Reserved.
[10] Reserved.
[11] Remote LRUs must be installed on existing structure designated by aircraft manufacturer for avionics installation.
[12] For wing lightning zones, equipment installation only allowed in aluminum wings. Equipment installation is NOT allowed in wooden wings.
[13] Wires must be routed behind metallic substructure (i.e., routed behind instrument panel/pedestal/circuit breaker panel, along lightning ground
bar/strip, inside lightning ground tube, or along other airframe ground plane).

Rev. 14 Page D-28
APPENDIX E EIS GAUGE LAYOUT
E.1 Main EIS Page ................................................................................................................................. E-2

E.2 AUX EIS Page ................................................................................................................................. E-7
E.3 CHT/EGT Page................................................................................................................................ E-8
E.4 Fuel Page.......................................................................................................................................... E-9
E.5 Summary Page ............................................................................................................................... E-10
E.6 Gauge Markings............................................................................................................................. E-11
E.6.1 Caution and Warning Alerts.................................................................................................... E-11
E.6.2 Gauge with Varying Arc Width .............................................................................................. E-12
This appendix provides guidance for configuring EIS gauge layouts for the GI 275 EIS display. Any
deviation from the requirements contained within will require the installer to obtain additional approval.
The gauge layout of the GI 275 may differ between installations due to various factors. Gauge layouts are
generated automatically by the GI 275 depending on the selected engine sensors, specific gauge
configuration and markings, and the number of EIS displays installed. Guidelines for how the EIS gauge
layout is generated are given in the following sections.
Not all aircraft and the engine indications are compatible with the GI 275 EIS due to the installed engine
gauges and the associated markings. For incompatibility cases, the original gauge must be retained. Refer
to Section 2 for limitations.
The GI 275 EIS provides up to five different pages depending on the system configuration: Main EIS
page, AUX EIS page, CHT/EGT page, Fuel page, and Summary page. Each page has three distinct
display sections: top, middle, and bottom.
NOTE
The gauge minimum and maximum limits may be adjusted to optimize pilot interpretation
of the gauge; however, all limitations in the POH/AFM or other approved aircraft data
must be displayed on the gauge.

Rev. 14 Page E-1
E.1 Main EIS Page
The Main EIS page is divided into four sections: top, bottom, middle-left, which contains a CHT/EGT
Graph, and middle-right, which contains strip gauges.
The following is an example of the GI 275 Main EIS page.
Figure E-1 Example Main EIS Page
Top Full-Time Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section at the top to display specific gauge information on all pages. This
includes RPM and Manifold Pressure (if applicable). Additionally, a Prop Sync Wheel (conventional twin-
engine only) or Percent Power can be configured to be displayed.
Percent Power requires the following gauge inputs: RPM, Manifold Pressure, Fuel Flow, and OAT, as well
as inputting the Max Rated Horsepower, Max MAP, RPM at Max HP, and the Minimum Brake Specific
Fuel Consumption (BSFC). Refer to Section 5.7.1 for engine configuration settings.
The Manifold Pressure gauge can be configured to show on the left side or on the right side of the RPM
gauge. Refer to Figure E-2 for examples.
Figure E-2 Top Full-Time Gauge Examples
Bottom Full-Time Fuel Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section at the bottom to display specific gauge information on all pages. If Main
Fuel is configured, the Main Fuel Quantity beakers will be shown on every page in the bottom center
(single or left/right). If Fuel Quantity is not configured, Outside Air Temperature will be displayed in this
location. If Fuel Quantity and OAT are not configured, Time (UTC) will be displayed full-time in the
bottom center position.
For twin-engine aircraft, the Fuel Quantity gauge must only be shown on one EIS unit. Toggle the Show
button in the EIS Gauges menu on one of the two EIS displays so that the Fuel Quantity gauge is only
shown on one unit.

Rev. 14 Page E-2
Bottom Full-time AUX/Tip Fuel Quantity and Electrical Gauges
If AUX/Tip tanks are configured, AUX/Tip Fuel beaker gauges will be displayed to the left and right of the
Main Fuel Quantity beaker gauges. If AUX/Tip tanks are not configured but digital gauges (e.g.,
Alternator, Battery, Bus - Volts/AMPS) are configured, up to two digital gauges will be displayed in the
bottom left and right corners. If a single AUX gauge is configured, its fuel beaker gauge will be displayed
in the lower left corner. Additionally, if a single AUX gauge and only one digital gauge are configured, the
digital gauge will also populate next to the AUX gauge in the lower right position. Refer to Figure E-3 for
examples.
The priority for populating bottom left and bottom right full-time gauges is as follows:
(With Red or Yellow Markings)
1. AUX/Tip Fuel (left/right center) – always highest priority over any digital gauge
2. Alternator Amps
3. Battery Volts
4. Bus Volts
5. Battery Amps
(Without Red or Yellow Markings)
6. Alternator Amps
7. Battery Volts
8. Bus Volts
9. Battery Amps IAT
Figure E-3 Bottom Full-Time Gauge Examples

For twin-engine aircraft, the Fuel Quantity gauge must only be shown on one EIS unit. Toggle the Show
button in the EIS Gauges menu on one of the two EIS displays so that the Fuel Quantity gauge is only
shown on one unit.

Rev. 14 Page E-3
Middle Left CHT/EGT Graph
The GI 275 EIS provides a 4 or 6-cylinder CHT/EGT graph in the middle left of the Main EIS page. This
section displays CHT, EGT, and if configured, Primary EGT or TIT (single or dual) in a bar graph layout
with digital readouts above the graph for the hottest cylinder or the user-selected cylinder. Refer to Figure
E-4 for examples.
Figure E-4 CHT/EGT Graph Examples
Middle Right Strip Gauges

The GI 275 EIS provides a section in the middle right of the display that arranges up to four strip gauges or
up to three strip gauges with two digital gauges. This section layout will differ depending on the displayed
gauges and the alerting lines configured with the corresponding gauge. Refer to Figure E-5 for layout
examples.
Figure E-5 Strip Gauge Examples

The gauges in the middle right of the Main EIS page follow a gauge priority scheme as shown below.
Number 1 is the highest priority gauge and number 17 is the lowest priority gauge. The section populates
the gauge layout from top to bottom following the prioritization scheme listed below.
The following are exceptions to the priority list:
• If AUX/Tip tanks are configured and at least one digital gauge is configured with a red/yellow
alert, this gauge will take the top slot
• The Fuel Flow gauge will always be placed in the fourth slot (near the fuel quantity) unless it is
unmarked with an alert and four other gauges are marked with a red/yellow alert
(With Red or Yellow Markings)
1. Oil Pressure
2. Oil Temperature
3. Fuel Flow
4. Fuel Pressure
5. Carb Temp
6. CDT
7. IAT

Rev. 14 Page E-4
8. CDT/IAT Diff
9. Digital
a. ALT AMPS
b. BATT Volts
c. BUS Volts
d. BATT AMPS
(Without Red or Yellow Markings)
10. Oil Pressure
11. Oil Temperature
12. Fuel Flow
13. Fuel Pressure
14. Carb Temp
15. CDT
16. IAT
17. CDT/IAT Diff
Figure E-6 Strip Gauge Priority Examples
The nomenclature with examples shown below can be used to determine EIS gauge placement:
[S1] Oil Press, unless Aux Fuel and alerting digital gauges are configured; if so, shift this and the
subsequent gauges down.
[S2] Oil Temp.
[S3] 1. Highest priority marked gauge.
2. Fuel Pressure.
3. Highest priority unmarked gauge.
[S4] 1. Next highest priority marked gauge.
2. Fuel Flow.
3. Next highest priority unmarked gauge.
Refer to Figure E-7 for more information.

Rev. 14 Page E-5
Figure E-7 Strip Gauge Diagram
All alerting (i.e., red or yellow markings) gauges must be shown on the Main EIS page of the EIS display.
Some aircraft may have more alerting gauges than the GI 275 can display on a single EIS unit. If not all
alerting gauges can be configured for display on the Main EIS page, the original gauges must be retained.

Rev. 14 Page E-6
E.2 AUX EIS Page
The AUX EIS page is divided into four sections: top, bottom, middle left, and middle right. This page
provides supplemental EIS gauges and information. The top arc segment as well as the bottom segment
with Fuel Quantity are unchanged from the Main EIS page. No red/yellow alerting gauges can be
configured on the AUX EIS page without being displayed on the Main EIS page as well.
The middle left section of the AUX EIS page provides two miscellaneous fields that may be populated
differently depending on the EIS sensors displayed and gauge markings configured. The top field is a user-
selectable field for miscellaneous information.
The bottom field is reserved for digital gauges or another user-selectable field for miscellaneous
information. If AUX/Tip tanks are configured, as well as digital gauges, this space will display the digital
gauges (up to four). If more than two digital gauges are configured with or without AUX/Tip tanks, the
digital gauges will all be displayed in this field (up to four), even if the information is repeated from the
Main EIS page. Refer to Figure E-8 for examples.
Figure E-8 Left Side Aux Gauges Examples

The middle right section of the AUX EIS page provides two user-selectable fields for miscellaneous
information if no unmarked strip gauges are displayed on the AUX EIS page. If there are unmarked strip
gauges that do not fit onto the Main EIS page due to other priorities, these gauges will populate the middle
right of the AUX EIS page. Up to four strip gauges can be displayed on the AUX EIS page. One strip
gauge will replace the lower user-selectable field. Two or more strip gauges will replace both user-
selectable fields and will populate the gauges from the top down based on the strip gauge priorities. Refer
to Figure E-9 for examples.
Figure E-9 Right Side Aux Gauges Examples

The bottom of the AUX EIS page has the full-time center position for Fuel Qty, OAT, or Time, with spaces
for digital gauges on the left and right. If unmarked digital gauges cannot be displayed on the Main EIS
page due to other gauge priorities (such as AUX Fuel), they will be displayed on the bottom-left and
bottom-right, beginning with the higher priority digital gauge on the left. Refer to Figure E-10 for
examples.
Figure E-10 Bottom AUX Gauges Examples

Rev. 14 Page E-7
E.3 CHT/EGT Page
The CHT/EGT page is dedicated to CHT and EGT information, as well as Primary EGT or TIT, if
applicable. Similarly to the Main EIS and AUX EIS pages, the top section displays full-time gauges and
the bottom center area displays fuel quantity.
The bar graph on the CHT/EGT page will populate with 4 or 6 pairs (depending on engine configuration)
of CHT and EGT bars for each cylinder. If TIT sensors are installed and configured on the GI 275, then
one or two (depending on configuration) bars for TIT will be displayed on the right-hand side of the CHT/
EGT page. Alternatively, if a Primary EGT sensor is installed and configured, a bar for Primary EGT will
be displayed on the right-hand side of the CHT/EGT page. There is also a space below the CHT/EGT bar
graph where Fuel Flow is displayed, if installed and configured.
Figure E-11 CHT/EGT Page Examples

The CHT/EGT page can be cycled through three different modes that change display aspects of the CHT/
EGT bar graph for different pilot operations, such as Lean Assist or viewing cylinders in Normalized
layout during cruise.

Rev. 14 Page E-8
E.4 Fuel Page
If a Fuel Flow sensor is installed and configured, a Fuel page is available on the GI 275 EIS. Similar to the
AUX EIS and CHT/EGT pages, the top and bottom of the Fuel page retains the same full-time gauges and
fuel quantity gauges. The Fuel page will show Estimated Fuel and Endurance based on the Fuel Flow
sensor data. It will also show the Fuel Flow gauge with the fuel computer “fuel used” value.
Figure E-12 Fuel Page without GPS Source

Additionally, if a GPS source is interfaced with the GI 275 EIS, the Fuel page will display estimated range
and efficiency based on fuel flow sensor data and will give fuel and endurance estimates for a flight plan
waypoint if one is loaded on the interfaced GPS.
Figure E-13 Fuel Page with GPS Source

Rev. 14 Page E-9
E.5 Summary Page
The Summary page provides supplemental flight summary information. Similarly to the Main EIS and
AUX EIS pages, the top and bottom of the Summary page retain the full-time gauges and Fuel Quantity
gauges. The Summary page will additionally show Aircraft Timer information, RPM, and Temperature
data, as well as Fuel and Lean data.
Figure E-14 Summary Page – Aircraft Timers
Figure E-15 Summary Page – RPM and Temp Data
Figure E-16 Summary Page – Fuel and Lean Data

Rev. 14 Page E-10
E.6 Gauge Markings
E.6.1 Caution and Warning Alerts
The GI 275 EIS will generate alerts for gauges with configured red or yellow markings by highlighting the
numerical value in a red or yellow background, respectively. For strip and digital readout gauges, a
flashing alert triangle is generated in the top left of the display in addition to highlighting the numerical
gauge value. This alert triangle will persist on all EIS pages. Touching the triangle will stop the flashing
and return the display to the Main EIS page. The full-time arc gauges do not generate alert banners.
Figure E-17 Caution Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged)
Figure E-18 Warning Alert (Flashing and Acknowledged)

If both a Caution and a Warning alert have triggered, the flashing Warning alert triangle will be displayed,
and each numerical gauge value will flash the appropriate color (yellow for Caution and red for Warning).
Touching the flashing Warning alert triangle will acknowledge both the Caution and Warning alerts. The
non-flashing Warning alert triangle will persist until the alert condition is no longer true, in which case the
non-flashing Caution alert triangle will be displayed as long as that alert condition is true.
Figure E-19 Caution and Warning Alerts (Flashing and Acknowledged)

Rev. 14 Page E-11
If an acknowledged Warning alert triangle is currently displayed and a new Caution alert triggers, a
flashing Caution alert triangle will display in place of the Warning alert triangle. Once the Caution alert is
acknowledged, the alert triangle will default to the higher priority non-flashing Warning alert triangle.
Figure E-20 New Caution Alert with Ongoing Warning Alert

Certain gauges (Oil Pressure, Manifold Pressure, and Fuel Pressure) do not trigger alerts until the engine is
started. Gauges with red or yellow markings must be displayed on the Main EIS page. Green, blue, and
white markings do not produce alerts or affect gauge prioritization, and may be shown on the AUX EIS
page.
E.6.2 Gauge with Varying Arc Width

The GI 275 EIS display does not provide varying gauge arc width configuration options, as seen in
Figure E-21. If a gauge that contains a varying arc width is being replaced, it must be configured so that the
arc length is continuous for the intended length of the colored arc. Refer to Figure E-21 as an example.
Varying Gauge Arc Width Continuous Gauge Arc Width

Example Example
Figure E-21 Varying Gauge Arc

Rev. 14 Page E-12
APPENDIX F HIRF AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
F.1 Shielded Wire ..................................................................................................................................F-2

F.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59 ...........................................................................................................F-3
F.2.1 Wings .....................................................................................................................................F-3
F.2.2 Fuselage .................................................................................................................................F-8
F.2.3 Empennage ...........................................................................................................................F-18
F.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams ...........................................................................................F-19

Rev. 14 Page F-1
F.1 Shielded Wire
When extending existing sensor wiring, it is required to maintain continuity of the wire shield.
For the shielded wire(s), the shield on both sides of the open segment must be reconnected after the splice
is complete with a spacing of approximately 3 inches or less in total length.
1. Use solder sleeves with an insulated shield drain to jumper the shield ends together.
2. Protect the open segment of wire with fusion tape.
3. Start the wrap by making a complete turn of the tape around the cable approximately 0.5 inches
from the repair area.
4. Overlap the preceding wrap by 50%.
5. Extend the tape over the repair area by approximately 0.5 inches.
6. Use lacing tape to spot tie the end of the fusion tape.
1/2" 3" Segment opening 1/2"

Insulated shield drain
Shielded wire Fusion tape Lacing cord Shielded wire

Figure F-1 Shielded Wire Splice

Rev. 14 Page F-2
F.2 Lightning Zones for GTP 59
This section provides lightning zoning diagrams for various types of aircraft to facilitate correct placement
of the GTP 59. Additional restrictions related to the placement of the GTP 59 can be found in Section
4.5.2.
The zoning levels correspond to the severity of lightning strikes and probability of occurrence on the
aircraft. The order of severity starting with the safest zone is Zone 3, 2A, 2B, 1C, and 1A/1B. The GTP 59
cannot be installed in Zones 1A, 1B, 1C, or 2B.
All diagrams in this appendix use the legend shown in Figure F-2. The zoning described is split into the
following: wings, fuselage, and empennage. For the particular airframe, the applicable wings, fuselage,
and empennage zoning should be merged to get a complete zonal definition. The zoning figures applicable
to any particular model are found in Table D-1. If there is a region of overlapping zones, the more severe
zone should always be applied (e.g., if Zone 2A and 1A overlap in a region, then the overlapping region
should be considered Zone 1A). Examples of complete lightning zoning diagrams can be found in
Appendix Section F.3.
Shading Zone Shading Zone
Zone 1A Zone 2A
Zone 1B Zone 2B
Zone 1C Zone 3
Figure F-2 Lightning Zoning Legend
F.2.1 Wings
The different zoning for wingtips and wings are contained in the following subsections.
F.2.1.1 Wingtips
F.2.1.1.1 Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation
NOTE
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are not limited to VFR
operation only in Table D-1. For zoning of models limited to VFR operation only, refer to
Appendix Section F.2.1.1.2.
Zoning of various types of wingtips is shown in Figure F-3. Figure F-3A shows zoning for straight
wingtips.
Figure F-3B shows zoning for curved wingtips. The zones are similar to those of straight wingtips. The
main difference is that Zone 1 extends from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent point of the
chord and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure F-3C shows zoning for winglets. Note that the winglet figure shows a flattened winglet. Winglet
classifications are very similar to those of curved wingtips. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends
from the outboard edge of the wing past the tangent point of the winglet and 0.5 meters inboard.
Figure F-3D shows zoning for tip tanks. The rule that applies to tip tanks is very similar to that of the
curved wing. The main difference is that Zone 1 extends 0.5 meters past the inboard edge of the tip tank.

Rev. 14 Page F-3
0.6 m
0.6 m
0.5 m
0.5 m Tangent Point
0.15 m 0.15 m
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
0.6 m
0.6 m
0.5 m
0.5 m
Tangent Point
Tangent Point
0.15 m
0.15 m
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure F-3 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Not Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. 14 Page F-4
F.2.1.1.2 Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation
This zoning section is applicable to those aircraft models that are limited to VFR operation only in
Appendix D. For zoning of models that are not limited to VFR operation only, refer to Appendix Section
F.2.1.1.1.
NOTE
The aircraft must have a position light in the wing tip area as a prerequisite for this STC.
If there is no position light on the wing, then no Zone 3 exists and the GTP 59 cannot be installed on this
particular aircraft. For those aircraft identified as VFR only in Appendix D, the following criteria is used to
determine the Zone 3 area:
• Zone 1A/1B finishes as shown in Figure F-3 or 0.5 meters inboard from the inboard edge of the
position light, whichever is the greater distance from the outboard edge of the wing tip, as shown
in Figure F-4.
• Zone 2A/2B extends a total of 2.1 meters inboard of Zone 1A/1B.
• Zone 3 extends inboard of Zone 2A/2B from the wing tip and stops at another Zone 1A/1B or
2A/2B determined from other areas of Appendix Section F.2.2.

Rev. 14 Page F-5
2.1 m
2.1 m 0.5 m
0.5 m Position Light
Position Light Tangent Point
0.15 m 0.15 m
A (STRAIGHT WINGTIP) B (CURVED WINGTIP)
2.1 m
2.1 m
0.5 m 0.5 m
Position Light Position Light
Tangent Point
Tangent Point
0.15 m
0.15 m
C (WINGLET) D (TIP TANKS)
Figure F-4 Zoning for Wingtips on Aircraft Limited to VFR Operation

Rev. 14 Page F-6
F.2.1.2 Landing Gear
The landing gear is considered Zone 1A. The struts that connect the landing gear to the wings are Zone 2A.
Each side of landing gear is zoned individually. If there is a single strut connecting the landing gear to the
wing, then the inboard and outboard edges of the landing gear should be used for zoning instead of using
the connection point of the wing and the strut. In addition to the zoning shown in Figure F-5, the zoning
described for the fuselage and wings also applies. The floats for a float-mounted fuselage have not been
zoned because they do not influence the zoning of the bottom of the fuselage. The GTP 59 cannot be
mounted on landing gear, including floats, or its struts.
Figure F-5 Zoning for Wings Affected by Landing Gear

Rev. 14 Page F-7
F.2.2 Fuselage
This section describes the zoning for several different types of fuselages. The empennage is zoned in
Appendix Section F.2.3. Aft of every Zone 2A is a 0.15 meter Zone 2B (i.e., Zone 2A is followed by a
0.15 meter Zone 2B). Although Zone 2B areas are marked on the diagrams, sometimes their widths are not
defined (0.15 meters should be used in these cases). The horizontal stabilizer of the tail is not zoned
because the GTP 59 cannot be mounted there. In addition, the GTP 59 cannot be mounted within
0.5 meters of the rear-most point of the fuselage. Appendix Section F.2.3 explains the conditions under
which the GTP 59 can be mounted on the vertical stabilizer. Although all diagrams show low-wing
aircraft, the same zoning can be applied to high-wing aircraft. The values d1 and d2 are defined as follows:
d1 = 1.3 m (51.2 in)
d2 = 2.6 m (102.4 in)
F.2.2.1 Single-Propeller Aircraft

Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with single propellers is shown in Figure F-6. The area of the nose
immediately aft of the propeller is Zone 3. The 0.6-meter distance should be measured from the outboard-
most edge of the fuselage or the tip of the propeller, whichever is longer. Figure F-8 shows the case of an
aircraft with a curved fuselage. The portion of the fuselage that extends 1.3 meters aft of the propeller
blades is Zone 1C. However, the bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59
there.
Figure F-6 Zoning for a Single Propeller (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 14 Page F-8
A
Figure F-7 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Canard with a Rear-Mounted Propeller

Rev. 14 Page F-9
A
NOTE
The bottom centerline is Zone 2A, and it is acceptable to mount the GTP 59 there.
Figure F-8 Zoning for a Low- or High-Wing Aircraft with a Curved Lower Fuselage

Rev. 14 Page F-10
A
B
Figure F-9 Zoning for a Single, Rear-Mounted Prop above Fuselage

Rev. 14 Page F-11
F.2.2.2 Aircraft with Multiple Propellers
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with twin front-mounted propellers is shown in Figure F-10. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal. Note that Zone 2A can overlap onto
the nacelles if they are within 0.6 meters outboard of the fuselage.
Zoning of low- or high-wing aircraft with rear-mounted twin propellers is shown in Figure F-11. The text
below assumes the aircraft fuselage and wing are constructed of metal.
For an empennage with a third engine, the GTP 59 cannot be located in the empennage. Therefore, the
zoning for this third engine area has been omitted from the diagrams below. The GTP 59 for this aircraft
should be located in Zone 3 or Zone 2A on the bottom of the fuselage and wings.
Figure F-10 Zoning for Front-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 14 Page F-12
A
NOTE
Although the engine nacelles are shown as Zone 3, they may be Zone 2A if the engine falls
within the Zone 2 area of the wing (within 0.6 meters outboard from fuselage edge).
Figure F-11 Zoning for Rear-Mounted Twin Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 14 Page F-13
A
NOTE
Nothing can be mounted in the tail boom of the aircraft.
Figure F-12 Zoning for Front- and Rear-Mounted Propellers (Low- or High-Wing)

Rev. 14 Page F-14
A
Figure F-13 Zoning for High-Wing with Front and Rear Propellers Mounted Above
Fuselage

Rev. 14 Page F-15
A
B
Figure F-14 Zoning for Low- or High-Wing Canard with Twin Jet Engines
P
G
P P
G
7239,(:/22.,1*'2:1
%277209,(:/22.,1*83
P P
P
Figure F-15 Zoning for Low or High Wing Canard with Twin Rear-Facing Props

Rev. 14 Page F-16
F.2.2.3 Biplanes
Figure F-16 shows how biplanes can be classified using previous figures. The top and bottom of both
wings will be zoned using Figure F-4, while the fuselage and the mid-sections of the wing can be zoned
using Figure F-6.
Figure F-16 Zoning for Single-Propeller Biplane
F.2.2.4 Aircraft with Jet Engines

Zoning of low- or high-wing twin jet engine aircraft is shown in Figure F-17.
d2
0.5m
d1
TOP (VIEW LOOKING DOWN)
BOTTOM (VIEW LOOKING UP)
0.5m
d2
d1
B
Figure F-17 Single Jet Engines with Two Inlets Zoning, Low or High Wing

Rev. 14 Page F-17
F.2.3 Empennage
If the GTP 59 cannot be mounted in other areas of the aircraft that are Zone 3 locations, it is acceptable for
metal aircraft with one of the three traditional empennages shown in Figure F-18 to mount the GTP 59 in
the Zone 2A area of the tail. However, the GTP 59 cannot be mounted on/under any non-conducting
surfaces. If the complete empennage of the aircraft being considered does not match those shown in Figure
F-18, then it should be mounted in allowed areas defined for the fuselage and wings. If only portions of the
empennage shown below match, then the same rule applies and the GTP 59 cannot be installed in the
empennage. Note that it is allowable for only the horizontal stabilizer tips to differ from those shown in
Figure F-18. The GTP 59 cannot be located in the horizontal stabilizer of the empennage. The GTP 59
cannot be mounted in the tail of a composite empennage.
A B C
D (APPLIES TO A) E (APPLIES TO B AND C)
Figure F-18 Zoning for Empennage

Rev. 14 Page F-18
F.3 Example Lightning Zoning Diagrams
This section contains sample lightning zoning diagrams for typical aircraft.
Figure F-19 Example Lightning Zoning for Single-Engine Aircraft

Rev. 14 Page F-19
Figure F-20 Example Lightning Zoning for Twin-Engine Aircraft

Rev. 14 Page F-20

Gi275 Install Manual 190-02246-14 - 14

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Gi275 Install Manual 190-02246-14 - 14

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GI 275

STC EIS & MFD

190-02246-14 June 2023 Revision 14

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Software License Notification

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

4. Term and Termination.

5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

DESCRIPTION OF REVISION CHANGES

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

1.1 STC Applicability .............................................................................................................................1-2

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Figure 1-1 GI 275 System Installation (Before and After Example)

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Table 1-1 Garmin Manuals and References for GI 275 System

Table 1-2 Garmin Installation Manuals for Other Systems

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

1.2.1 Model Specifics

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Backup GPS Coaxial Multi‐Function Display

[1]....Each GI 275 only supports one RS‐232 ARINC 429

Weather HSDB HSDB or Analog or NAV #1‐2

Figure 1-2 GI 275 Multi-Function Display Indicator

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Backup GPS Coaxial CDI

Figure 1-3 GI 275 Course Deviation Indicator

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Cylinder Head Temp Comp Discharge

Exhaust Gas Temp

Fuel Flow Fuel Quantity

Figure 1-4 GI 275 Single-Engine EIS Interfaces

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

Engine RPM Voltmeter Engine RPM Voltmeter

Not installed per

GPS HSDB or HSDB HSDB

Figure 1-5 GI 275 Twin-Engine EIS Interfaces

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

1.3.1 Display Sensors

Figure 1-6 VFR GPS Antenna

Figure 1-7 GTP 59 OAT Probe

190-02246-14 GI 275 STC EIS & MFD Installation Manual

1.3.2.1 GEA 24(B) Engine Adapter